Although our sensors are very accurate by industry standards, like all other sensor manufacturers we cannot guarantee perfection or assure that no errors will ever occur in any particular applications of our technology. Therefore, beyond the express Limited Warranty that accompanies each sensor sold by the company, we offer no additional representations, warranties, guarantees or remedies to our customers. It is recommended that purchasers and integrators evaluate the accuracy of each sensor to determine the acceptable margin of error for each application within their particular system(s).
SmartSensor HD
5 SmartSensor HD Bid Specification
1.0 General. This item shall govern the purchase of aboveground radar vehicle sensing devices (RVSD) equivalent to the Wavetronix SmartSensor™ HD.
An RVSD detects vehicles by transmitting electromagnetic radar signals through the air. The signals bounce off vehicles in their paths and part of the signal is returned to the RVSD. The returned signals are then processed to determine traffic parameters.
RVSDs are not affected by normal weather and environmental conditions such as rain, wind, snow, dust, etc. They also do not require cleaning and can maintain performance over a wide range of ambient temperatures.
RVSDs provide a non-intrusive means of detecting traffic because they can be installed at the side of a roadway. This property not only makes them safer to install but also more cost effective than sensors that require roadway modifications or placement.
2.0 Measured Quantities. The RVSD shall provide volume, average speed, occupancy, classification counts, 85th percentile speed, average headway, average gap, speed bin counts and direction counts for user-configurable time intervals for up to 22 lanes of traffic.
The RVSD shall provide up to eight length-based classification bins.
The RVSD shall provide up to 15 speed bins.
The RVSD shall provide speed, length, class, lane assignment, and range data for each vehicle detection.
The RVSD shall provide presence data for up to 22 lanes of traffic.
3.0 Detectable Area.
3.1 Maximum Lanes. The RVSD shall be able to detect and report information from up to 22 lanes.
3.2 Detection Range. The RVSD shall be able to detect and report information in lanes with boundaries as close as 6 ft. (1.8 m) from the base of the pole on which the RVSD is mounted.
The RVSD shall be able to detect and report information in lanes located with the far boundary at 250 ft. (76.2 m) from the base of the pole on which the RVSD is mounted.
The RVSD shall be able to simultaneously detect and report information from a lane located at the minimum offset and from a lane located at the maximum range.
3.3 Lane Size and Spacing. The RVSD shall allow any spacing of traffic lanes positioned from the minimum offset to the maximum range. Gore and unequally sized or spaced lanes shall be handled so that detections from the lanes meet all performance specifications.
Not all roadways have lanes that lie on evenly spaced intervals. Some roadways have gore, odd-sized medians and unequal lane sizes. An RVSD should be able to handle all these cases.
3.4 Barrier Performance. The RVSD shall detect vehicles with the specified accuracy in lanes that are adjacent to a barrier when 50% of a sedan is visible over the barrier from the point of view of the RVSD.
4.0 Performance.
4.1 Volume Accuracy. The volume data shall be within 5% of truth for a direction of travel during nominal conditions. Individual lane volume data shall be within 10% of truth during nominal conditions. The percentage of missed detection and the percentage of false detections for each lane shall not exceed 15% during nominal conditions. Nominal conditions exist when true occupancy is less than 30%, without merging traffic; when average speeds are greater than 10 mph (16 kph) in 6 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
every lane; when there is less than 20% truck traffic per lane; and when at least 50 cars per lane are counted in the interval.
The RVSD shall detect a minimum separation of 5.5 ft. (1.67 m) between two vehicles depending on vehicle speed and range.
4.2 Speed Accuracy. Average speed data shall be accurate to within 2 mph (3 kph) for any direction of travel when there are more than five cars per lane in an interval. Average speed data for any individual lane shall be accurate to within 2 mph (3 kph) when there are more than five cars per lane in an interval.
The RVSD shall provide per-vehicle speed measurements on 95% of vehicles that are not occluded by other vehicles or by barriers. The RVSD shall provide per-vehicle speed measurements in which 90% of the measurements are within 3 mph (5 kph).
The RVSD shall measure speed using a dual-radar speed trap that calculates the time delay between two different radar beams.
The dual-radar time delay method of calculating speed produces accurate per-vehicle speeds which enable accurate length measurements, classification, 85th percentile speed measurements and responsive average speed measurements. In contrast, algorithms that derive the speed from presence measurements or vehicle durations have been shown to produce significant biases in the speed measurements especially during congestion.
4.3 Occupancy Accuracy. Occupancy data shall be within 10% of truth for any direction of travel on a roadway during nominal conditions. For example, if the true occupancy in a lane is 20%, then the measured occupancy shall be between 18% and 22%. Individual lane occupancy shall be within 20% during nominal conditions. Nominal conditions exist when true occupancy is less than 30%, without merging traffic; when average speeds are greater than 10 mph (16 kph) in every lane; when there is less than 20% truck traffic per lane; and when at least 50 cars per lane are counted in the interval.
4.4 Classification Accuracy. The RVSD shall correctly determine classification for 80% of detected vehicles when the classification bins are at least 10 ft. (3 m) wide and occupancy of all lanes is below 30%.
5.0 Performance Maintenance. The RVSD shall not require cleaning or adjustment to maintain performance.
The RVSD shall not rely on battery backup to store configuration information, thus eliminating any need for battery replacement.
Once the RVSD is calibrated, it shall not require recalibration to maintain performance unless the roadway configuration changes.
The RVSD shall be manufactured using techniques that will yeild a mean time between failures of 10 years.
6.0 Physical Properties. The RVSD shall not exceed 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) in weight.
The RVSD shall not exceed 14 in. by 12 in. by 4 in. (35.6 cm x 30.5 cm x 10.2 cm) in its physical dimensions.
All external parts of the RVSD shall be ultraviolet-resistant, corrosion-resistant, and protected from fungus growth and moisture deterioration.
6.1 Enclosure. The RVSD shall be enclosed in a Lexan polycarbonate.
The enclosure shall be classified “f1” outdoor weatherability in accordance with UL 746C and shall be IP66 rated.
The RVSD shall be classified as watertight according to the NEMA 250 standard.
The RVSD enclosure shall conform to test criteria set forth in the NEMA 250 standard for type 4X enclosures. Test results shall be provided for each of the following type 4X criteria:
• External icing (NEMA 250 clause 5.6)
• Hose-down (NEMA 250 clause 5.7)
SmartSensor HD
7 • 4X corrosion protection (NEMA 250 clause 5.10)
• Gasket (NEMA 250 clause 5.14)
The RVSD shall be able to withstand a drop of up to 5 ft. (1.5 m) without compromising its functional and structural integrity.
The RVSD enclosure shall include a connector that meets the MIL-DTL-26482 specification. The MIL-DTL-26482 connector shall provide contacts for all data and power connections.
7.0 Power. The RVSD shall consume less than 8.5 W.
The RVSD shall operate with a DC input between 10 VDC and 28 VDC.
8.0 Communication Ports. The RVSD shall have an RS-485 port and an RS-232 port, and both ports shall communicate independently and simultaneously.
The two simultaneous ports are necessary whenever simultaneous access to the RVSD is needed or redundancy is required. For example, two ports are needed if event data and interval data must be collected at the same time. For an example of redundancy, the RS-232 port and RS-485 port could each be connected to separate communications device to provide a backup means of communication in case a device fails.
The RS-232 port shall be full-duplex and shall support true RTS/ CTS hardware handshaking for interfacing with various communication devices.
The RVSD shall support the upload of new firmware into the RVSD’s non-volatile memory over either communication port.
The RVSD shall support the user configuration of the following:
• Baud rate
• Response delay
• Data push
• RS-232 flow control (RTS/CTS or none)
The communication ports shall support all of the following baud rates: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bps.
9.0 Data Protocols. The RVSD shall support three different data protocols for all lanes being monitored: interval (bin) data, event (per vehicle) data, and real-time true presence data.
The RVSD manufacturer shall provide the data protocol document free of charge.
The interval (bin) data packet protocol shall support:
• Sensor ID
• A timestamp that records the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second of the end of time interval • Total volumes of more than 65536
• Average speed values in either mph or kph
• Occupancy in 0.1% increments
• Volume in up to eight length-based user-defined vehicle classification bins • Volume in up to 15 user-defined speed bins (bin by speed) • Volume for both directions of traffic (bin by direction) • Average headway in seconds
• Average gap in seconds
• 85th percentile speed in either mph or kph
The event (per vehicle) data packet protocol shall support:
• Sensor ID
8 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
• A timestamp that records the year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond of the time the vehicle left the detection zone • Lane assignment
• Speed values in either mph or kph
• Vehicle length
• Classification using up to eight user-defined classes • Range
The real-time true presence data packet protocol shall support:
• Sensor ID
• True presence information for each lane being monitored
10.0 Data Buffering. The RVSD shall store, in non-volatile memory, at least 9,000 interval data packets with the maximum number of lanes and approaches configured and all interval fields enabled.
The RVSD shall timestamp interval data using a real-time clock that maintains accurate time even when power is disconnected from the sensor for extended periods of time.
11.0 Radar Design. The RVSD shall employ a dual radar design that includes two receive channels.
In order to achieve accurate per vehicle speed measurements, two radar channels are necessary so that a speed trap–type speed measurement can be made.
11.1 Frequency Stability. The circuitry shall be void of any manual tuning elements that could lead to human error and degraded performance over time.
All transmit modulated signals shall be generated by means of digital circuitry, such as a direct digital synthesizer, that is referenced to a frequency source that is at least 50 parts per million (ppm) stable over the specified temperature range, and ages less than 6 ppm per year. Any upconversion of a digitally generated modulated signal shall preserve the phase stability and frequency stability inherent in the digitally generated signal.
This specification ensures that, during operation, the RVSD strictly conforms to FCC requirements and that the radar signal quality is maintained for precise algorithmic quality. Analog and microwave components within an RVSD have characteristics that change with temperature variations and age. If the output transmit signal is not referenced to a stable frequency source, then the RVSD is likely to experience unacceptable frequency variations which may cause it to transmit out of its FCC allocated band and thus will be non-compliant with FCC regulations.
The RVSD shall not rely on temperature compensation circuitry to maintain transmit frequency stability.
Temperature-based compensation techniques have been shown to be insufficient to ensure transmit frequency stability. One reason this type of technique is not sufficient is that it does not compensate for frequency variations due to component aging.
The bandwidth of the transmit signal of the RVSD shall not vary by more than 1% under all specified operating conditions and over the expected life of the RVSD.
The bandwidth of an RVSD directly affects the measured range of a vehicle. A change in bandwidth causes a direct error in the measured range, i.e., a 5% change in bandwidth would cause a range error of 10 ft. (3 m) for a vehicle at 200 ft. (61 m). If the bandwidth changes by more than 1% due to seasonal temperature variations and component aging, then the RVSD will need to be frequently reconfigured to maintain the specified accuracy.
11.2 Antenna Design. The RVSD antennas shall be designed on printed circuit boards.
Printed circuit board antennas eliminate the need for RF connectors and cabling that result in decreased reliability. Printed circuit antennas are less prone to physical damage due to their extremely low mass.
SmartSensor HD
9 The vertical beam width of the RVSD at the 6 dB points of the two-way pattern shall be 65 degrees or greater.
This enables the RVSD to provide simultaneous detection from a lane located at the minimum offset and a lane located at the maximum range. The vertical beam width of an RVSD determines the field of view in which it can detect traffic. If the field of view is smaller than the distance between the minimum offset and the farthest range, then the RVSD will be unable to detect vehicles over the entire range. A vertical beam width of less than 65 degrees will not allow an RVSD, mounted at a typical height of 17 ft. (5.2 m), to simultaneously detect and report information when the lanes are positioned from the minimum offset of 6 ft. (1.8 m) to the maximum range of 250 ft. (76.2 m).
The horizontal beam width of the RVSD at the 6 dB points of the two-way pattern shall be 6 degrees or less.
A narrow horizontal beam width allows the RVSD to resolve vehicles at the farthest ranges. If the horizontal beam width is too large, a trailing vehicle may be merged with the vehicle in front.
The sidelobes in the RVSD two-way antenna pattern shall be -40 dB or less.
Low sidelobes ensure that the performance from the antenna beam widths is fully achieved.
11.3 Resolution. The RVSD shall transmit a signal with a bandwidth of at least 240 MHz.
The bandwidth of the transmit signal translates directly into radar resolution, which contributes directly to detection performance.
For example, an RVSD that transmits at a low bandwidth will have low radar resolution, which could cause it to count a single vehicle as two vehicles in adjacent lanes. As another example of the adverse effects of low radar resolution, the response from a barrier or other radar target in the roadway may spill over into the lanes of travel and desensitize the radar. In order to achieve the specified detection accuracy in a variety of conditions, the unwindowed radar resolution cannot be larger than 2 ft. (0.6 m) at the half-power level, which requires a bandwidth of 240 MHz. The high radar resolution reduces the problem of vehicle responses getting drowned out by brighter vehicles in adjacent lanes and improves performance for moving and stopped vehicles near barriers.
11.4 RF Channels. The RVSD shall provide at least 4 RF channels so that multiple units can be mounted in the same vicinity without causing interference between them.
12.0 Configuration.
12.1 Auto-configuration. The RVSD shall have a method for automatically defining traffic lanes or detection zones without requiring user intervention. This auto-configuration process shall execute on a processor internal to the RVSD and shall not require an external PC or other processor.
The auto-configuration process shall automatically define traffic lanes or detection zones by detecting the relative position of vehicles within the RVSD’s field of view.
The RVSD shall include a transceiver capable of detecting multiple vehicles present within its field of view. The RVSD shall also include a processor or computer with executable instructions that estimates the position of each of the vehicles, records the position of the vehicles, generates a probability density function estimation from each position of the vehicles, and defines traffic lanes from that probability density function estimation. The probability density function estimation represents the probability that a vehicle will be located at any range.
The RVSD auto-configuration process shall define all lanes within the detectable area of the RVSD, up to the maximum number of lanes, during free-flow conditions; when at least 50% of a sedan is visible above any barriers; when at least 10 cars pass in each lane during configuration time; and there are less than 10% lane-changing vehicles.
12.2 Manual Configuration. The auto-configuration method shall not prohibit the ability of the user to manually adjust the RVSD configuration.
The RVSD shall support the configuring of lanes or detection zones in 1-ft. (0.3-m) increments. 10 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
When lanes have variable widths or have variable spacing (e.g. gore between lanes), precise resolution is necessary.
12.3 Windows®–based Software. The RVSD shall include graphical user interface software that displays all configured lanes and the current traffic pattern using a graphical traffic history representing at least the last 1.5 seconds of detected traffic. This graphical traffic history shall also allow the option of displaying the measured speed or length of a detected vehicle.
A visual representation of traffic patterns allows an installer to quickly associate specific detections with corresponding vehicles, and it facilitates verification of RVSD performance.
The graphical interface shall operate on Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 in the .NET framework.
The software shall support the following functionality:
• Automatically find the correct baud rate
• Automatically find the correct serial communication port • Operate over a TCP/IP connection
• Give the operator the ability to save/back up the RVSD configuration to a file or load/restore the RVSD configuration from a file • Provide a virtual connection option so that the software can be used without connecting to an actual sensor
13.0 Operating Conditions. The RVSD shall maintain accurate performance in all weather conditions, including rain, freezing rain, snow, wind, dust, fog and changes in temperature and light, including direct light on sensor at dawn and dusk.
RVSD operation shall continue in rain up to 2 in. (5.08 cm) per hour.
The RVSD shall be capable of continuous operation over an ambient temperature range of -40°F to 165.2°F (-40°C to 74°C).
The RVSD shall be capable of continuous operation over a relative humidity range of 5% to 95% (non-condensing).
14.0 Testing.
14.1 FCC. Each RVSD shall be certified by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) under CFR 47, Part 15, section 15.249 as an intentional radiator.
The FCC certification shall be displayed on an external label on each RVSD according to the rules set forth by the FCC.
The RVSD shall comply with FCC regulations under all specified operating conditions and over the expected life of the RVSD.
14.2 NEMA TS 2-2003 Testing. The RVSD shall comply with the applicable standards stated in the NEMA TS 2-2003 Standard. Third-party test results shall be made available for each of the following tests:
• Shock pulses of 10 g, 11 ms half sine wave
• Vibration of 0.5 g up to 30 Hz
• 300 V positive/negative pulses applied at one pulse per second at minimum and maximum DC supply voltage • Cold temperature storage at -49°F (-45°C) for 24 hours • High temperature storage at 185°F (85°C) for 24 hours • Low temp, low DC supply voltage at -29.2°F (-34°C) and 10.8 VDC • Low temp, high DC supply voltage at -29.2°F (-34°C) and 26.5 VDC • High temp, high DC supply voltage at 165.2°F (74°C) and 26.5 VDC • High temp, low DC supply voltage at 165.2°F (74°C) and 10.8 VDC
15.0 Manufacturing. The RVSD shall be manufactured and assembled in the USA.
SmartSensor HD
11 The internal electronics of the RVSD shall utilize automation for surface mount assembly, and shall comply with the requirements set forth in IPC-A-610C Class 2, Acceptability of Electronic Assemblies.
The RVSD shall undergo a rigorous sequence of operational testing to ensure product functionality and reliability. Testing shall include the following:
• Functionality testing of all internal sub-assemblies
• Unit level burn-in testing of 48 hours’ duration or greater • Final unit functionality testing prior to shipment
Test results and all associated data for the above testing shall be provided for each purchased RVSD by serial number, upon request.
16.0 Support. The RVSD manufacturer shall provide both training and technical support services.
16.1 Training. The manufacturer-provided training shall be sufficient to fully train installers and operators in the installation, configuration, and use of the RVSD to ensure accurate RVSD performance.
The manufacturer-provided training shall consist of comprehensive classroom labs and hands-on, in-the-field, installation and configuration training.
Classroom lab training shall involve presentations outlining and defining the RVSD, its functions, and the procedures for proper operation. These presentations shall be followed by hands-on labs in which trainees shall practice using the equipment to calibrate and configure a virtual RVSD. To facilitate the classroom presentation and hands-on labs, the manufacturer-provided training shall include the following items:
• Knowledgeable trainer or trainers thoroughly familiar with the RVSD and its processes • Presentation materials, including visual aids, printed manuals and other handout materials for each student • Computer files, including video and raw data, to facilitate the virtual configuration of the RVSD • Laptop computers with the necessary software, and all necessary cables, connectors, etc. • All other equipment necessary to facilitate the virtual configuration of the RVSD Field training shall provide each trainee with the hands-on opportunity to install and configure the RVSD at roadside.
Training shall be such that each trainee will mount and align the RVSD correctly.
16.2 Technical Assistance. Manufacturer-provided technical support shall be available according to contractual agreements, and a technical representative shall be available to assist with the physical installation, alignment, and auto-configuration of each supplied RVSD. Technical support shall be provided thereafter to assist with troubleshooting, maintenance, or replacement of RVSDs should such services be required.
17.0 Documentation. RVSD documentation shall include a comprehensive user guide as well as an installer quick-reference guide and a user quick-reference guide.
The RVSD manufacturer shall supply the following documentation and test results at the time of the bid submittal:
• Volume accuracy data, including performance analyses for:
• Free-flowing traffic
• Traffic with a lane roughly 8 ft. (2.4 m) beyond a 4-ft. (1.2 m) concrete barrier • 6-ft. (1.8-m) and 240-ft. (73.2-m) lateral offset (simultaneous) • Speed accuracy test data for both per-vehicle and average speed • Occupancy accuracy test data
• Vehicle classification test data
• Auto-configuration documentation
• FCC CFR 47 certification
• CE certification
12 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
• NEMA 250 standard for Type 4X Enclosure third-party test data • NEMA TS 2-2003 standard third-party test data
18.0 Warranty. The RVSD shall be warranted free from material and workmanship defects for a period of two years from date of shipment.
The advertised detection accuracy of the company’s sensors is based on both external and internal testing, as outlined in each product’s specification document. Although our sensors are very accurate by industry standards, like all other sensor manufacturers we cannot guarantee perfection or assure that no errors will ever occur in any particular applications of our technology. Therefore, beyond the express Limited Warranty that accompanies each sensor sold by the company, we offer no additional representations, warranties, guarantees or remedies to our customers. It is recommended that purchasers and integrators evaluate the accuracy of each sensor to determine the acceptable margin of error for each application within their particular system(s).
SmartSensor HD
13 SmartSensor HD Installation Specification
1.0 General. This item shall govern the installation of an aboveground radar vehicle sensing device (RVSD) equivalent to the Wavetronix SmartSensor™ HD.
RVSDs can provide accurate, consistent and reliable data provided they are installed properly. The requirements in this specification are intended to ensure proper RVSD installation.
2.0 Mounting and Installation.
2.1 Mounting Assembly. The RVSD shall be mounted directly onto a mounting assembly fastened to a pole or other solid structure.
The RVSD mounting assembly shall provide the necessary degrees of rotation to ensure proper installation.
The RVSD mounting assembly shall be constructed of weather-resistant materials and shall be able to support a 20-lb. (9.1-kg) load.
2.2 Mounting Location. The RVSD shall be mounted at a height that is within the manufacturer’s recommended mounting heights.
The RVSD shall be mounted at an offset from the first lane that is consistent with the RVSD’s minimum offset.
The RVSD shall be mounted so that the farthest lane to be monitored is within the maximum range of the RVSD.
The RVSD shall be mounted with its cable connector down and shall be tilted so that the RVSD is aimed at the center of the lanes to be monitored. Typically, the RVSD is tilted off of vertical by 10–20 degrees.
The RVSD shall be aligned so that the horizontal angle is perpendicular to the flow of traffic. The RVSD alignment tool shall be used to verify pointing accuracy.
Two RVSD units shall not be mounted so that they are pointed directly at each other.
A distance of 40 ft. (12.2 m) or more, along the direction of the roadway, shall separate the RVSDs if they are located on opposing sides of a roadway, and the RVSDs shall be configured to operate on different RF channels.
RVSDs that are mounted within 20 ft. (6.1 m) of each other shall be configured to operate on different RF channels regardless of the pointing direction of the RVSDs.
When possible, the pole selected for the RVSD shall be where there is no guardrail or other type of barrier between the pole and the first lane of traffic.
If mounting to an overhead structure like a sign bridge or a truss, the RVSD shall use an extension arm to provide at least 3 feet of lateral separation from the structure. The RVSD shall not be installed in tunnels.
It is recommended that the manufacturer be consulted to verify final RVSD placement if the RVSD is to be mounted near large planar surfaces (sound barrier, building, parked vehicles, etc.) that run parallel to the monitored roadway.
2.3 Cabling. The cable end connector shall meet the MILC-26482 specification and shall be designed to interface with the appropriate MIL-C-26482 connector. The connector backshell shall be an environmentally sealed shell that offers excellent immersion capability. All conductors that interface with the connector shall be encased in a single jacket, and the outer diameter of this jacket shall be within the backshell’s cable O.D. range to ensure proper sealing. The backshell shall have a strain relief with enough strength to support the cable slack under extreme weather conditions. Recommended connectors are Cannon’s KPT series, and recommended backshells are Glenair Series 37 cable sealing backshells. 14 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
The cable shall be the Orion Wire Combo-2206-2002-PVCGY or an equivalent cable that conforms to the following specifications:
• The RS-485 conductors shall be a twisted pair.
• The RS-232 and RS-485 conductors shall have nominal capacitance conductor to conductor of less than 45 pF/ft at 1 kHz.
• The RS-232 and RS-485 conductors shall have nominal conductor DC resistance of less than 16.5 ohms/1000 ft. (304.8 m) at 68°F (20°C).
• The power conductors shall be one twisted pair with nominal conductor DC resistance of less than 11.5 ohms/1000 ft. (304.8 m) at 68°F (20°C).
• Each wire bundle or the entire cable shall be shielded with an aluminum/mylar shield with a drain wire.
The cable shall have a single continuous run with no splices.
The cable shall be terminated only on the two farthest ends of the cable.
The cable length shall not exceed the following limits for the operational baud rate of RS-485 communications:
Baud Rate Cable Length
115.2 Kbps 300 ft. (91.4 m)
57.6 Kbps 600 ft. (182.9 m)
38.4 Kbps 800 ft. (243.8 m)
19.2 Kbps 1000 ft. (304.8 m)
9.6 Kbps 2000 ft. (609.6 m)
NOTE: These represent maximum data rates. The data rate used should be the minimum data rate required for operation.
If communication is conducted over the RS-232 bus, then the RS-232 driver must be able to source and sink ±7 mA or more.
The cable length shall not exceed the following limits for the operational baud rate of RS-232 communications:
Baud Rate Cable Length
115.2 Kbps 40 ft. (12.2 m)
57.6 Kbps 60 ft. (18.3 m)
38.4 Kbps 100 ft. (30.5 m)
19.2 Kbps 140 ft. (42.7 m)
9.6 Kbps 200 ft. (61 m)
NOTE: These represent maximum data rates. The data rate used should be the minimum data rate required for operation.
If 12 VDC is being supplied for the RVSD then the cable length shall not exceed 110 ft. (33.5 m).
If 24 VDC is being supplied for the RVSD then the cable length shall not exceed 600 ft. (182.9 m).
If a cable length of 600 ft. (182.9 m) to 2000 ft. (609.6 m) is required, the power cable shall be an ANIXTER 2A-1402 or equivalent cable that meets the following requirements:
• 10 AWG conductor size/gauge
• Two conductor count
• Stranded cable type
• Bare copper material
• 600 V range
• 194°F (90°C) temperature rating
• PVC/nylon insulation material
• PVC—polyvinyl chloride jacketing material
• 25 A per conductor
SmartSensor HD
15 Both communication and power conductors can be bundled together in the same cable as long as the above-mentioned conditions are met.
2.4 Lightning Surge Protection. The RVSD shall be installed using lightning surge protection on all communication and power lines. The surge protection devices shall meet or exceed the EN 61000-4-5 Class 4 specifications. The lightning surge protection unit shall be the Wavetronix Click 200 or equivalent. The lightning surge protection unit supplied shall be physically compatible with the cable provided.
2.5 Power Supply. The RVSD shall be installed using the Click 201, Click 202 or an equivalent AC to DC power converter that meets the following specifications:
The power converter shall be power rated at 15 W or greater at 77°F (25°C) and 10 W or greater at 165.2°F (74°C).
The power converter shall operate in the temperature range of to -29.2°F to 165.2°F (-34°C to 74°C).
The power converter shall operate in the humidity range of 5% to 95% at 77°F (25°C) non-condensing.
The power converter shall accept an input voltage of 85 to 264 VAC or 120 to 370 VDC.
The power converter shall operate at an input frequency of 47 Hz to 63 Hz.
The power converter shall produce an output voltage of 24 VDC ±4%.
The power converter shall have a hold-up time of greater than 20 ms at 120 VAC.
The power converter shall withstand a voltage across its input and output of 3 kV. The power converter shall withstand a voltage across its input and ground of 1.5 kV.
The power converter shall conform to safety standards UL 60950-1 and EN 60950-1 and be certified and tested to meet the limited power source requirement according to clause 2.5. Its output current shall be limited to a maximum current of 4A both under normal and single fault condition; with double/reinforced insulation between its input and output circuits.
The power converter shall conform to EMC standards EN 55022 Class B and EN 61000-3-2, 3.
In brown-out conditions (i.e. < 85 VAC input), the output voltage of the power converter shall be less than 1 VDC.
2.6 Input File Cards. If input file cards are used in the detection system, then the Click 112, Click 114 or an equivalent that meets the following specifications shall be used.
The input file cards shall be compatible with 170, 2070, NEMA TS 1, and NEMA TS 2 style input racks.
The input file card shall translate data packets from the RVSD into contact closure outputs.
The input file card shall support dual loop (speed trap) emulation, as well as the following modes of operation:
• Pulse (a single 125 ms output pulse for each vehicle) • Presence (an output pulse corresponding to the duration of each vehicle in the detection zone) • Actuation (true presence output in real time)
• Single loop speed (duration of the pulse is inversely proportional to the speed of the vehicle) The input file card shall receive data packets over an RS-485 bus at any of the following baud rates: 9600, 19200, 38400 and 57600 bps.
The input file card shall autobaud and auto-detect an RVSD over wired and wireless communication channels that have a maximum latency of 500 ms.
16 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
The input file card shall comply with the NEMA TS 2-1998 Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements (Section 2.8 specification).
2.7 Signaling Delay. For even detection applications, the RVSD mounting location, communication and contact closure options shall be selected to accommodate the total signaling delay.
The total signaling delay from the front of the vehicle shall be the sensor delay + communications delay + contact closure delay.
The sensor delay shall equal 1 second + actual vehicle length in feet divided by actual vehicle speed in fps.
The communication delay shall equal 10/8 * 34 bytes divided by the baud rate in bps.
The contact closure delay for a Click 512 shall be zero.
The contact closure delay for a Click 112/114 shall equal the detected duration + the effective virtual loop length in feet divided by the detected vehicle speed in fps.
FLIR FC-T2 Sensors deliver superior accuracy and reliability for any traffic monitoring application. Using FLIR’s advanced thermal imaging sensors, the FC-T2 can detect vehicles in a wider variety of conditions than traditional color-only sensors. By detecting the heat of all objects in the scene, the FC-T2 Series operates in broad daylight or total darkness, poor weather and even light fog.
Because they are not hindered by reflections from sun glare, shadows, or headlights on wet pavement, FLIR’s thermal traffic solutions deliver more reliable information with fewer false counts. Whatever road you’re watching, see everything more clearly with the FLIR FC-T2. • VEHICLE DETECTION AT INTERSECTIONS
• ROAD SIDE MONITORING
• MONITORING TRAFFIC IN TUNNELS
• HIGHWAY TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
HIGH IMAGE QUALITY
The FLIR FC-T2 Series are equipped with an uncooled microbolometer detector that produces high quality thermal images on which the smallest of details can be seen.
DIFFERENT LENS OPTIONS
FLIR Systems offers the FLIR FC T-Series with different lens options. They are available with a 13mm or 19mm lens.
EASY TO INSTALL
FLIR FC-T2 Series thermal imaging sensors can be easily installed and integrated into existing infrastructure, adding 24/7 detection and without major civil works projects. Multiple video output connector options (BNC and Connector-less) also make installation simple and fast.
DESIGNED FOR USE IN HARSH ENVIRONMENTS
The FC-T2 Series are extremely rugged systems, built to rigorous IP66 standards and protected from dust and water ingress. Their broad operational temperature range (-50°C to +75°C) makes them ideal for any climate.
VIDEO ANALYTICS
The FLIR FC-T2 Series works perfectly together with video analytics, such as FLIR’s VIP 3D Detection Boards. Thermal images are often used for vehicle presence detection at signalized intersections, and for 24/7 traffic monitoring Normal vision
Thermal vision
www.flir.eu
FLIRFC-T2 Series
Thermal Imaging Sensors for Traffic Monitoring
www.flir.eu
Imaging Specifications
System Overview FLIR FC-T2 Series
Detector type Focal Plane Array (FPA), uncooled
Vanadium Oxide (Vox) microbolometer
Spectral range 7.5 to 13.5µm
Thermal sensitivity <50 mK f/1.0
Image frequency NTSC: 30Hz
Focus Focus free, athermal lens
Image processing Automatic Gain Control (AGC),
Digital Detail Enhancement (DDE)
System features
Automatic heater
Clears up to 4mm of ice from windows
Automatic deicing, tested according
to MIL-STD-810F Method 521.1
Image presentation
Video output NTSC, analog
Image Uniformity Optimization Automatic Flat Field Correction (FFC) Power*
Requirements 90-240VAC, single phase
50-60Hz
Consumption 5.5 W nominal at 110 VAC
23 W peak with heaters
Environmental specifications
Operating
temperature range
-50°C to +75°C (Cold start: -40ºC to +70ºC)
-58°F to +167°F (Cold start: -40ºF to +158ºF)
Storage temperature range -55ºC to +85ºC (-67ºF to +185ºF) Encapsulation IP66 + IP 67 (IEC 60529)
Shock Mil-Std-810F
Vibration IEC 60068-2-27
Physical characteristics
Sensor Weight 1.8 kg (3.97 lbs.) without sunshield
2.2 kg (4.85 lbs.) with sun shield
Sensor Size (L x W x H)
259 mm x 114 mm x 106 mm without sunshield
10.2 in. x 4.49 in. x 4.17 in. without sunshield
282 mm x 129 mm x 115 mm with sun shield
11.1 in. x 5.08 in. x 4.53 in. with sun shield
Shipping weight
(sensor + packaging) 2.8 kg (6.18 lbs.)
Shipping size
(sensor + packaging)
(L x W x H)
366 mm x 188 mm x 178 mm
14.41 in. x 7.40 in. x 7.01 in.
Approvals
EN55022:2010, Class B
EN 61000-3-3: 2008
EN 61000-3-2: 2006+A1: 2009 & A2 2009
EN55024:2010
EN51030-4: 2011
FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
IP 66 + IP 67 (IEC 60529)
IEC 60068-2-27
EN60950-1
EN60950-22
Standard package
Thermal imaging sensor, sun shield, operator manual
Specifications are subject to change without notice. ©Copyright 2016, FLIR Systems, Inc. All other brand and product names are trademarks of their respective owners. The images displayed may not be representative of the actual resolution of the sensor shown. Images for illustrative purposes only. (Created 10/16)
PORTLAND
Corporate Headquarters
FLIR Systems, Inc.
27700 SW Parkway Ave.
Wilsonville, OR 97070
USA
PH: +1 866.477.3687
SANTA BARBARA
FLIR Systems, Inc.
70 Castilian Drive.
Goleta, CA 93117
USA
PH: +1 866.477.3687
BELGIUM
FLIR Systems Trading Belgium
BVBA
Luxemburgstraat 2
2321 Meer
Belgium
PH: +32 (0) 3665 5100
FLIR ITS
Hospitaalweg 1B
B-8510 Marke
Belgium
PH: +32 (0)56 37 22 00
UK
FLIR Systems UK
2 Kings Hill Avenue
Kings Hill
West Malling - Kent
ME19 4AQ
United Kingdom
PH: +44 (0)1732 220 011
FC-T2 Series: version specific specifications
Sensor resolution 320 x 240 640 x 480
Name/Focal length/
Field of view
FC-334 T2: 13 mm lens – FOV : 44° (H) x 36° (V)
FC-332 T2: 19 mm lens – FOV : 32° (H) x 26° (V)
FC-324 T2: 13 mm lens – FOV : 24° (H) x 18° (V)
FC-317 T2: 19 mm lens – FOV : 17° (H) x 13° (V)
FC-644 T2: 13 mm lens – FOV : 44° (H) x 36° (V)
FC-632 T2: 19 mm lens – FOV : 32° (H) x 26° (V)
www.flir.com
NASDAQ: FLIR
1608 4th Street Suite 200 Berkeley CA 94710 1608 4th Street Suite 200 Berkeley CA 94710| [email protected] | P 510.548.4620 F 510.548.8264 | [email protected]| P 510.548.4620 F 510.548.8264 Functions / Features
Lower power consumption
3-axis magnetometer for vehicle detection
• 128 Hz sampling rate
• Count and presence detection modes
• Modes for bicycle and motorcycle detection
Flush mount or up to 4.25" (10.8 cm) depth (to top of
sensor) in-pavement installation with no wires or
lead-in cabling
Fast and simple installation
• Installs in less than 10 minutes in small
hole using a hammer or core drill
– Hole 4" (10 cm) diameter; a maximum of 6.5"
(16.5 cm) deep
– Covered with fast-drying epoxy
• Minimal lane closure time
• No saw cuts
Expected 10 year battery life
• Rugged mechanical design
• Auto-calibration
Reliable 2-way radio communications with access
point
• Uniquely addressable and configurable
• Firmware can be upgraded over-the-air
Readily deployed where other systems cannot be
used
• Split roadways
• High water tables
• Damaged pavement
FlexMag Flush and Deep (GR) Sensors
The Sensys Networks VDS240 Wireless Vehicle Detection System uses wireless magneto-resistive sensors to detect the presence and movement of vehicles. The sensors – installed in holes cored in the roadway and covered with epoxy – transmit detection data in realtime via low-power radio technology to a nearby Sensys Networks access point. Vehicle detections are further relayed to a traffic signal controller, remote traffic management center, or other system.
The new FlexMag Flush and Deep sensor developed by Sensys Networks utilizes the next generation of RF chipsets and circuitry.
The FlexMag Flush sensors are installed flush with the roadway surface in plastic shells. The plastic shells enable the removal and replacement of sensors during roadway milling operations. The FlexMag Deep sensors are installed without plastic shells at depth of up to 4.25 inches (10.8 cm) from the roadway surface to the top of the sensor. Sensors installed at these depths do not have to be removed and replaced during most roadway milling operations.
In typical traffic management applications, a sensor is placed in the middle of a traffic lane to detect the presence and passage of vehicles.
Vehicle speeds and length are measured by two sensors installed in the same lane with the exact distance between them configured in software. The recommended distance between sensors depends on the range of expected speeds to be measured: for typical freeway applications, a separation of 20 to 24 feet (6.1 to 7.3 meters) is recommended; for typical arterial applications, a separation of 10 to 12 feet (3.1 to 3.7 meters) is preferred.
Advanced Magnetometer-Based Vehicle Detection.
The state-of-the-art magneto-resistive sensing devices in each wireless sensor measure the x-, y-, and z-axis components of the Earth’s magnetic field at a 128 Hz sampling rate. As vehicles come within range, changes in the x, y, or z axes of the measured magnetic field become apparent. When no vehicles are present, sensors continually measure the background magnetic field to estimate a reference. Each sensor automatically self-calibrates to the local environment, and to any longterm variations of the local magnetic field, by allowing this reference value to change over time.
Types of FlexMag Flush and Deep Sensors:
VSN240-F-2
• Flush-mount wireless sensor for in-pavement installation • For all freeway, arterial, and signal control applications VSN240-T-2
• Flush-mount wireless sensor for in-pavement installation • For signal control applications only
VSN240-F-GR
• For up to 4.25" (10.8 cm) depth (to top of sensor) in-pavement installation
• For all freeway, arterial, and signal control applications VSN240-T-GR
• For up to 4.25" (10.8 cm) depth (to top of sensor) in-pavement installation
• For signal control applications only
Sensys Networks and the Sensys Networks logo are trademarks of Sensys Networks, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Information contained herein is believed to be reliable, but Sensys Networks makes no warranties as to its accuracy or completeness.
Copyright © 2015 Sensys Networks, Inc. • ALL RIGHTS RESERVED • P/N 153-240-100-008 Rev E Local Distributor
FlexMag Flush and Deep Sensors
Functional Specifications
detection technique 3-axis magnetic field sensing
sampling rate 128 Hz
programmable
vehicle detection
parameters (mode B
only)
• Z-axis detect threshold (mG)
• Z-axis undetect threshold (mG)
• X-axis undetect threshold (mG)
• onset filter (ms)
• holdover (ms)
• auto-recalibration timeout (secs)
over-the-air
protocol
Sensys Networks NanoPower (SNP)
protocol (TDMA)
physical layer
protocol IEEE 802.15.4 PHY
modulation
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Offset
Quadrature Phase-Shift Keying (DSSS OQPSK)
transmit/receive bit
rate 250 kbps
frequency band 2405 to 2480 MHz
(ISM unlicensed band)
frequency channels 16
channel bandwidth 2 MHz
antenna type
microstrip patch antenna
(mounted below top surface of
sensor)
antenna field of view ±60° (azimuth & elevation)
nominal output
power +3 dBm
spurious emissions
• 30 - 1000 MHz: < -36 dBm
• 1 - 12.75 GHz: < -30 dBm
• 1.8 - 1.9 GHz: < -44 dBm
• 5.15 - 5.3 GHz: < -47 dBm
typical receive
sensitivity -101 dBm (PER = 1%)
saturation (max input
level) ≥ 10 dBm
Sensor Modes
mode application description
B (event)
count stations;
advance detection
• sends timestamped ON and OFF
detection events using configurable
detection parameters
• not supported by VSN240-T-2 or
VSN240-T-GR
E (idle) status reporting
disables magnetometer and sends
sensor hardware and software
version information
STOPBAR-#
(presence
detection)
stop bar detection;
ramp management
sends timestamped ON and OFF
detection events using
pre-configured detection
parameters
• 16 different stop bar detection modes can be selected • recommended stop bar detection modes for specific
applications:
STOPBAR-0 bicycles/scooters
STOPBAR-2 motorcycles
STOPBAR-5 passenger vehicles
(normal recalibration)
STOPBAR-7 passenger vehicles
(fast recalibration)
STOPBAR-14 light rail
Power, Physical, & Environment
power supply
• non-replaceable primary Li-SOCl2 3.6v battery
pack
• 8.5 Ah (nominal capacity)
dimensions 2.9” x 2.9” x 2.2” (7.4 cm x 7.4 cm x 5.6 cm) weight • 0.47 lbs/0.213 kg (without shell)
• 0.53 lbs/0.238 kg (with shell)
environmental
• designed for in-pavement mounting
• NEMA Type 6P enclosure
• IP68 ingress protection
operating temp -40ºF to 176ºF/-40ºC to +85ºC
Compliance
safety 2006/95/EC
EMC
• FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. • CE0678
• 2004/108/EC
• IC: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. • IC : Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
POD Detection System™
Wireless Vehicle Detection
POD
Wireless Vehicle Detection System™
522 Gillingham | Sugar Land | Texas | 77478
For more information, call 844-664-7783 or visit www.trafficware.com. © 2016 Trafficware Group, Inc. PODSystem-10132016
Trafficware’s Pod Detection System™ uses patented
technology exclusively licensed from Massachusetts
Institute of Technology (M.I.T.) and has one or more
features covered by one of the following patents: U.S.
Patent Nos. 6,662,099, 8,855,902 and 9,020,742.
Other patents pending. The foregoing notice is intended to serve as a notice under 35 U.S. C. § 287(a).
Overview
Pod
The sensors are located in the roadway, wirelessly transmitting vehicle data and receiving administrative data.
• Compact and robust (2”H x 3.6”D)
• Industry-leading D-size lithium battery, providing up to 10 years of life with an average of 700 activations per hour, 24/7.
• 900 MHz wireless frequency:
Trafficware has been solving some of the traffic industry’s biggest problems since 1979. Accurate, economic, and flexible vehicle detection is one of the industry’s current challenges. In 30+ years of developing our own detection systems, as well as interfacing with all leading manufacturers, Trafficware has collected a lot of data on how to approach and solve the detection problem.
Our answer is the Pod Detection System™, a wireless magnetic sensor embedded in the road to accurately measure vehicle occupancy and detection. Powered by an industry-leading D-cell lithium battery, the Pod will transmit real-time data autonomously for up to 10 years, providing a solution to a broad range of transportation needs.
The Pod Detection System™ is simple to install and easy to use, with three primary components: the Pod, Access Point, and Base Station.
Allows greater range, elminating the need for a repeater. This simplifies the system by reducing the number of components, as well as easing installation and maintenance.
More reliable communication that can pass around buildings and penetrate foliage.
Better inroad performance, with the ability to communicate through snow, water, and ice that may have collected on the road surface over the sensor.
Smaller signal uses less battery to ensure longer system (or component) life. -
-
-
-
-
• Auto-tune functionality, allowing the Pod to re-calibrate if the environment changes or roadway shifts or buckles.
• Three axis magnetometer with dual sensors in the Z-axis. Dual sensors in the most important axis provides redundancy and improved accuracy.
• Installation is quick, with minimal road closure duration:
Cut a hole that is 4.5” in diameter x 2.75” deep, using a diamond tipped drill bit.
Place a dab of epoxy in the bottom of the hole.
Install the Pod in a clamshall and place Pod in the hole, with upper edge 3/8” from roadway surface.
Fill balance of hole with epoxy.
-
-
-
-
• Relocatable and battery replaceable.
Attached to Pole Access
Point
Located within Cabinet Base
Station
In-Ground Wireless Sensors
Pod
Access Point and Antennas
The Pod Connect is a graphical user interface (GUI) that can be easily accessed from a web browser, simplifying the process of configuring, monitoring, and reporting the Pod System.
• May be conveniently accessed from tablets and smart
phones.
Pod Connect
Mounted on an intersection pole or mast-arm, the Access Point and Antennas provide two-way wireless communication between the Pod and Base-Station.
• Securely straps to the pole, within line-of-sight of the control cabinet. A wired connection is also available if there is occlusion or if the cabinet is on the same corner as the pole. • There are four (4) radios – three (3) to broadcast to Pods and one (1) to broadcast to the Base Station.
• The omni-directional antenna covers all Pods located at the intersection. Long-range directional antennas are used for advance detection where Pods are located up to 700 feet away. These antennas are typically mounted on the mast-arm and are mounted back-to-back. Use of these long-range antennas eliminates the need for a repeater.
Base Station
Located in the control cabinet, the Base Station has the computing power of a full ATC controller, providing data processing and storage.
• SDLC connection for TS2 cabinets – allows direct
connect and eliminates need for loop detector racks.
• Can emulate one to four BIU’s, or run in parallel with loops and other forms of detection.
• Detector card interfaces with NEMA, ITS or 33X cabinets. • Either wired or wireless communication to the Access
Point.
• Can support more than 150 Pods per intersection.
• Linux operating system.
• Ethernet Port and USB connection.
• Allows access to a browser-based graphical user
interface (GUI), without software (licenses, annual fees, etc) required on individual computers.
How does a magnetometer or magnetic sensor work?
It senses the disturbances in the earth’s magnetic field due to the presence of a car or motorcycle. There are algorithms that interpret this disruption to characterize it into meaningful and reliable data.
Rack Mount
Base Station
Shelf Mount
Base Station
How does the Pod compare to other forms of
detection?
• Much simpler installation process.
• Wireless - no loop or lead in cable required.
• Small form factor allows the installation of the
Pod in minutes as opposed to hours for a
for a loop.
• Much more durable and not subject to
degradation in the roadway.
• Smart – can be grouped into larger detection zone or used as an individual point. • Directional, capable of providing the direction of traffic flow. • If there is a failure, it may be diagnosed through the web browser and the pods re-configured to work around the problem - without going into the field. • More economical - requires less time to install and there is no need for expensive conduit and trenching to advance or system detectors.
Pod vs. Loops
• Pod response time is quick, allowing it to be used for dilemma zone management applications. • High accuracy for vehicle counts and measures of
effectiveness.
• Not affected by:
- Shadows
- Reflections
- Fog
- Winter white-out conditions
- Dirty or smudged lens
- Salt build-up on lens (common in coastal towns)
- Vibration on mast arm due to wind
- Re-direction/aiming due to storms
• More economical.
• Can be used for accurate stop bar and advance detection.
Pod vs. Video
ABOUT TRAFFICWARE
Trafficware specializes in researching, designing, and developing electronic equipment and enterprise software designed to enhance the transportation industry. Our industry expertise comes from:
1. Hands on experience attained while solving traffic management challenges across the country since 1979.
2. Our in-house team including: professional traffic engineers, hardware and software design and development staff, manufacturing personnel, and customer service/field application engineers.
3. Regular dialogue with our customers to address their real-world operational issues and future traffic management requirements.
Trafficware manufactures a full line of traffic equipment in its 90,000 square-foot technology center located in Sugar Land, Texas. In over three decades of manufacturing in the USA, our products have earned a reputation for unmatched quality and reliability.
At A Glance
▷ Provides vehicle detection
for intersection stop line and
advance extension applications
▷ EasyLink connectivity for
broadband communications
▷ Streaming digital MPEG-4 video
output
▷ User-definable password
protection
▷ Vehicle detection, traffic data
measures, speed, and incident
detection
▷ Bicycle detection and
differentiation
About Duo
As the complexities of transportation management increase, multi-tasking ITS solutions are providing the capability, accuracy and flexibility required for varying types of roadway situations. The Autoscope® Duo™ sensor is a hybrid radar and video vehicle detection system—the first in a new generation of hybrid sensor-based above ground detection. Duo
provides superior detection accuracy in all traffic, lighting, weather, and pavement conditions, with the lowest cost of ownership. The Autoscope Duo sensor provides a consistent vehicle detection solution, and inspires ITS applications of continuous data collection and traffic monitoring.
For transportation professionals, this multi-tasking vehicle detection system provides a superior alternative to in-ground detection, while guaranteeing years of low-maintenance
service and significant return on investment, especially when compared to the recurring expense of common inductive loop detectors.
Autoscope Duo
▷ ▷Autoscope® Duo™ is a hybrid radar and video vehicle detection system—the first in a new generation of hybrid sensor-based above ground detection Failsafe Operation
Autoscope Duo sensors provide electrical failsafe features.
Under failed conditions, all associated detector outputs turn on, ensuring safe intersection operation. This electrical failsafe is the same operation as other equipment in the cabinet as required by all major industry specifications.
Benefits
• Superior detection accuracy
• Easy to install and configure
• Flexible design meets a variety of ITS detection and surveillance applications
• Exceptional value when compared to in-ground detection systems
• Reliable performance
• Low power consumption
• Minimal maintenance
• Native language GUI support
• Unprecedented high performance for above ground detection • Cost-effective ITS solutions for traffic management
Duo Radar
The Autoscope Duo sensor includes a compact, easilyadjustable radar, designed to meet the performance requirements of the traffic intersection environment. The integrated decision logic process will use radar information in adverse conditions.
During setup, the radar is adjusted with the video camera. A convenient adjustment tool helps align the radar to meet the detection objectives. A variety of mounting brackets allow easy installation on existing poles, mast arms, or other structures.
The unique bracket design speeds installation by minimizing loose parts and eliminating steps in the setup process.
Duo Camera
The Autoscope Duo sensor includes a compact, highresolution color zoom camera, designed to meet the performance requirements of the traffic intersection
environment. ClearVision™ aspects include a custom
environmental aperture to produce consistently high-quality video.
During setup, the 10X zoom lens uses standard zoom control from the Duo Interface Panel in the cabinet. Focus is factory pre-set. A heated faceplate and adjustable weather shield helps minimize rain, snow, and ice on the faceplate, reducing glare and improving video contrast.
Set-Up & Operation
The Autoscope Duo unit makes it easier than ever to install and configure an effective detection solution that meets your detection objectives. Multiple detection zones provide traffic count, presence, speed, and incident detection alarms. Incident types include stopped vehicles, wrong direction vehicles, slow-moving vehicles, bicycles, or other customized alarms.
Real-time polling or stored data include actuations, volume, occupancy, five vehicle classes by length, density, and other traffic data for user-selected periods or by phase.
Easily assign detector outputs to interface with NEMA TS1/TS2, TEES Type 170/179 and 2070 ATC controllers. Simple mouse and keyboard operations backup your work, troubleshoot with the Operations Log, and modify your detection layout with other tools in the Autoscope Toolbox. Extensive Boolean Logic capabilities provide flexibility in detector layouts to help validate an event or incident alarm. Integrate traffic data quickly into proprietary software applications with the optional Autoscope Comserver Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) or Autoscope
Traffic Data Protocol.
Autoscope Duo Datasheet
Econolite Video, Radar, & In-Ground Detection
Cobalt Duo Datasheet
Autoscope Duo Detection Modules
The Duo Detection Module (DDM) is a detector card for a standard Detector Rack or Input File. It performs the decision logic process to combine radar and video information for optimal detector performance. The DDM converts standard NTSC analog video to streaming digital MPEG-4 video to view locally at the traffic cabinet or remotely from the office. The DDM input/output capabilities include detector port master capabilities. The DDM interfaces detector outputs directly to NEMA TS1/TS2, Type 170/179, or 2070 ATC controllers.
Duo Interface Panel
The Duo Interface Panel in the cabinet protects other cabinet equipment from outside surges and noise. Its multiple layers of protection include step-down transformer isolation and fuses.
Terminal blocks connect up to four (4) Duo sensors. A pigtail cable assembly provides simple connection to the Duo sensor for power, radar, video, and zoom controls. These electronic devices comply with all applicable requirements of TEES, NEMA TS 2, and IEC60529 standards.
Zoom Control
The Autoscope Duo uses a RS-485 circuit to control the zoom of the lens from a handheld controller. Since aiming the camera is most often a one-time event, this simple zoom control helps keep the overall size of the camera small and compact. The installer can conveniently make adjustments with a handheld zoom controller from the bucket, base of pole, or cabinet.
Sensor Cable
The sensor pigtail cable is available in a wide variety of lengths for connection to branch cabling at the base of the pole or a homerun back to the cabinet. The easy-to-install connector helps keep the overall size of the sensor small and compact.
Autoscope Duo Sensor
• Power
- 16 to 24 VDC, 8 W maximum
- Consumption, current: 300 mA @24VDC, 8 Watts
• Radar
- Max range (passenger car from typical mast arm mount
location) 90 m (290 ft)*
- Total field of view: ±35° AZ; ±8° EL
- Max transmit power (EIRP) 20 dBm
- Frequency Band: 24.0—24.25 GHz
- Bandwidth < 100 MHz
• Environmental
- -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)
- Video and radar sensors sealed in waterproof and dust tight housing which meet NEMA 4 and IP67 standards
• Video Sensor
- Lens: 10x zoom, 5° to 46° horizontal, 4° to 35° vertical - ¼ in. color CCD, NTSC format
- Resolution > 470 TVL horizontal
- Sensitivity at lens, full video, no AGC, 3.0 Lux (typical) - S/N > 50 dB
• Video Output
- NTSC Composite 75Ω 1 Vpp, BNC connector
• Single Integrated Duo Sensor Cable
- 3-wire Power
- Coaxial cable: video transmission
- Two-wire RS-485 (x2) for lens zoom control & for radar data, command, and control
• Housing & Sunshield
- Lightweight, durable polycarbonate construction
- Thermostatically controlled faceplate heater
- Adjustable weather and sunshield with drip guard
- Weatherproof rear connector
- Standard camera bracket tilt-top provided
• Overall Dimension & Weight
- H x W x L: 13 in x 5 in x 11 in (33cm x 12.7cm x 27.9cm) - 4.5 lb (2.0 Kg)
• Regulatory
- FCC Part 15, Class A
- FCC Part 15.245, EN300440 compliant
3360 E La Palma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92806 ∙ 714-630-3700 ∙ [email protected] ∙ www.econolite.com © 2017 Econolite Control Products, Inc. All rights reserved. Econolite Control Products, Inc. is an Econolite Group, Inc. company, and reserves the right to change or update these specifications at any time without prior notification.
Econolite Video, Radar, & In-Ground Detection
Duo Detection Module
• Power
- 12 to 24 VDC, 11W maximum
- Consumption, current - @12VDC: 6W, 500mA/@24VDC: 7W,
290mA
• Communications
- Ethernet 10/100 Base-T RJ45 connection for setup and
operational use
- Port 1 SDLC DB-15 connector for TS2 Serial Detector I/O communications with the controller
- RS-485 bus on card edge for inter-processor Detector Port communications (master-slave)
- USB connector for serial communications to the radar sensor via the interface panel
• Environmental
- -34°C to +74°C (-29°F to +165°F)
- 0 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
• Dimensions & Weight
- H x W x L: 4.5 in x 2.24 in x 7 in (114mm x 57mm x 178mm) - 0.5 lb (0.2 Kg)
Duo Interface Panel
• Power
- 110/220 VAC 50/60 Hz (switch selectable)
- Fuse protected
• Environmental
- -34°C to +74°C (-29°F to +165°F)
- 0 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
• Dimensions & Weight
- H x W x L: 4.5 in x 11.0 in x 7.5 in (114mm x 279mm x 190mm) - 3.75 lb (1.7 Kg)
Warranty
• Three-year warranty
• Extended warranty package to six years
Product Support
• Product support & training by a team of trained Autoscope Technical Support Specialists
381250916-5
Autoscope Duo Datasheet
Applications
▷ Signalized Intersection Control
◉ Bicycle Detection
◉ Adaptive, Traffic Responsive
◉ Work-zone safety and temporary
construction traffic control
▷ Traveler information systems & data
collection
◉ Sub-system of ATMS
◉ Remote video surveillance
◉ Comprehensive Traffic Data Collection
Innovation for better mobility Innovation for better mobility The proven power of video… and more
Vantage Vector® is an all-in-one vehicle detecƟ on sensor with a wide range of capabiliƟ es: stop bar detecƟ on,
advanced-zone detecƟ on, and sensing that enables
advanced safety and adapƟ ve control applicaƟ ons.
It includes all the proven benefi ts of Iteris video
detecƟ on: high accuracy, high availability, the video image for remote viewing, no trenching or pavement cuƫ ng for installaƟ on, and bicycle detecƟ on capability.
Enhanced dilemma-zone precision
Vantage Vector off ers high precision for dilemma zone
detecƟ on by integraƟ ng the video fi eld-of-view with radar sensing. Enhanced informaƟ on includes the number of
vehicles, speed, and distance in user confi gurable zones, that can be used for special applicaƟ ons.
VÄ㦠VãÊÙ®
The power of video and radar sensor fusion
Extended range for higher speed approaches
The extended range of the advanced zone includes
enhanced count, speed, and occupancy (CSO)
measurements, where data from advanced detecƟ on
zones is desired.
Innovation for better mobility
www.iteris.com
VÄ㦠VãÊÙ®
The power of video and radar sensor fusion
BÄ¥®ãÝ
• MulƟ ple operaƟ ng modes suit any
applicaƟ on
͵ Tripline
͵ ConƟ nuous
͵ Group
• Power of video and radar sensor
fusion extends the detecƟ on range for
special applicaƟ ons
• ExcepƟ onal vehicle tracking for
direcƟ onal discriminaƟ on
• Non-intrusive sensor system for lower
installaƟ on and life-cycle cost
• Sensor fusion for enhanced system
accuracy
• Count, speed, and occupancy data
600ft
Radar
detecƟ on to
Copyright © 2013 Iteris, Inc. All rights reserved.
NOTICE: Iteris, Inc. reserves the right to change
product specifi caƟ ons without noƟ ce. InformaƟ on
furnished is for informaƟ onal purposes only. This
informaƟ on may not be complete or the latest revision.
For the most up-to-date informaƟ on, please contact
Iteris, Inc.
ISO 9001:2008
July 2013 Ver2
SÖ®¥®ã®ÊÄÝ
Electrical Voltage – 110/220VAC
Power – 10W (typical), 20W (peak)
Physical Weight – 10lbs (4.55 kg)
Size – 14”H x 15”W x 17”D
(35.6cm x 38.1 cm x 43.2 cm)
EPA – Less than 1.5 sq. Ō .
Environmental OperaƟ ng temp – -35o
F to +165oF
(-37oC to +74oC)
Humidity – 0 - 100% RH
IP67 rated enclosure
Approvals FCC class A
NEMA
Radar Frequency – 24GHz (K-band)
Accuracy – Speed 0 to 150 mph ± 1 mph
(240 kph ± 1.5 kph)
Tracked objects – Up to 20
DetecƟ on – Across 4 lanes of traffi c
Image sensor 1/4-type EXview HAD CCD
380,000 eff ecƟ ve pixels
550 Horizontal TV lines
> 50 dB S/N raƟ o
1.0 lux minimum illuminaƟ on
2D/3D Noise ReducƟ on
AutomaƟ c white balance
1.0 Vp-p (sync negaƟ ve)
Lens 12x opƟ cal zoom lens
f=3.7 mm (wide) to 44.4 mm (tele)
CommunicaƟ ons
with Vector Processor Via data embedded on video signal Outputs 24 detecƟ on zones
24 outputs per sensor system
3 speed based outputs per sensor system
1 group based output
Richer data enabling new applicaƟ ons
Vantage Vector enables an exciƟ ng new range of speed related intersecƟ on safety funcƟ ons with the availability of vehicle locaƟ on and speed data.
At A Glance
▷ Highest levels of accuracy and
performance
▷ Built-in local WiFi for quick and
simple set up
▷ Program an entire intersection in
just minutes
▷ Easy to install with 3-wires-only
▷ Simple integration to all traffic
cabinets
▷ High Definition (HD) camera for
superior video images
▷ 2 gore breathers
About Vision™
Video detection and broadband communications
technologies continue to help inspire and generate new
levels of Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) capabilities.
This will be even more critical as connected vehicle and Smart City technologies become more prevalent, particularly vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I) and data analytics. Whether for surveillance, vehicle detection, bicycle detection and differentiation, data collection, or traffic monitoring systems, video detection and broadband communications are
increasing ITS performance, cost efficiencies, and access to strategic traffic information - helping transportation professionals improve safety, reduce vehicle emissions, and mitigate traffic congestion.
Building on more than two decades of proven above-ground video detection experience, Autoscope Vision delivers the highest levels of accuracy and performance in an easyto-use detection solution that supports a variety of traffic management and ITS applications.
Accurate. Versatile. Simple.
▷ ▷ Autoscope performance is robust and reliable in all lighting conditions. 3360 E La Palma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92806 ∙ 714-630-3700 ∙ [email protected] ∙ www.econolite.com © 2017 Econolite Control Products, Inc. All rights reserved. Econolite Control Products, Inc. is an Econolite Group, Inc. company, and reserves the right to change or update these specifications at any time without prior notification.
Econolite Video, Radar, & In-Ground Detection
Description
Autoscope Vision is an integrated camera-processor sensor solution that provides high performance stop bar vehicle detection, bicycle detection and differentiation, advance vehicle detection, traffic data collection, and HD video surveillance. It also supports local WiFi and streaming video to mobile computing devices.
Autoscope Vision utilizes an ITO faceplate heater and
hydrophilic coated lens to maintain optimal performance during inclement weather while reducing the frequency of cleaning.
Power and communication to Vision sensors is conducted
via the Vision Comm Manager™. Vision Comm Manager
supports SDLC and wired I/O interface.
Application
Autoscope Vision is capable of simultaneously satisfying multiple transportation management objectives:
- Stop bar vehicle detection
- Bicycle detection and differentiation
- Advance vehicle detection up to 600 feet from Vision sensor - Traffic data collection
- HD video surveillance
Vision Sensor
Specifications
▷ Temperature
◉ -34° C to +60° C (-29° F to 165°F)
◉ Meets TS2 standards
◉ Relative humidity of 0 to 95%, noncondensing
▷ Power
◉ 16W typical, 18W maximum
◉ 89 to 265 VAC
◉ 60/50 Hz
◉ Indium Titanium Oxide (ITO) and hyrdrophilic
faceplate
▷ Dimensions
◉ H x W x L (with sunshield and bracket):
7” x 5.5” x 22.5”
(177.8 mm x 140 mm x 571.5mm)
◉ 6.5 lbs (2.95 kg)
381480916-3
Autoscope Vision Datasheet
Traffic Cabinet [AVIO24]
Supports 1-4 Sensors
(use for wired I/O or DEM144/DEM 114
for TS1/170/2070 expansion)
I/O 24 Module
CAT5 Ethernet Cable to PC
or Cabinet Switch
SMSADV-CAT5 or equivalent
Optional
Autoscope Vision
Comm Manager
[AVCM]
Supports 1-4 Vision Sensors
3-Wire-Only Cable
[1175-010] 500 ft.
[1175-011] 1000 ft.
Polyethylene jacket 18 AWG
Autoscope Vision
[AVISION]
Integrated Camera Processor
[AMBKTM11]
Mounting Bracket
to another Autoscope Vision sensor
to 120VAC
Operation
• Rotatable LCD Display, easy to read, large 4 line by 20 character backlit display • Scrolling Message which lists Relay Status, Alarms and Faults • Display shows input and output values including battery % charge • Quick Status Screens and Buck/Boost Event and Run Time Counters • Keypad for Local Programming
• Adjustable Transfer Points with Normal and Generator settings • Six fully Programmable Dry Relay Contacts w/Low Battery, Timer, and others • Event Log of Events, up to 256 events
• Automatic Low Battery Shutdown
Power
• Buck/Boost (wide 80-160Vac input range)
• Pure Sine Wave Inverter, Less than 3%THD, 60Hz ± 0.05% • TVSS compliant with ANSI C.62.41.2-2002 (IEEE 587)
• Self Test
• Thermally –controlled cooling fan
Charger
• 4 Step Charger (Zero Volt Start, Bulk, Accept, and Float) • Temperature Compensated Charging
• Charges AGM or Gel Batteries
• Load Management
Communications
• Ethernet (IP is user configurable), generates emails
• Configure and acquire status information by using your favorite web browser
• RS-232
• 5 Year Warranty
“M” CASE
17.2”W x 10”D x 5.25”H, 32 Lbs.
*Model # 24M11-WBE*
Model # 48M18-WBE
* Caltrans Tested & Approved *
“J” CASE
13.2”W x 11”D x 7.25”H, 32 Lbs.
Model # 24J11-WBE
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 24 Volt, 1100W Series 48 Volt, 1800W Series Output Power (Watts continuous) 1,100 @ 25°C, 850 @ 74°C 1,800 @ 25°C, 1200 @ 74°C Output Voltage (Pure Sine) 120 VAC regulated 120 VAC regulated Output Frequency 60 Hz ± 0.05% 60 Hz ± 0.05%
Output Current (Amps AC) Up to 9.2 Up to 15
Peak Output (Amps AC) 67 50
Input Voltage (Volts DC) 21 to 32 41-64
Input Current (Amps DC) Up to 55 Up to 42
Efficiency (Inverter) Up to 86% Up to 86%
Operating Temperature -40°C to 74°C (-40°F to 165°F) -40°C to 74°C (-40°F to 165°F) Transfer Time (milliseconds) 30 typical 30 typical
BATTERY CHARGER
Output Voltage (Volts DC) Regulated and temp. compensated Regulated and temp. compensated Output Current (Amps DC) Up to 20 Up to 15
Input Current (Amps AC) Up to 5 Up to 7.6
Charge Time Less than 10 hours to 80% or greater Less than 10 hours to 80% or greater Features & Specifications
Sensata Technologies • 4467 White Bear Parkway • St. Paul, Minnesota 55110-7626 Toll Free 800-553-6418 • Tel: 651-653-7000 • Fax: 651-653-7600 • http://dimensions.sensata.com Form # 131151 (10/05/11)
Contact us for a “No Hassle” field trial.
Try this unit at your facility with no cost
or obligation to buy.
24MV11-WBE
Alpha FXM is a line of rugged UPS power modules used worldwide where clean backup power is needed.
Designed to perform in the most extreme demanding environments, Alpha FXM units ensure equipment in security, communications, traffic, industrial environments, and many other critical applications remains safe and protected from power disturbances. Thanks to its powerful programmable battery charger, the FXM is capable of providing the runtime you need. All FXM models are available in 120Vac and 230Vac. *Ethernet SNMP card is standard on the 120Vac model and optional on the 230Vac model > 1100W/VA UPS designed to operate in extreme environments and provide maximum flexibility while ensuring critical loads remain protected and running during power outages and other power disturbances > Wide range Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) lengthens battery life by providing protection without transferring to backup mode during voltage surges or sags > Independently programmable control and reporting dry contacts allow monitoring and controlling of key functions
> Temperature compensated battery charging protects batteries from overcharging or undercharging at extreme temperatures, extending the life of the battery > Local and remote monitoring and control via RS232 port and Ethernet SNMP interface* > UPS panels can be rotated, improving flexibility and viewing convenience FXM 1100
Rugged UPS Module
Alpha Technologies Ltd. For more information visit www.alpha.ca Canada: Burnaby, British Columbia T: 604.436.5900 F: 604.436.1233 #0480013-00 Rev F (11/2015) United States: Bellingham, Washington T: 360.647.2360 F: 360.671.4936 Alpha Technologies reserves the right to make changes to the products and information contained in this document without notice.
Copyright © 2015 Alpha Technologies. All Rights Reserved. Alpha® is a registered trademark of Alpha Technologies. member of The Alpha Group™ is a trademark of Alpha Technologies.
FXM 1100 Rugged UPS Module
Consult your Alpha representative for P/N configurations
ELECTRICAL
>120Vac Model
Battery string voltage:.....48Vdc
Nominal voltage:..............120Vac
Frequency: .......................60/50Hz ±5% (auto-detection) Input:
Voltage range:.................85 to 175Vac
Current:...........................15.5A (@ nominal voltage and max battery charging current
Output:
Waveform:.......................Pure sinewave
Nominal voltage: .............120Vac
Voltage regulation: ..........±10% on line mode, ±2% on inverter mode Power at 55°C:................1100W/VA
Frequency:......................Output frequency = Input frequency >230Vac Model
Battery string voltage:.....48Vdc
Nominal voltage:..............230Vac
Frequency: .......................60/50Hz ±5% (auto-detection) Input:
Current:...........................8A (@ nominal voltage and max battery charging current
Voltage range:.................150 to 328Vac
Output:
Waveform:.......................Pure sinewave
Nominal voltage: .............230Vac
Voltage regulation ...........±10% on line mode, ±2% on inverter mode Power at 55°C:................1100W/VA
Frequency:......................Output frequency = Input frequency
MECHANICAL
Dimensions:
mm:.................................133H x 394W x 222D
inches: ............................5.22H x 15.5W x 8.75D Weight:..............................16kg (35lbs)
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE:
Display:.............................2 x 20 backlit alpha-numeric LCD Ports: ................................DE-9 Female: Local RS232 Communication RJ45: Remote Communication
RJ11: Battery Temperature Compensation
Indicators: ........................Green & Red LED's
Solid Green: Line Mode
Flashing Green: Inverter Mode
Flashing Red: Alarm
Solid Red: Fault
Dry Contacts:...................Programmable NO/NC (250Vac, 1A)*, 3 user inputs, ATS
Factory Default:
• C1: On Battery • C7: User Inputs
• C2, C3: Low Battery • S1: Self test
• C4: Load Shed Timer 1 • S2: User Input
• C5: Alarm • S3: Shutdown(EPO)
• C6*: 48Vdc @ 500mA • C8: ATS
* C6 is factory configurable only
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating temp range*:...-40 to 74°C (-40 to 165°F)
Humidity: ..........................Up to 95% (non condensing) Altitude(m/ft):...................Up to 3700 (12,000)** Audible noise @ 25°C:......45dBa @ 1 meter (39in)
MTBF (hours):...................150K + as per Telcordia SR-332, 100% duty cycle ,full load
BTU/Hr:.............................Normal mode 22W
Backup mode 242W
*Derates after 55°C
**Derates 2°C per 300m (1000ft) above 1400m (4500ft)
PERFORMANCE
Typical output voltage THD: ..... <3% (resistive load)
Typical efficiency: ...................... >98% (resistive load) Typical transfer time:................. <5ms
Load Crest factor:...................... 3:1 (load dependent)
POWER CONNECTOR OPTIONS
AGENCY COMPLIANCE***
Electrical safety: ..............UL1778, CSA 22.2 No 107.3; EN62040-1 Marks:
EMC: .................................CFR47, Part 15 Subpart B, Class A; CES-003 Class A; EN62040-2
***Compliance only applies to units with standard input and output connectors.
Contact us for compliance information on models with optional power connectors ****CE applies to 230Vac version only
120Vac Model
Input Output
Standard Terminal
Block
Terminal
Block
Optional Terminal
Block
Terminal Block
+ Dual 5-15R
IEC** IEC**
230Vac Model
Standard Terminal
Block
Terminal
Block
**FXM models with IEC connectors come with 4 lines LCD display instead of the traditional 2 lines display ****
Your Power Solutions Partner
> Clean, uninterruptible backup power ensures your system will remain operational during power outages
> Wide range Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) without going to batteries lengthens battery life, even during periods of surge or sag in the line voltage > External communications via RS-232 port and optional Ethernet SNMP interface provides local or remote monitoring and control
> Independently programmable and dry contact relays allow tracking and controlling of key functions
> Event and alarm logging with time and date stamping simplifies and accelerates troubleshooting
> A wide operating temperature range of -40 to 74°C (-40 to 165°F) is suitable for the most extreme operating environments
> Control and power connection panels can be rotated for mounting and display in any orientation for viewing preference
> Temperature compensated battery charging protects batteries from over charging at extreme temperatures, extending the life of the battery Alpha FXM 2000
UPS Module
The Alpha FXM uninterruptible power supply (UPS) modules provide clean, reliable power control and management as part of a complete UPS solution. Each model is available in either North American (120V/60Hz) or International (230V/50Hz) variants. Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) provides power stability in unpredictable environments and constant voltage during variable power conditions. Temperature compensated battery charging protects batteries from over charging at extreme temperatures, extending battery life. Event and alarm logging with time and date stamping simplifies and accelerates troubleshooting. Control and power connection panels can be rotated for mounting and display in any orientation** for viewing preference.
* Power module only. Output power derates after 55°C for FXM 650 and 1100, after 50°C for FXM 2000. (120Vac), and after 55°C (230Vac) ** The LCD panel on the FXM 650 cannot be rotated.
Alpha FXM 2000
Canada: Burnaby, British Columbia Tel: 604 436 5900 Fax: 604 436 1233 United States: Bellingham, Washington Tel: 360 647 2360 Fax: 360 671 4936 Alpha Technologies reserves the right to make changes to the products and information contained in this document without notice.
Copyright © 2010 Alpha Technologies. All Rights Reserved. Alpha® is a registered trademark of Alpha Technologies. member of The Alpha Group™ is a trademark of Alpha Technologies.
Alpha Technologies Ltd. For more information visit www.alpha.ca member of The Group™
#0480014-00 Rev B (10/2010)
Alpha FXM 2000 UPS Module
Consult your Alpha representative for P/N configurations Mechanical
Dimensions:
mm:.................................133H x 394W x 222D
inches:............................5.22H x 15.5W x 8.75D Weight: ..............................16kg (35lbs)
Environmental
Operating
temperature range*: ..........-40 to 74°C (-40 to 165°F) Audible noise @ 25°C:......<45dBa @ 1 metre (39in)
*Derates after 60°C
Performance
Typical output voltage THD: ...<3%
Typical efficiency:.................>98% (resistive load) Typical transfer time:............<5ms
Agency Compliance
Electrical safety:................UL1778, CSA 22.2 No 107.3-03 Marks:
EMI: ...................................Class A FCC/CISPR [EN 50091-2:1995]
*CE applies to 230Vac version only
Electrical
>North America
Battery string voltage:.......48Vdc
Nominal voltage: ...............120Vac
Nominal frequency:...........Auto-sensing
Input:
Current:...........................17.5A nominal
Voltage: ..........................85 to 150Vac
Output:
Current:...........................16.7A nominal
Voltage regulation: .........+/- 10% over input voltage range Power at 50°C:................2000W/VA
>International
Battery string voltage:.......48Vdc
Nominal voltage: ...............230Vac
Nominal frequency:...........Auto-sensing
Input:
Current:...........................9.15A nominal
Voltage range: ................150 to 281Vac
Output:
Current:...........................8.7A nominal
Voltage regulation ..........+/- 10% over input voltage range Power at 50°C:................2000W/VA
Alpha FXM is a line of rugged UPS power modules used worldwide in the most demanding environments where clean backup power is needed. Designed to perform in the most extreme demanding environments, Alpha FXM units ensure equipment in security, communications, traffic, industrial environments, and many other critical applications remains safe and protected from power disturbances. Thanks to its powerful programmable battery charger, the FXM is capable of providing the runtime you need. All FXM models are available in 120Vac and 230Vac.
*Ethernet SNMP card is standard on the 120Vac model and optional on the 230Vac model > 650W/VA UPS module designed to operate in extreme environments and provide maximum flexibility while ensuring critical loads remain protected and running during power outages and other power disturbances > Wide range Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) lengthens battery life by providing protection without transferring to backup mode during voltage surge or sag > Independently programmable control and reporting dry contacts allow monitoring and controlling of key functions > Temperature compensated battery charging protects batteries from overcharging or undercharging at extreme temperatures, extending the life of the battery > Local and remote monitoring and control via RS232 port and Ethernet SNMP interface* FXM 650
Rugged UPS Module
Alpha Technologies Ltd. For more information visit www.alpha.ca Canada: Burnaby, British Columbia T: 604.436.5900 F: 604.436.1233 #0480012-00 Rev E (10/2015) United States: Bellingham, Washington T: 360.647.2360 F: 360.671.4936 Alpha Technologies reserves the right to make changes to the products and information contained in this document without notice.
Copyright © 2015 Alpha Technologies. All Rights Reserved. Alpha® is a registered trademark of Alpha Technologies. member of The Alpha Group™ is a trademark of Alpha Technologies.
FXM 650 Rugged UPS Module
Consult your Alpha representative for P/N configurations
ELECTRICAL
>120Vac Model
Battery string voltage:.....24Vdc or 48Vdc
Nominal voltage:..............120Vac
Frequency: .......................60Hz/50Hz ±5% (auto detection) Input:
Current:...........................8.7A (@ nominal voltage and max battery charging current)
Voltage range:.................85 to 175Vac
Output:
Waveform:.......................Pure sinewave
Nominal voltage: .............120Vac
Voltage regulation: ..........±10% on line mode, ±2% on inverter mode Power at 55°C:................650W/VA
Charge current:...............10A max
Frequency:......................Output frequency = Input frequency >230Vac Model
Battery string voltage:.....24Vdc
Nominal voltage:..............230Vac
Frequency: .......................60Hz/50Hz±5% (auto detection) Input:
Current:...........................4.5A (@ nominal voltage and max battery charging current)
Voltage range:.................150 to 328Vac
Output:
Waveform:.......................Pure sinewave
Nominal voltage: .............230Vac
Voltage regulation ...........±10% on line mode, ±2% on inverter mode Power at 55°C:................650W/VA
Frequency:......................Output frequency = Input frequency
MECHANICAL
Dimensions:
mm:.................................88H x 432W x 229D
inches: ............................3.47H x 17W x 9D
Weight:..............................11kg (25lbs)
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE:
Display:.............................2 x 20 backlit alpha-numeric LCD Ports: ................................DE-9 Female: Local RS232 Communication RJ45: Remote Communication
RJ11: Battery Temperature Compensation
Indicators: ........................Green & Red LED's
Solid Green: Line Mode
Flashing Green: Inverter Mode
Flashing Red: Alarm
Solid Red: Fault
Dry Contacts:...................Programmable NO/NC (250Vac, 1A)*, 3 user inputs, ATS
Factory Default:
• C1: On Battery • C7: User Inputs
• C2, C3: Low Battery • S1: Self test
• C4: Load Shed Timer 1 • S2: User Input
• C5: Alarm • S3: Shutdown(EPO)
• C6*: 48Vdc @ 500mA • C8: ATS
* C6 is factory configurable only
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating temp range*:...-40 to 74°C (-40 to 165°F)
Humidity: ..........................Up to 95% (non condensing) Altitude(m/ft):...................Up to 3700 (12,000)** Audible noise @ 25°C:......45dBa @ 1 meter (39in)
MTBF (hours):...................150K + as per Telcordia SR-332, 100% duty cycle ,full load
BTU/Hr:.............................Normal mode 9W
Backup mode FXM 650-48: 143W
Backup mode FXM 650-24: 217W
*Derates after 55°C
**Derates 2°C per 300m (1000ft) above 1400m (4500ft)
PERFORMANCE
Typical output voltage THD:.... <3% (resistive load)
Typical efficiency: .................... >98% (resistive load) Typical transfer time: ............... <5ms
Load Crest factor: .................... 3:1 (load dependent)
POWER CONNECTOR OPTIONS
AGENCY COMPLIANCE
Electrical safety: ..............UL1778, CSA 22.2 No 107.3-03 Marks:
EMI:...................................Class A FCC/CISPR [EN 50091-2:1995]
**CE applies to 230Vac version only
120Vac Model
Input Output
Standard Terminal
Block
Terminal
Block
230Vac Model
Standard Terminal
Block
Terminal
Block
Web interface
SPSeries
SP 1000SR/SN - SP 1250SR/SN PLUS - SP 2000SR/SN
Universal UPS Systems for LED Traffic Signal Applications • Can keep an intersection running for up to 8 hours or longer • Does not compromise existing cabinet wiring
• Provides ON-LINE conditioned re-manufactured power for cabinet equipment • RS232 or TCP/IP- Communicates with monitoring center or other equipment • SP 1000SR/SN: 1,250 VA, 875 Watts, continuous power
• SP 1250SR/SN PLUS: 1,250 VA, 875Watts (1400 watts, peak load 10 sec. or less) • SP 2000SR/SN: 2,000 VA, 1,400 Watts, continuous power • Multi-state DOT and NEMA compliant
• Optional NEMA 3R Type II and Type III cabinets available • Power Factored Corrected
SP 1250U - SP 2000U
UPS Systems for IT/Communication Applications
• Provides uninterrupted power for up to 8 hours or longer • Completely conditions, re-manufactures and regulates power • Power factor corrected
• RS232 or Optional SNMP Adapter (TCP/IP Protocols)
• SP 1250U: 1,250 VA, 875 Watts, continuous power
• SP 2000U: 1,400 Watts, continuous power
• Optional NEMA 3R Type II and Type III cabinets available Outpost™ Series
AGM VRLA Batteries for Traffic Applications -40oC to +74oC (-40oF to +165oF) • Designed for outdoor applications
• Outlives any other battery in extreme environments
• Special connectors allow safe, rapid field replacement • Configured in a set of six batteries (SP1000SR/SN & SP1250PLUS SR/SN/U) • Configured in a set of eight batteries (SP2000SR/SN/U) The SP Series UPS and Outpost™ Series batteries are designed for outdoor use and will operate in extreme temperature environments of -40oC to +74oC (-40oF to +165oF).
Uninterruptible
Power for Traffic
Signal Applications
1,250 VA and 2,000 VA
Where POWER is a way of life
Uninterruptible Power for Traffic Signal Applications
SPSeriesSP Series
SPSeriesSP Series
SP 1000SR/SN - SP 1250SR/SN PLUS - SP 2000SR/SN
SP 1250U - SP2000U
OUTPOST BATTERIES
Keeping intersections alive during power failures, Clary's SP Series is the world’s most advanced Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) for traffic applications. Without compromising existing cabinet wiring, the SP Series keeps LED signal heads running for up to 8 hours or more during power failures. Clary's continuous power systems fit inside most existing cabinets and meet all NEMA temperature specifications.
Optional NEMA 3R Type II and Type III cabinets are available.
These systems also provide clean, regulated power for controllers and other sensitive equipment inside the cabinet. The SP1000SR/SN systems are intended for application where load usage will not exceed 875 watts.
These systems are also available with a extended load option SP1250 SR/SN PLUS that will allow for 1400 watts peak load for a ten second interval. This option accommodates intersections that have not yet replaced the yellow incandescent traffic lamps. Additionally, Clar y can provide a SP2000SR/SN system that will sustain a continuous 1400 watt load. These systems require eight batteries and additional cabinet space or a separate cabinet such as the Clary CBO-123 UPS cabinet.
Advanced communication features allow monitoring, configuration and control of the system over RS232, modem or network connections.
Available for both NEMA and 170 style cabinets.
Providing outdoor equipment with clean, regulated power, these rugged UPSs also provide up to 8 hours or more of backup power. Wherever functionality must be maintained regardless of outside temperature and utility power conditions, these systems are designed for the task.
Advanced communication features allow monitoring, configuration and control of the system over RS232, modem or network connections. Fits most outdoor enclosures.
These 41Ah maintenance-free, Absorbent Glass Mat, Valve Regulated, Lead Acid (AGM-VRLA) batteries are designed for deep cycle, extreme temperature applications. They have been field tested and used for years by the militar y. Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) technology assures a safe spill-proof environment. Especially designed for outdoor and extreme temperature applications, they are capable of operating from -40oC to +74oC (-40oF to +165oF). This makes them ideal for use with Clary’s SP Series traffic signal solutions, IT/Communication UPS solution or other extreme temperature applications.
Known worldwide for their demanding role in power protection, Clary power products deliver high availability to critical systems. Using the most advanced UPS technology, Clary Corporation has developed a line of power products for traffic systems applications that delivers the same reliability as its military and life support products.
Features List
Component Features
General Features
UPS Electronics
Battery System
Batteries
Power Interface Module (PIM)
Alarm Functions
• Compatible with most traffic cabinets
• Works with intersections that have red LEDs by utilizing flash mode • Provides full operation in intersections with all LEDs in all positions • Power event counter records number of power utility failures • Small size fits most cabinets
• Non-invasive to cabinet wiring (only utility line is rerouted) • Auxiliary contacts allow full operation for short power interruptions and flash operation for longer interruptions or low battery • Police panel compatibility allows complete shutdown during emergencies • All internal calibrations are digital; no potentiometers to set or fail • Intelligent software interface for monitoring and control • Optional Web-based network interface allows monitoring with most common web browsers
• Economically priced
• Microprocessor controlled
• Power handling capacity: 1,250 VA, 875 watts to 2,000 VA, 1,400 watts • Rugged, militar y grade inver ter designed for 24 hour, 7 day, 365 days a year operation
• Built-in TVSS (surge suppression)
• DSP technology
• Automatic periodic self testing
• Interfaces: RS232 intelligent; contact closures; optional NTCIP and TCP/IP network interface
• Sophisticated battery management for recharging and protection • Temperature compensated batter y charging
• Battery run-time counter
• Periodic battery testing checks for: Battery condition; Battery charge; Battery status; Battery temperature
• Foolproof battery connector system allows safe, tool-less installation even in dark or rainy conditions
• Optional “quick charge” battery charger
• Outpost™ batteries specifically designed for outdoor use • AGM/VRLA battery technology
• Sizes available for 2,4,8 or more hours of operation
• Mounting trays available for 170 style cabinets
• PIM allows hot swapping of entire UPS without disturbing intersection operation
• Minimum disruption of cabinet wiring
• Uses high reliability, industr y standard contactors
• Three sets of independent auxiliary contacts for flash, delayed flash and monitoring
• Input bad
• Output bad
• Temperature
• Overload
• General alarm
Where POWER is a way of life
Clary Corporation
150 E Huntington Drive Monrovia, Ca 91016
Tel: 800.442.5279 • Fax:626.305.0254
• www.clary.com
P/N 520-13481
11/24/09 -Ver. 1.5
SP Series Specifications
Input
Voltage 120 VAC +12%, -29%
(without battery discharge)
Frequency 48 to 62 Hz
Output
Voltage 120 VAC +3%
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Rating: SP 1000 SR/SN 1,250 VA/875 Watts
SP 1250 SR/SN PLUS 1,250 VA/875 Watts 1
SP 2000SR/SN/U 2,000 VA/1400 Watts
Crest Factor Ratio @50% Load Up to 4.8:1
(Non-linear Load and @75% Load Up to 3.2:1
< 5% THD) Typical @100% Load Up to 2.4:1
Total Har monic
Distortion (THD) 4.0% Max.
Dynamic Response ±4% for 100% Step Load Change
0.5 ms Recovery Time
Overload 110% for 10 sec;
200% for .05 sec
UPS Protection Input and Output Short Circuit;
Input and Output Overload;
Excessive Battery Discharge
Operating Temp. -40oC to +74oC (-40F to+165oF)
Humidity 0% to 95% Non-condensing
Altitude Sea Level to 10,000 ft (some
derating of temp. w/altitude > 6,000 ft)
Input Hardwired to PIM
Outputs Hardwired to PIM, w/single 15 Amp
Receptacle on back of UPS
Cabinet NEMA, 332 or CBO-123 Cabinet
Style Configurations Available;
NEMA 3R Type II and Type III
Optional
Consult Factory for other Custom options
ENVIRONMENTAL
MECHANICAL
ELECTRICAL
Standard Features Power Factor Corrected Input;
Fully Regenerative;
True On-Line Continuous Power;
Low Distortion Sinewave Output;
Designed for Non-linear Loads;
Extended Brownout Protection;
EIA/RS232 Data Interface
Specifications Meets FCC Class A, IEEE
587/ANSI C62.41, IEC 555 @
120 VAC and NEMA Stds
MTBF Inverter: > 100,000 hrs
System w/Bypass: 150,000 hrs
Calculated from Component Spec
Typical Recharge 48-72 hrs (more time required
Time to 85% with extended battery option)
Capacity @ Less than 20 hrs with optional
100% Load Fast Battery Charger
Ramping LEDs Battery Level; Load Level
Single LEDs AC In; Inverter On; Low Battery
and Summary Alarm; Alarm Silence
Control Panel Power On; Cold Start; Test; Alarm
Silence; Event Counter (w/Reset);
Hour Meter; Battery Disconnect
Audible Alarms Utility Interrupt; Inverter Failure;
Overload; Low Battery; Self Test
Serial Interface for Full Interactive Remote Computer
EIA 232. Optional Monitoring and Control of Most
NTCIP and TCP/IP Features Including Load Control
via Standard RJ45 (requires optional monitoring
Connector software); NTCIP and TCP/IP
Ready
Contact Closures Open Collector for Remote
("D" connector) Annunciation of Power Up,
Power Down, On Batter y, Low
Battery and Alarms
Specifications subject to change without prior notice.
DESIGN
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Made in the USA
Input Output Backup Time (41Ahr) Unit Weight Rackmount
Model VA Watts Current (A) Current (A) 100% / 50% Load (lbs) H x W x D (in) SP1000SN/SR21,250 875 8.8 10.4 1.5 hrs. / 3.25 hrs. 20 3.50 x 19.0 x 13.0 (2U) SP1250SN/SR Plus1, 21,250 875 8.8 10.4 1.5 hrs. / 3.25 hrs. 20 3.50 x 19.0 x 13.0 (2U) SP2000SN/SR22,000 1400 18.0 20.0 1.5 hrs. / 3.50 hrs. 30 5.25 x 19.0 x 17.0 (3U) SP1250U 1,250 875 8.8 10.4 1.5 hrs. / 3.25 hrs. 20 3.50 x 19.0 x 13.0 (2U) SP2000U 2,000 1400 18.0 20.0 1.5 hrs. / 3.50 hrs. 30 5.25 x 19.0 x 17.0 (3U) CUSTOM Options
Note 1 Supports 1400 watt peak load for 10 seconds or less, intended for yellow incandescent applications.
Note 2 Requires Clary PIM30, C, G, R, or GR for traffic applications.
Uninterruptible Power for Traffic Signal Applications - 1000, 1250 and 2000VA SP560
INPUT-IEC C14 OUTPUT-IEC DC IN
SYSTEM ON/OFF
ALARM
AC IN
AC OUT
BATTERY
COLD START SWITCH
LOAD SWITCH
RS232-SIGNAL INTERFACE
USB-TYPE A/TYPE B
1.74 Uninterruptible Power
for Traffic, IT & Security
Applications
Industry proven, on-line protection, 100% of the time,
for reliable and continuous error-free operation,
regardless of utility power quality.
The CLARY SP560 is a 400W/560VA 120VAC power source for electronics equipment in IT, Traffic, and Security applications. The SP560 delivers constant, conditioned, regenerated AC power which protects equipment from being disrupted, degraded or damaged due to harmful power events.
CLARY power conditioning completely isolates the cabinet from utility power enabling error-free operation during surges, sags, spikes, and other power anomalies. With an optional battery pack, the SP560 system operates as an On-Line, Double-Conversion UPS that extends the reliability of the cabinet’s electronics during utility power failures (black-outs). The SP560 is Power Factor Corrected to reduce utility current draw and wiring requirements.
Designed for indoor/outdoor use, the CLARY SP560 will operate in temperature extremes from -40˚C to +70˚C (-40˚F to 165˚F). Occupying only 1U of Vertical Rack Space, its 8.5" × 11" footprint can fit any cabinet. The SP560 communicates locally or remotely via serial, USB
or an optional web agent.
smaller footprint!
space saving design!
1.7"h × 11"w × 8.5"d
Quick Read Features:
• Space Saving Design:
1U Vertical Rack Space
• On-Line, Conditioned,
Regenerated Power
for Cabinet Equipment
Protection
• USB Connectivity with
Monitoring Center or
Other Equipment
• Power Factor Corrected
for Reliable & Safe Power
• Operates in Extreme
Environments from -40°C
to +74°C (-40°F to +165°F)
Front Panel shown is the
actual width (11") of the
SP560. Its depth (8.5")is
the width of this datasheet.
In most applications it is
mounted horizontally.
The Continuous Power Company™
SP560 Specifications
150 East Huntington Drive, Monrovia, CA 91016
Tel:800-442-5279 • Fax:626-305-0254 • www.clary.com
Electrical
Input
Voltage 120 VAC, (85VAC to 155VAC before
going to battery, when configured with
batteries)
Frequency 40 to 70 Hz
Output
Voltage 120 VAC ±3%
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz ±.25% (Software
Selectable)
Current 4.8A (400W / 570VA)
Crest Factor Ratio
(Non-linear Load
and < 5% THD)
@50% Load Up to 4.8:1
@75% Load Up to 3.2:1
Typical
@100% Load Up to 2.4:1
Total Harmonic
Distortion
(THD) 3.0%
Dynamic Response ±4% for 100% Step Load Change,
0.5 ms Recovery Time
Overload 110% for 10 seconds;
200% for 50 milliseconds
UPS Protection Input and Output Short Circuit, Input
and Output Overload, Excessive
Battery Discharge
Mechanical
Input IEC-320, C14 male connector
Outputs IEC-320, C13 female receptacle
Overall Dimensions 11"W × 8.5"D × 1.7"H
Environmental
Operating
Temperature
-40˚F to +165˚F (-40˚C to +74˚C)
Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing
Altitude Sea Level to 10,000 Feet
Options
Battery Chassis External Battery Chassis supports
UPS capability. Provides 6 minutes of
back-up time at 100% load. Consult
Factory for other Battery and Battery
Chassis Options.
Rack Mount Hardware to provide 19" Rack
mounting capability.
By-pass Switch Supports manual and automatic
switching of SP560.
Design
Standard Features Power Factor Corrected Input;
Fully Regenerative; True On-Line
Continuous Power; Low Distortion
Sinewave Output; Designed for Nonlinear Loads; Extended Brownout Protection
Specifications Meets FCC Class A, IEEE 587/ANSI
C62.41, IEC 555 @ 120 VAC and
NEMA Standards
MTBF Inverter: > 100,000 hrs
System Calculated from Component
Specifications
Typical Recharge
Time to 85%
Capacity @ 100%
Load
3 to 5 hrs (with extended battery
option)
Controls and Indicators
Visual Indicators Battery Status; AC Output; AC Input;
Alarm
Switches System Power; Cold start; Load
Audible Alarms Utility Interrupt; Inverter Failure;
Overload; Low Battery; Over
Temperature
Intelligent Computer
Interfaces
1 each DB9-F (RS232 and Signal
Interface pins) and 1 each USB
UPS/BBS
SYSTEMS
MP2000/MP2000E
Local Keypad Programmability - including status
monitoring, setting/testing of various parameters, dry
contact programming, and more. No laptop necessary.
Six Fully Programmable Dry Contacts - provides greater control of system components and functions.
Backlit LCD Displays - easily readable in all light conditions. Remote Access through a serial interface via an RS232, USB port or Ethernet communication card.
1500 watt; 2000VA
Anderson connector
Rotating Meter display
Provides fully interactive program and status reporting using built-in, Windows™-compatible software.
Time/Date Stamp of Events and Alarms - up to 100 events with download and print capability.
Data Dump Commands available through RS232 port, USB
port or Ethernet communication card.
Caltrans QPL approval
Connectivity
Effective system integration and communications depends on connectivity. In addition to AC input/output connectors, Myers MP Series provides NC/NO dry contacts (fully programmable), giving you greater versatility in powering external system components during normal or battery backup operations. An RS232 serial port, USB, or Ethernet card allows for complete remote communications.
MP Series UPS Displays
Advanced Display Readout
Myers MP Series™ provides you with the tools to monitor and maintain your system at peak performance. The MP
Series utilizes a bright LCD display and touch keys to provide real time information including input/output status, battery percentages, online and load status, time/date stamp of events, and more. Easy-to-read scrolling menus assist you with maintenance and programming of functions.
Status & Event Reporting
MP Series UPS provides fully interactive program and status reporting capabilities via built-in, Windows™-compatible software. Whether using this feature for set-up, maintenance, or as a link to your traffic control command center, the ability to view moment-by-moment operations will enhance your traffic engineering and supervisory control capabilities.
Features
RS232
USB Port Programmable Dry Contacts
Ethernet
MP2000 MP2000E MP2000CA
Output Power (VA) 2000 2000 2000
Active Output Power (Watts) 1500 1500 1500
Transient voltage protection from damaging line spikes ♦ ♦ ♦ Low harmonic AC sine wave output ♦ ♦ ♦
Intelligent Buck and Boost Operation for brownout and surge protection ♦ ♦ ♦ Noise suppression, FCC Class A ♦ ♦ ♦
Multiple mounting configurations ♦ ♦ ♦
6 Fully programmable dry contacts for conrtol and reporting functionality ♦ ♦ ♦ Backlit LCD display, 2 row by 20 characters Black on Green ♦ ♦ ♦ Time/Date stamp of events and alarms ♦ ♦ ♦
Intelligent remote communication capability via RS232, USB ♦ ♦ ♦ Ethernet Modem ♦ ♦
Ethernet SNMP Card - SNMP compliant ♦
Web-based Ethernet ♦
Battery Options
MP Series UPS batteries are specifically designed for UPS applications and are completely sealed and maintenance-free. These absorbed glass mat, valve regulated lead acid (AGM/VRLA) batteries can withstand extreme temperatures, are rated non-spillable by ICAO IATA/DOT and available in a variety of ampere-hour ratings. Battery harnesses with “quick-connect” cables are included with complete system soultions packages. Sample run times are listed below based on a single string (4 batteries) at 25°C.
Installation Configurations
With MP Series UPS you not only get the right UPS components, you also benefit from Myers Power Products’ years of experience in cabinet design to ensure your entire battery backup system is configured to precisely meet your needs. Standard and custom configurations are available for Type 170/332, NEMA, Myers MEUG service pedestals, and more.
Complete systems can
be packaged for internal
installation into an existing
cabinet, as an external addon, or as a separate freestanding cabinet. Call to speak to a Myers engineer for more
information.
Electrical
Service
Battery
Compartment
Bypass Switch
MP Series
UPS
MEUG35-UPS-D
PTS
Roll-out
Battery Tray
MPSeries UPS
Electrical
Service
Batteries
BC100HZ
For more details, refer to Myers publication Battery Options and Run Time Calculations. 1500 0 hr. 30 min. 0 hr. 50 min. 1 hr. 05 min. 1 hr. 20 min. 1 hr. 45 min. 2 hr. 00 min. 1200 0 hr. 40 min. 1 hr. 05 min. 1 hr. 20 min. 1 hr. 40 min. 2 hr. 15 min. 2 hr. 30 min. 1000 0 hr. 55 min. 1 hr. 20 min. 1 hr. 40 min. 2 hr. 00 min. 2 hr. 40 min. 3 hr. 05 min. 875 1 hr. 11 min. 1 hr. 50 min. 2 hr. 15 min. 2 hr. 40 min. 3 hr. 30 min. 4 hr. 00 min. 750 1 hr. 17 min. 2 hr. 05 min. 2 hr. 35 min. 3 hr. 05 min. 3 hr. 55 min. 4 hr. 30 min. 650 1 hr. 27 min. 2 hr. 25 min. 2 hr. 50 min. 3 hr. 20 min. 4 hr. 35 min. 5 hr. 10 min. 550 1 hr. 40 min. 3 hr. 00 min. 3 hr. 20 min. 3 hr. 40 min. 5 hr. 10 min. 5 hr. 55 min. 450 1 hr. 55 min. 3 hr. 30 min. 3 hr. 45 min. 4 hr. 05 min. 5 hr. 45 min. 6 hr. 45 min. 350 2 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 05 min. 4 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 30 min. 6 hr. 25 min. 7 hr. 25 min. 250 2 hr. 25 min. 4 hr. 40 min. 4 hr. 47 min. 4 hr. 55 min. 7 hr. 05 min. 8 hr. 05 min. 100 6 hr. 00 min. 9 hr. 10 min. 12 hr. 30 min. 15 hr. 50 min. 20 hr. 00 min. 24 hr. 10 min.
TOTAL
POWER 1 STRING 1 STRING 1 STRING 1 STRING 1 STRING 1 STRING REQUIRED 33AH 55AH 65AH 79AH 92AH 105AH
(WATTS) @25C @25C @25C @25C @25C @25C
Note: Stated run times are approximate. Actual run times depend on load requirements, frequency of operation, and temperature.
Bypass Switch
Type 170
Traffic
Control
Cabinet
Bypass
Switch
Swing-out
Battery Tray
MP Series
UPS
PTS
Battery/UPS
Cabinets
Standard Features
♦ Battery backup for signalized intersections.
♦ Fits in all types of Traffic Cabinets or can be mounted in a Custom Enclosure or Electrical Service Pedestal.
♦ Low harmonic AC sinewave output.
♦ Fully programmable AC threshold voltages; ie, NEMA,Caltrans or Custom. ♦ Transient voltage protection from damaging line spikes. ♦ External connections are front panel accessible.
♦ RS232 and USB serial interface for easy programmability. ♦ Intelligent Buck and Boost Operation for brownout and surge protection. ♦ Battery Monitoring System (optional).
♦ Power conditioning insures reliable power.
♦ Back up power provided by sealed battery modules.
♦ Temperature-compensated charging maximizes battery life in harsh, outside environments.
♦ Noise suppression, FCC Class A
♦ Meets or exceeds Caltrans, TXDOT and GDOT UPS/BBS specifications. ♦ Multiple mounting configuations.
♦ UL/CSA Listed.
Three Modes of Backup Power are Available
Normal Operation
Normal Operation supporting full functions for intersections not exceeding module’s specified output.*
Flash operation
Red/Amber flash operations for intersections that exceed module’s specified output for Normal Operation.*
Normal/Flash Combo
Provides normal operation then reverts to flash after 2 hours or when 40% battery capacity is reached (factory default), thereby prolonging operating time.* MP Series UPS are fully programmable including duration, percentage, and dry contact assignment. * Total load cannot exceed unit’s maximum output for any operation.
Options
♦ Power Transfer Switch
♦ Manual Bypass Switch
♦ Generator Kit: bypass switch, receptacle w/cover
♦ Separate battery enclosures
♦ Battery heater mats
♦ Remote Battery Monitoring System
♦ Remote UPS Management Systems
♦ Ethernet Monitoring Software
www.myerspowerproducts.com
866-MY-MYERS
“Invest in the power of Myers.”
Output Ratings
MP2000 Output Power (VA) 2000
Active Output Power (watts) 1500
MP2000E Output Power (VA) 2000
Active Output Power (watts) 1500
Dimensions
MP2000 Width (inches/mm) 17 / 432
Height (inches/mm) 5.25 / 133
Depth (inches/mm) 11 / 279
Weight (lbs/kg) 46.2 / 21
MP2000E Width (inches/mm) 17 / 432
Height (inches/mm) 5.25 / 133
Depth (inches/mm) 11 / 279
Weight (lbs/kg) 46.2 / 21
PTS (Power Width (inches/mm) 4.75 / 121
Transfer Switch) Height (inches/mm) 4.6 / 117
Depth (inches/mm) 6.5 / 165
Weight (lbs/kg) 7 / 3
Battery Run Time
Battery run time and recharging depends on load requirements and battery configurations. Refer to Battery Options and Run Time Calculations for more details.
MP Series UPS systems are 48V, 4-String Battery systems. For custom configurations contact Myers Power Products.
General Specifications
Input/Output Voltage (VAC) nominal 120
Frequency (Hz) nominal 60
Input Current (A) maximum 20
Input Voltage Variation -23% to +17%
Voltage Waveform Sine
Typical Line Efficiency % 95-97
Typical Output Voltage <3%
Total Harmonic Distribution <3% THD
Max Charge Current 10 (ADC)
Max Transfer Time 60 (ms)
Audible Noise <32 at 1m (dBA)
Unit Operating Temp. -37°C to +74°C
Battery Operating Temp. -25°C to +74°C
Lightning / Surge Protection: Passes ANSI/IEEE C.62.41/C.62.45 Cat A & B 02152016
79-1000-1448-0
DESCRIPTION
Building on over 45 years of best-in-class
solutions, the OpticomTM Connected Vehicle
Platform (CVP) enables the next generation of
transit performance.
The modular and expandable Opticom CVP is
comprised of proven hardware, advanced software
and comprehensive services that enable transit
agency savings by improving efficiency.
APPLICATIONS
Transit Signal Priority (TSP)
Using the same powerful and precise algorithms
used in the Opticom GPS-based system, the
Opticom CVP supports a modular software
application capable of providing TSP. Opticom
CVP offers multiple modes of communication to
address obstruction or range requirements.
The Opticom CVP supports all variations of
Opticom TSP:
• distributed variants that use infrared,
cellular and/or GPS intersection
infrastructure
• centralized architecture, via cellular
connections back to a central command center
All variations reduce travel times by giving
the transit vehicle a green light at signalized
intersections.
Conditional priority
The Opticom TSP software application includes
configuration and conditional programming
capabilities. Transit managers can adjust system
operation based on time of day, day of week, or
specific events.
Relative priority
In the case of conflicting requests for priority,
vehicles and routes can be classified to allow the
more important vehicle to get the green first.
Advanced Schedule Management (ASM)
ASM provides agencies with the ability to
improve schedule and headway compliance
while minimizing impacts to everyday traffic flow.
Schedule adherence
Opticom ASM schedule compliance software can
be loaded onto the Opticom CVP, enabling the
referencing of schedule (GTFS) information for the
active route and run. This stored data is compared
against actual vehicle position and time points.
If the transit vehicle is lagging behind schedule,
the Opticom ASM software will signal the vehicle
unit to request TSP. Once schedule adherence is
achieved TSP requests will be suspended, allowing
everyday traffic to flow uninterrupted.
Headway management
When the ASM system is enabled for headway,
the separation of vehicles on the same route is
monitored. If the vehicles' time spacing (headway)
is below a predefined threshold for that route at that
time and day, then TSP is disabled for the trailing
bus. If the headway is greater than the predefined
threshold, then TSP is enabled for the trailing bus.
Real-time analytics
Advanced web-based analytics tools are
available for use with the Opticom CVP to provide
agencies with aggregate or detailed analysis of
performance, including travel time, dwell time,
schedule adherence and headway compliance.
Maintainability
Software and firmware can be updated
automatically or on-demand remotely,
whenever vehicles are connected via Wi-Fi or
a cellular modem.
Built to expand
The Opticom CVP is a powerful platform
capable of hosting multiple transit applications
to meet your specific agency’s needs.
A modular and expandable vehicle platform
for use with Opticom GPS technology
SOLUTIONS FOR:
Fire
EMS
Transit
Traffic
Law Enforcement
About GTT
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
(GTT), is the manufacturer of
Opticom priority control systems and
Canoga™ traffic sensing systems.
Modular and expandable, the
Opticom CVP is GTT’s most
advanced, software-based TSP
solution. The Opticom CVP builds
on GTT’s GPS-enabled technology
and adds powerful cloud-based
capabilities for more control and
management.
Connected Vehicle Platform
TM
TM
GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES
GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES
Opticom™ Connected Vehicle Platform
TYPICAL ARCHITECTURES
4000/400 radio system
A typical pairing is the 4000/400 radio system. With the TSP software installed, the system provides GPS-based TSP functionality, with priority requests being sent to Opticom GPS intersection equipment using the 2.4 GHz 400 radio. Software updates can be downloaded from a central database over a Wi-Fi network or cellular. Adding the ASM module enhances TSP to only provide priority when the bus is behind schedule or starting to bunch, thus minimizing interruptions to everyday traffic flow.
System status is uploaded via Wi-Fi or cellular connection to a central database and can be monitored from anywhere Internet is available. 4000/2100 radio system
Another common pairing is the 4000/2100 radio system, which provides traditional Opticom GPS-based TSP functionality. With the ASM application added, route schedule and headway information is downloaded from a central database via Wi-Fi or cellular connection to the Opticom CVP. In conjunction, vehicle location, heading and speed are compared to schedule data to determine priority requests, notifying the 2100 to request TSP only when vehicles are behind schedule or starting to bunch.
As with the 4000/400 radio pairing, the system’s status is uploaded via Wi-Fi or cellular to a central database and can be centrally monitored.
GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES www.GTT.com
Opticom™ Connected Vehicle Platform
Model Description Product Number
764 Multimode phase selector 76-1000-1054-0
7614 Multimode phase selector-cellular 76-1000-1286-0
768 Multimode auxiliary interface panel 76-1000-1059-0
3100 Opticom GPS intersection radio unit 76-1000-1189-0 1070 GPS installation cable 78-8125-0421-1
Intersection components
Model Description Product Number
4010 4010 universal vehicle computer kit 76-1000-1298-0 400 400 2.4 GHz radio and GPS kit 76-1000-1282-0
1050 1050 GPS/Radio antenna (included in 400 kit) 78-8118-6907-8 1058 1058 Wifi antenna (included in 4010 kit) 79-1000-1369-0 Vehicle components
Model Description Product Number
4210 Transit signal priority software 76-1000-1296-0
4270 Field-of-view transit signal priority software 76-1000-1317-0 4280 Advanced schedule management software 76-1000-1297-0 Management components
COMPONENTS
GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES www.GTT.com
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
7800 Third Street North
St. Paul, Minnesota 55128-5441
1-800-258-4610
651-789-7333
www.gtt.com
Global Traffic Technologies Canada, Inc.
157 Adelaide Street West
Suite 448
Toronto, ON M5H 4E7
Canada
1-800-258-4610
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
1210 Parkview
Reading RG7 4TY
United Kingdom
+44 (0) 7799 908916
Please recycle. Printed in U.S.A.© Global Traffic Technologies, LLC 2016. All rights reserved. *Third party brands are the property of their respective owners.
Opticom™ Connected Vehicle Platform
MANAGEMENT AND SERVICES
Managed Services
Managed services are the services needed to
keep the system up and running to achieve
optimal performance. Services include:
• Hosting
• Remote monitoring
• Performance tuning
• Updates and upgrades
• Repairs and replacements
• Reporting
• Help desk support
Services are provided by GTT’s client services
organization.
Central Management Software
Opticom CMS provides real-time data, so traffic
engineers can retrieve activity logs, diagnose
maintenance issues, upgrade firmware and
troubleshoot equipment. It reduces operating
costs, improves workflow and results in fewer
technician trips to the field.
Warranty
From design, to manufacturing, to service and
repair, every effort is made to deliver solutions
that far exceed the warranty period. For complete
warranty information visit www.gtt.com.
TM
TM
GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES
GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES
Building critical
traffic connectionssm
Opticom™ Priority Control System
opticom™ model 764 Multimode Phase Selector
Opticom™ SYSTEM COMPONENT FOR ENVIRONMENTS WITH INFRARED
AND GPS TECHNOLOGY
Description
The Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector is a plug-in, four-channel, dual-priority, multimode encoded signal device designed for use with both Opticom™ infrared system (IR) emitters and detectors and Opticom™ GPS radio/GPS intersection units and vehicle equipment. It can be installed directly into the input files of Type 170 traffic controllers equipped with priority phase selection software and in virtually any other traffic controller equipped with priority phase selection inputs and related software. Phase selectors are powered from AC mains or 24 VDC and contain their own internal power supply to support Opticom™ IR detectors and Opticom™ GPS radio/GPS units.
The Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector may be used in IR only applications, GPS only applications, or IR and GPS applications simultaneously.
The Opticom™ Model 760 Card Rack is required when input file space is not available. When used in GPS only mode, the Opticom™ Model 1040 Card Rack may also be used.
Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector recognizes and discriminates among three distinct Opticom™ IR emitter frequency rates via Opticom™ detectors: high priority, low priority and probe priority. Within each of these three frequency rates, the phase selectors further discriminate among 10 classes of vehicle identification codes, with 1,000 individual vehicle codes per class — 10,000 total per frequency rate. The Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector also recognizes three different priority levels transmitted by Opticom™ GPS vehicle equipment: high priority, low priority and probe priority. Within each of these three priority levels, the phase selectors further discriminate among 254 agency IDs, 15 classes of vehicle identification codes, with 10,000 individual vehicle codes per class — for more than 38 million total per priority level.
Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector internally records each system activation. Each entry contains:
• Intersection name
• Date and time of the activity
• Vehicle class code of the activating vehicle
• Activating vehicle’s ID number
• Agency ID (GPS only)
• Channel called
• Priority of the activity
• Final green signal indications displayed
at the end of the call
• Time spent in the final greens
• Duration of the activation
• If preempt has been requested and reason if not
• Turn signal status at the end of the call (GPS only)
• Entry, exit and average speed (GPS only)
• Relative priority level
• Conditional priority level
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
(GTT), formed in 2007 from
3M’s pioneering Intelligent
Transportation Systems business,
is the manufacturer of Opticom™
priority control systems and
Canoga™ traffic sensing systems.
Features
• IR only operation, GPS only operation, or simultaneous IR and GPS operation
• Four channels of detection
• Two auxiliary detectors per channel (IR)
• Records green signal displayed at end of preemption
• Compatible with encoded signal and non-encoded signal Opticom™ IR Emitters
• High and low priority as well as probe frequency discrimination • Conditional priority for Transit Signal Priority (TSP) (when used with compatible AVL and/or passenger counter) • “First-come, first-served” priority within each priority level • Priority-by-class setting via the interface software
• Priority-by-direction setting via the interface software • Direct installation into CA/NY Type 170 input files
• Automatic range setting using an encoded emitter (IR) • Call bridging for both IR and GPS calls including mixed mode • Low-priority output may be configured for first-come, first-served or all-channel active
• User-adjustable range setting up to 2,500 feet of operation • Compatible with most traffic controllers
• 10/100Mb Ethernet communication on the front panel
• USB 2.0 communication on the front panel
• RS232 communications front port, and rear backplane and Auxiliary Interface Panel
• User-selected communications baud rate of 1,200 to 230,400 bits per second
• Customizable ID code validation
• Flexible programming options for priority control parameters • Detailed current Opticom™ System parameter information • History log of most recent Opticom™ infrared and GPS system activities (10,000 entries)
• 30,000 frequency/class/vehicle code ID combinations (IR) • More than 38 million agency/class/vehicle code combinations (GPS) • Front panel switches and diagnostic indicators for testing • Accurate infrared signal recognition circuitry
• Precise output pulse
• Definitive call verification
• Regulated detector power supply (IR)
• Optically isolated outputs
• Two character display and keypad to enable diagnostics and test calls to each channel
• Display LED Indicators
- High- and low-priority test calls
- Reset to default parameters
- Range setting
• User-settable range setting by ETA and/or distance (GPS only) • Varied outputs depending on turn signal status of requesting vehicle (GPS only)
• IR detector inputs may be mapped to any channel.
• Diagnostic test
• Advanced built-in diagnostics and testing
• Tested to NEMA environmental and electrical test specifications Accessories
• Opticom™ On-site Interface software package
• Opticom™ Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel
• Opticom™ Model 755 Four-Channel Adapter Card (optional) • Opticom™ Model 760 Card Rack
Operating Parameters
• Four dual-priority and probe frequency channels
• “First-come, first-served” for vehicles with the same priority level (high or low)
• Priority override: always higher over lower
• Opticom™ GPS Radio/GPS Unit input
• Opticom™ Infrared System Detector input(s): one per channel on the card edge connector and two auxiliary per channel through the Opticom™ Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel
• Optional interface software for flexible programming options and call history
• LED indicators
- Status
- Radio (GPS mode)
- Link (GPS mode)
- High signal/call per channel
- Low signal/call per channel
- Two-digit status display
• Two character display and keypad to enable diagnostics and test calls to each channel
• Voltage: 89 to 135 VAC, 60 Hz at up to 500mA or 24 VDC at up to 1 Amp
• Temperature: -37°C to +74°C (-34.6°F to +165.2°F)
• Humidity: 5% to 95% relative
• CE certified
• NEMA TS-2 compliance
• FCC compliance
Physical Dimensions
Length: 7.0 in. (17.8 cm) x 8.2 in. (20.8 cm) including handle Width: 2.3 in. (5.8 cm)
Height: 4.5 in. (11.4 cm)
Weight: 0.60 lbs. (272 g)
For complete warranty information visit www.gtt.com.
Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector
Opticom™ SYSTEM COMPONENT FOR ENVIRONMENTS WITH INFRARED
AND GPS TECHNOLOGY
Building critical
traffic connectionssm
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
7800 Third Street North
St. Paul, Minnesota 55128-5441
1-800-258-4610
651-789-7333
www.gtt.com
Opticom and the GTT logo mark are trademarks of Global Traffic Technologies, LLC. Used under license in Canada. Please recycle. Printed in U.S.A. © Global Traffic Technologies, LLC 2013 All rights reserved. 79-1000-0524-0 (D)
Global Traffic Technologies Canada, Inc.
157 Adelaide Street West
Suite 448
Toronto, ON M5H 4E7
Canada
1-800-258-4610
Building critical
traffic connectionssm
Opticom™ PRIORITY CONTROL SYSTEM
Opticom™ GPS SYSTEM INTERSECTION EQUIPMENT
OPTICOM™ SYSTEM COMPONENTs FOR ENVIRONMENTS WITH GPS TECHNOLOGY Description
The Opticom™ GPS System assists authorized vehicles through signalized intersections by providing temporary right-of-way through the use of common traffic controller functions.
The Opticom™ GPS system consists of the following matched components:
Intersection Equipment
• Opticom™ Model 3100 GPS Radio Unit containing a GPS receiver with antenna and a 2.4 GHz spread spectrum transceiver with antenna
–OR–
Opticom™ Model 3101 GPS Radio Unit containing a GPS receiver and a 2.4 GHz spread spectrum transceiver, with Opticom™ Model 1050 GPS/Radio Antenna and Opticom™ Model 1072 GPS Cable Assembly • Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector
• Opticom™ Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel
• Opticom™ Model 1040 GPS Card Rack or Opticom™ Model 760 Card Rack or Opticom™ Model 770 Card Rack • Opticom™ Model 1070 GPS Installation Cable
Vehicle Equipment
• Opticom™ Model 2100 High Priority Radio/GPS Control Unit –OR–
Opticom™ Model 2101 Low Priority Radio/GPS Control Unit • Opticom™ Model 1050 GPS/Radio Antenna
• Opticom™ Model 2171 Vehicle Interface Cable
Opticom™ GPS system intersection equipment consists of the compact, weather resistant RF-energy-emitting Opticom™ Model 3100 GPS Radio Unit containing a GPS receiver with antenna and a 2.4 GHz spread spectrum transceiver with antenna.
The radio unit is connected to an Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector via an 11-conductor radio/GPS cable.
The Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector can be installed directly into a CA/NY Type 33X input file or most NEMA traffic controllers equipped with priority phase selection software, or into virtually any other traffic controller equipped with priority phase selection inputs and related software.
When input file space is not available, an Opticom™ Model 760 Card Rack is required. An external 120 VAC power source provides the power that is required to operate the Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector. The phase selector provides power to the radio unit.
The Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector processes the signal from the Opticom™ Model 3100 GPS Radio Unit and activates outputs, which are connected to the preemption inputs on the traffic controller. There are four channel outputs accessible on the rear connector of the Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector and up to 12 additional channel outputs on the Opticom™ Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel.
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
(GTT), formed in 2007 from
3M’s pioneering Intelligent
Transportation Systems business,
is the manufacturer of Opticom™
priority control systems and
Canoga™ traffic sensing systems.
Opticom™ GPS SYSTEM INTERSECTION EQUIPMENT
OPTICOM™ SYSTEM COMPONENTs FOR ENVIRONMENTS WITH GPS TECHNOLOGY Each channel output delivers a constant output for highpriority activation, and a pulsed output for low-priority activation. A high-priority signal received on a channel will override any low-priority activation. In certain modes of operation, outputs may be activated that are dependent on the state of the requesting vehicle’s turn signal. Another mode provides separate constant outputs for high priority and low priority. The use of an Opticom™ Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel is required to access these additional modes and outputs.
Opticom™ GPS System intersection equipment
has the following features:
• Four channels of detection
• Radio range of 2,500 feet
• User-settable range setting by ETA and/or distance
• Call bridging
• Precise preemption output pulse
• Optically isolated outputs
• Varied outputs depending on turn signal status of
requesting vehicle
• High and low priority as well as probe frequency
discrimination
• “First-come, first-served” priority within each priority level • Low-priority output may be configured for first-come, firstserved or all-channel active • Priority-by-class and priority-by direction setting via the interface software
• 10/100Mb Ethernet and USB 2.0 communication on the
front panel
• RS232 communications front port, rear backplane and
Auxiliary Interface Panel
• History log of most recent Opticom™ GPS system activities (10,000 entries)
• More than 38 million agency/class/vehicle code
combinations
• Customizable ID code validation
• Two character display, LEDs and keypad to enable
diagnostics and place test calls to each channel
• Flexible programming options for priority control parameters • Direct installation into CA/NY Type 33X input files
• Compatible with most traffic controllers
• Tested to NEMA environmental and electrical test
specifications
• Meets FCC part 15 Class A specifications
Physical Dimensions
Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector
Length: 7.0 in. (17.8 cm) x 8.2 in. (20.8 cm) including handle Width: 2.3 in. (5.8 cm)
Height: 4.5 in. (11.4 cm)
Weight: 0.60 lbs. (272 g)
Opticom™ Model 3100 GPS Radio Unit
Length: 9.0 in. (22.9 cm)
Width: 6.5 in. (16.5 cm)
Height: 6.0 in. (15.2 cm)
Weight: 1.8 lbs. (0.816 kg)
Opticom™ Model 3101 GPS Radio Unit
Length: 8.0 in. (20.3 cm)
Width: 4.5 in. (11.4 cm)
Height: 2.7 in. (6.9 cm)
Weight: 1.7 lbs. (0.771 kg)
Opticom™ Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel
Length: 7.25 in. (18.4 cm)
Width: 4.5 in. (11.4 cm)
Height: 1.0 in. (2.5 cm)
Weight with cable: 1.4 lbs. (635 g)
Cable: 12 ft (3.6 m)
Opticom™ Model 1040 GPS Card Rack/Opticom™
Model 760 Card Rack/Opticom™ Model 770 Card Rack
Length: 8.25 in. (21.0 cm)
Width: 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)
Height: 5.1 in. (12.9 cm)
Weight: 2.3 lbs. (1.043 kg)
Opticom™ Model 1050 GPS/Radio Antenna
Diameter: 2.85 in. (7.2 cm)
Height: 1.4 in. (3.5 cm)
Cable length: 15.0 ft. (4.6 m)
Weight with cables: 0.6 lbs. (0.30 kg)
Electrical
Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector
Voltage: 89 to 135 VAC, 60 Hz at up to 500mA or
24 VDC at up to 1 Amp
Environmental
Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector
Temperature: -37°C to +74°C (-34.6°F to +165.2°F)
Humidity: 5% to 95% relative
For complete warranty information visit www.gtt.com.
Building critical
traffic connectionssm
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
7800 Third Street North
St. Paul, Minnesota 55128-5441
1-800-258-4610
651-789-7333
www.gtt.com
Opticom and the GTT logo are trademarks of Global Traffic Technologies, LLC. Used under license in Canada. Please recycle. Printed in U.S.A. © Global Traffic Technologies, LLC 2013. All rights reserved. 75-0301-1343-7(D)
Global Traffic Technologies Canada, Inc.
157 Adelaide Street West
Suite 448
Toronto, ON M5H 4E7
Canada
1-800-258-4610
Description
Canoga™ 701 Microloop™ Sensors are a
matched component of the Canoga™ Traffic
Sensing System. These traffic sensors provide a
unique alternative to inductive loops when
connected to a suitably configured Canoga™
Traffic Monitoring Card or a Canoga™ C922 or
C924 Vehicle Detector.
The Canoga 701 Microloop is a transducer that
converts changes in the vertical component of
the earth’s magnetic field to changes in
inductance. Vehicles containing vertical
components of ferromagnetic material “focus”
the earth’s field, increasing the magnetic field
at the sensor when vehicles move over the
sensor. Changes in inductance can be sensed
by a Canoga traffic monitoring card or a
Canoga C922 or C924 vehicle detector suitably
configured for the sensor.
Single, double or triple Canoga 701 Microloop
sensors installed across a lane will replace a
typical 3-turn 6 x 6 foot (1.8 m x 1.8 m)
inductive loop.
The number of Canoga 701 Microloop sensors
required per lane is determined by lane width
and types of vehicles to be detected. As a
general rule, a single Canoga 701 Microloop
centered in a lane will detect most vehicles.
However, three Canoga 701 Microloop sensors
with 3-foot (91 cm) spacing are preferable for
detection of small motorcycles and bicycles.
Canoga 701 Microloop sensors should be
located vertically in 1-inch (2.5 cm) holes and
placed 18–24 inches (46–61 cm) below the
roadway surface. Up to four Canoga 701
Microloop sensors can be connected in a series.
Features
• Small size: Canoga 701 Microloop sensors fit
in a 1-inch (2.5 cm) diameter hole; lead-in
cable fits in 1/4-inch (0.63 cm) wide saw cut.
• Replaces inductive loops: Replaces inductive
loops for presence and passage detection.
• Less surface damage: Ideal for use in poor
pavement conditions, brick or cobblestone
surfaces, temporary construction zones, etc.
• Bridge detection applications: Can be installed
under most bridge decks. A magnetic field
analyzer should be used to ensure adequate
strength of the vertical component of the
earth’s magnetic field and to verify optimal
location of each Canoga 701 Microloop.
• Low inductance: Allows up to four Canoga 701
Microloop sensors to be connected in series
to one detection channel. Lead-in and homerun cables can be up to 2,500 feet (706 m). • Reliable: Buried Canoga 701 Microloop
sensors are unaffected by temperature
changes, water, snow, ice or pavement
deterioration. Lead-in cables can be installed
in deep saw cuts or prior to repavement.
Tough, flexible polyurethane jacketed lead-in
cable survives the rigors of poor or
broken pavement.
• Accurate: Closely spaced vehicles can be
resolved and adjacent lane vehicles rejected
to improve count accuracy.
Canoga™ 701 Microloop™ Sensor
October 2007
Canoga™ Traffic Sensing System
Canoga™ 701 Microloop™ Sensors
A Matched Component of the Canoga™ Traffic Sensing System Operating Parameters
• Earth’s Vertical Magnetic Field: 0.2–1.0 oersted.
• Inductance (Red to Green Wires): 20–25 mH
per probe plus 20 mH per 100 feet (30 m) of
lead-in cable.
• DC Resistance (Red to Green Wires): 0.5 ohms
per probe plus 3.2 ohms per 100 feet (30 m)
of cable.
• Transducer Gain (Sensitivity): Typically
3.5 mH per oersted at 0.4 oersted ambient
vertical field intensity.
• Sensitivity with Two (2) Sensors: 7.0 mH per
oersted at 4.0 oersted ambient vertical
field intensity.
• Optimal Crosslane Location and Depth:
Autos and Trucks: Single Canoga™ 701
Microloop™ Sensor in center lane 18–24 inches
(41–61 cm) deep.
Small Motorcycles and Bikes: Triple Canoga 701
Microloop sensors 3-foot (91 cm) separation
and 16–20 inches (40–50 cm) deep.
• Standard Canoga 701 Microloop Sets: Available
in single, double or triple sets with standard
separation and lead-in cable.
• Home-run Cable: Canoga™ 30003 Home-run
Cable is used to connect lead-in cable to the
cabinet. The combined length of Canoga
30003 and lead-in cable may be as long as
2,500 feet (762 m).
• Maximum Inductance per Channel with a
Canoga™ Traffic Monitoring Card or Canoga™
C922 or C924 Vehicle Detector: 400 mH total.
• Microloop Peak-to-Peak Voltage: A traffic
monitoring card or Canoga™ C900 Series
Vehicle Detector must provide .25–1.0 voltsp-p
across each sensor.
Environmental
• Temperature: -35° F to +165° F (-37° C to +74° C).
• Relative Humidity: 100% (including submersion in
solutions of chemicals typical of roadway runoff).
Wiring
Up to four Canoga 701 Microloop sensors
can be wired in a series to accommodate
different applications. Two independent sets
can be connected to a single Canoga 30003.
For reliable operation, all splices must be
soldered, insulated and waterproofed. See
installation instructions for detailed
wiring instructions.
Physical Characteristics
• Sensor: Cylindrical, 0.88 inch (2.2 cm) dia.
x 3.63 inches (9.2 cm) long.
• Cable: Polyurethane-jacketed, polypropylene
insulated AWG #22 conductors. Overall
diameter 0.19 inches (0.48 cm).
• Color: Gray sensor body, black sensor cable.
Related Products or Accessories
Canoga™ 942 and 944 Traffic Monitoring Cards
for monitoring vehicle speeds, count and
occupancy, and for classification of vehicle
speeds and lengths.
Canoga™ C922 and C924 Vehicle Detectors for
detection of vehicle presence and for traffic
count applications.
Canoga™ 30003 Home-run Cable for home-runs
up to 2,500 feet (762 cm).
3M™ Scotchcast™ 3832 Buried Service Wire Splice
Installation Kit for splicing the lead-in cable with the home-run cable. This wire splice installation kit
ensures a reliable connection in the environments
encountered by the Canoga 701 Microloop.
Important Notice to Purchaser:
EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS
DOCUMENT, GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES (GTT) MAKES
NO OTHER WARRANTIES AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY AS TO
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE.
GTT will, at its sole option, repair, replace or refund the purchase price of Canoga™ Traffic Sensing System components or Canoga™ Vehicle Detectors described herein found to be defective in materials or manufacture within seven (7) years from the date of shipment from GTT. This warranty shall not apply to Canoga traffic sensing system components or Canoga vehicle detectors which have been (1) repaired or modified by persons not authorized by GTT; (2) subjected to misuse, neglect or accident; (3) damaged by extreme atmospheric or weather conditions; or (4) subjected to events or use outside the normal or anticipated course.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY
(INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, PERSONAL INJURY),
DEATH, LOSS, OR DAMAGE (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, PROPERTY DAMAGE), WHETHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE, REPAIR OR FAILURE TO REPAIR, ANY GTT PRODUCT,
REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ASSERTED. THE
REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS DOCUMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE.
Global Traffic Technologies Canada, Inc.
157 Adelaide Street West
Suite 448
Toronto, ON M5H 4E7
Canada
1-800-258-4610
Canoga and Microloop are trademarks of Global
Traffic Technologies, LLC.
3M and Scotchcast are trademarks of 3M.
Used under license in Canada.
Please recycle. Printed in U.S.A.
© Global Traffic Technologies, LLC 2007
All rights reserved.
75-0301-3688-3 (A)
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
7800 Third Street North
St. Paul, Minnesota 55128-5441
1-800-258-4610
651-789-7333
www.gtt.com
www.emtracsystems.com
Transit Signal Priority (TSP)
System
About EMTRAC
The EMTRAC system utilizes reliable
GPS technology and secure frequencyhopping spread spectrum radio to enable mass transit vehicles to request priority
through signalized intersections.
Vehicles with the EMTRAC system
transmit a priority request to equipped
intersections when passing through
detection zones. The traffic cabinet at the
intersection contains an EMTRAC Priority
Detector, which relays the priority request
call to the traffic controller.
EMTRAC is completely automatic and
requires no driver interaction. In addition,
EMTRAC can be configured to allow
priority control based on time of day,
route-schedule adherence, passenger
load, direction traveled, or other factors.
Benefits of EMTRAC Priority Control
Municipalities and transit agencies have
reported the following benefits using the
EMTRAC system:
• Santa Clara, California: Valley
Transportation Authority buses receiving
signal priority traveled 18.4 percent
faster than those without priority.
Further, buses receiving priority using
the EMTRAC system traveled 23 percent
faster than those without priority.
• Washington DC: Bus journey times
decreased by an average of 20 to 22
percent.
• Brampton, Ontario: Currently installing
the first adaptive ETA signal priority
system in North America. This system will
not interfere with signal coordination. Vehicle Computer Unit & GPS/UHF Antenna
www.emtracsystems.com
Benefits of EMTRAC
• Precise control of prioritydetection approach zones using EMTRAC system software.
• GPS-based system uses latest
technology to ensure position
accuracy and reliability.
• Frequency-hopping spread
spectrum radio signal has
superior range and utilizes AES
encryption for security.
• Ability to request priority
control based on any number of
predetermined factors.
• Ability to custom tailor the
system to meet the individual
needs of each specific area in
the city.
EMTRAC has also proven successful
in emergency vehicle environments.
Vehicle and Intersection Components
The main vehicle components of the EMTRAC system
include:
• Vehicle Computer Unit: This compact electronics
enclosure is easily concealed behind interior panels.
• Combo GPS/UHF Antenna: This compact antenna
easily mounts on the top of the vehicle.
The main intersection components include:
• Priority Detector: This unit is available in either a rack-mount version (for Model 170 controllers) or a
shelf-mount version (for NEMA controllers).
• Omni-Directional Antenna: This antenna mounts
on a traffic pole (or traffic cabinet) at each equipped intersection.
Rack or Shelf-Mount
Priority Detector
Description
The Opticom™ 700 Series Detectors transform
the optical energy detected from an
approaching, vehicle-mounted Opticom™
Emitter to an electrical signal. The electrical
signal is transmitted along a cable to the
Opticom™ Phase Selector or Opticom™
Discriminator for processing.
Opticom 700 series detectors are mounted at
or near the intersection that permits a direct,
unobstructed line-of-sight to vehicle
approaches. Opticom detectors may be
mounted on span wire, mast arm or other
appropriate structures.
Opticom™ Models 711, 721 and 722 Detectors
offer significant advances and flexibility for
specific intersection applications. The
Opticom detectors are designed for common
applications in three configurations: one
direction—the single channel Opticom
model 711; the single channel, dual detection
Opticom model 721; and two direction, two
output detection—the dual channel Opticom
model 722. All Opticom 700 series detectors
greatly reduce installation and life cycle costs
through their modular design, adjustable
tubes, and compatibility with existing
Opticom™ Infrared System intersection and
vehicle equipment.
Features
• Advanced electrical transient immunity
• Modular design
• Adjustable turret configuration:
accommodates skewed approaches
• Lightweight, durable, high-impact
polycarbonate enclosure
• Simplified installation: span wire or
mast arm
• Gray door identification of Opticom
model 722
Opticom™ Models 722, 721 (back) and 711 Detectors
October 2007
Opticom™ Infrared System
Opticom™ Models 711, 721 and 722 Detectors
Opticom™ Infrared System Matched Component Products
Accessories
• Opticom™ Span Wire Clamp
• Opticom™ Model 138 Detector Cable
Operating Parameters
• Reception Range: 200 ft. (60 m) adjustable up
to 2,500 ft. (760 m)
• Electrical: 24 to 28 VDC, 50 MA minimum
• Temperature Range: -30º F (-34º C) to 165º F
(74º C)
• Humidity: 5% to 95% relative
Physical Dimensions
Opticom™ Model 711 Detector
Length: 12.0 in. (30.5 cm)
Width: 4.75 in. (12.1 cm)
Height: 5.63 in. (14.3 cm)
Weight: 0.88 lbs. (400 g)
Opticom™ Models 721 and 722 Detectors
Length: 12.0 in. (30.5 cm)
Width: 4.75 in. (12.1 cm)
Height: 7.13 in. (18.1 cm)
Weight: 1.12 Ibs. (508 g)
Opticom™ Span Wire Clamp Opticom™ Model
138 Detector Cable
Global Traffic Technologies Canada, Inc.
157 Adelaide Street West
Suite 448
Toronto, ON M5H 4E7
Canada
1-800-258-4610
Opticom is a trademark of Global Traffic
Technologies, LLC.
Used under license in Canada.
Please recycle. Printed in U.S.A.
© Global Traffic Technologies, LLC 2007
All rights reserved.
75-0500-1682-5 (A)
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
7800 Third Street North
St. Paul, Minnesota 55128-5441
1-800-258-4610
651-789-7333
www.gtt.com
Important Notice to Purchaser:
EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS DOCUMENT, GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES (GTT) MAKES
NO OTHER WARRANTIES AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY AS TO MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE.
GTT will, at its sole option, repair, replace or refund any amounts paid for any Opticom™ Infrared System component found to be defective in materials or manufacture within five (5) years from the date of shipment from GTT. See “Warranty and Extended Coverage” for details and limitations of the coverage plan. GTT will provide a functioning replacement component at a standard charge per unit for an additional five (5) years.
GTT warrants future system operability coverage as described herein. The warranties set forth in this document shall not apply to (A) incandescent lamps (confirmation lights) or (B) any Opticom infrared system components which have been (1) repaired or modified by persons not authorized by GTT; (2) subjected to incorrect installation, misuse, neglect or accident; (3) damaged by extreme atmospheric or weather-related conditions; or (4) subjected to events or use outside the normal or anticipated course.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, PERSONAL INJURY), DEATH,
LOSS, OR DAMAGE (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, PROPERTY DAMAGE), WHETHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE, REPAIR OR FAILURE TO REPAIR, ANY GTT PRODUCT, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ASSERTED. THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS DOCUMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE.
Sale and use of the Opticom infrared system is expressly restricted to authorized agencies of government customers, within their specific jurisdictions. However, because the infrared signal generated by the Opticom infrared system is not exclusive, GTT does not warrant exclusive activation by purchaser. Authorized users who desire to use or coordinate use of the Opticom infrared system with that of other jurisdictions must first obtain the prior written approval of each authorized user in the jurisdiction where use is sought.
Building critical
traffic connectionssm
Opticom™ PRIORITY CONTROL SYSTEM
Opticom™ GPS SYSTEM INTERSECTION EQUIPMENT
OPTICOM™ SYSTEM COMPONENTs FOR ENVIRONMENTS WITH GPS TECHNOLOGY Description
The Opticom™ GPS System assists authorized vehicles through signalized intersections by providing temporary right-of-way through the use of common traffic controller functions.
The Opticom™ GPS system consists of the following matched components:
Intersection Equipment
• Opticom™ Model 3100 GPS Radio Unit containing a GPS receiver with antenna and a 2.4 GHz spread spectrum transceiver with antenna
–OR–
Opticom™ Model 3101 GPS Radio Unit containing a GPS receiver and a 2.4 GHz spread spectrum transceiver, with Opticom™ Model 1050 GPS/Radio Antenna and Opticom™ Model 1072 GPS Cable Assembly • Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector
• Opticom™ Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel
• Opticom™ Model 1040 GPS Card Rack or Opticom™ Model 760 Card Rack or Opticom™ Model 770 Card Rack • Opticom™ Model 1070 GPS Installation Cable
Vehicle Equipment
• Opticom™ Model 2100 High Priority Radio/GPS Control Unit –OR–
Opticom™ Model 2101 Low Priority Radio/GPS Control Unit • Opticom™ Model 1050 GPS/Radio Antenna
• Opticom™ Model 2171 Vehicle Interface Cable
Opticom™ GPS system intersection equipment consists of the compact, weather resistant RF-energy-emitting Opticom™ Model 3100 GPS Radio Unit containing a GPS receiver with antenna and a 2.4 GHz spread spectrum transceiver with antenna.
The radio unit is connected to an Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector via an 11-conductor radio/GPS cable.
The Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector can be installed directly into a CA/NY Type 33X input file or most NEMA traffic controllers equipped with priority phase selection software, or into virtually any other traffic controller equipped with priority phase selection inputs and related software.
When input file space is not available, an Opticom™ Model 760 Card Rack is required. An external 120 VAC power source provides the power that is required to operate the Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector. The phase selector provides power to the radio unit.
The Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector processes the signal from the Opticom™ Model 3100 GPS Radio Unit and activates outputs, which are connected to the preemption inputs on the traffic controller. There are four channel outputs accessible on the rear connector of the Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector and up to 12 additional channel outputs on the Opticom™ Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel.
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
(GTT), formed in 2007 from
3M’s pioneering Intelligent
Transportation Systems business,
is the manufacturer of Opticom™
priority control systems and
Canoga™ traffic sensing systems.
Opticom™ GPS SYSTEM INTERSECTION EQUIPMENT
OPTICOM™ SYSTEM COMPONENTs FOR ENVIRONMENTS WITH GPS TECHNOLOGY Each channel output delivers a constant output for highpriority activation, and a pulsed output for low-priority activation. A high-priority signal received on a channel will override any low-priority activation. In certain modes of operation, outputs may be activated that are dependent on the state of the requesting vehicle’s turn signal. Another mode provides separate constant outputs for high priority and low priority. The use of an Opticom™ Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel is required to access these additional modes and outputs.
Opticom™ GPS System intersection equipment
has the following features:
• Four channels of detection
• Radio range of 2,500 feet
• User-settable range setting by ETA and/or distance
• Call bridging
• Precise preemption output pulse
• Optically isolated outputs
• Varied outputs depending on turn signal status of
requesting vehicle
• High and low priority as well as probe frequency
discrimination
• “First-come, first-served” priority within each priority level • Low-priority output may be configured for first-come, firstserved or all-channel active • Priority-by-class and priority-by direction setting via the interface software
• 10/100Mb Ethernet and USB 2.0 communication on the
front panel
• RS232 communications front port, rear backplane and
Auxiliary Interface Panel
• History log of most recent Opticom™ GPS system activities (10,000 entries)
• More than 38 million agency/class/vehicle code
combinations
• Customizable ID code validation
• Two character display, LEDs and keypad to enable
diagnostics and place test calls to each channel
• Flexible programming options for priority control parameters • Direct installation into CA/NY Type 33X input files
• Compatible with most traffic controllers
• Tested to NEMA environmental and electrical test
specifications
• Meets FCC part 15 Class A specifications
Physical Dimensions
Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector
Length: 7.0 in. (17.8 cm) x 8.2 in. (20.8 cm) including handle Width: 2.3 in. (5.8 cm)
Height: 4.5 in. (11.4 cm)
Weight: 0.60 lbs. (272 g)
Opticom™ Model 3100 GPS Radio Unit
Length: 9.0 in. (22.9 cm)
Width: 6.5 in. (16.5 cm)
Height: 6.0 in. (15.2 cm)
Weight: 1.8 lbs. (0.816 kg)
Opticom™ Model 3101 GPS Radio Unit
Length: 8.0 in. (20.3 cm)
Width: 4.5 in. (11.4 cm)
Height: 2.7 in. (6.9 cm)
Weight: 1.7 lbs. (0.771 kg)
Opticom™ Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel
Length: 7.25 in. (18.4 cm)
Width: 4.5 in. (11.4 cm)
Height: 1.0 in. (2.5 cm)
Weight with cable: 1.4 lbs. (635 g)
Cable: 12 ft (3.6 m)
Opticom™ Model 1040 GPS Card Rack/Opticom™
Model 760 Card Rack/Opticom™ Model 770 Card Rack
Length: 8.25 in. (21.0 cm)
Width: 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)
Height: 5.1 in. (12.9 cm)
Weight: 2.3 lbs. (1.043 kg)
Opticom™ Model 1050 GPS/Radio Antenna
Diameter: 2.85 in. (7.2 cm)
Height: 1.4 in. (3.5 cm)
Cable length: 15.0 ft. (4.6 m)
Weight with cables: 0.6 lbs. (0.30 kg)
Electrical
Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector
Voltage: 89 to 135 VAC, 60 Hz at up to 500mA or
24 VDC at up to 1 Amp
Environmental
Opticom™ Model 764 Multimode Phase Selector
Temperature: -37°C to +74°C (-34.6°F to +165.2°F)
Humidity: 5% to 95% relative
For complete warranty information visit www.gtt.com.
Building critical
traffic connectionssm
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
7800 Third Street North
St. Paul, Minnesota 55128-5441
1-800-258-4610
651-789-7333
www.gtt.com
Opticom and the GTT logo are trademarks of Global Traffic Technologies, LLC. Used under license in Canada. Please recycle. Printed in U.S.A. © Global Traffic Technologies, LLC 2013. All rights reserved. 75-0301-1343-7(D)
Global Traffic Technologies Canada, Inc.
157 Adelaide Street West
Suite 448
Toronto, ON M5H 4E7
Canada
1-800-258-4610
79-1000-1473-0
OVERVIEW
Using the latest LTE cellular technology, the
model 7614 multimode phase selector gives
traffic managers the ability to monitor and
manage intersections from their desk – allowing
instant access to critical data and status. The
built-in Ethernet port permits straightforward
connectivity to any network enabled equipment
in the cabinet. The 7614 is also backwards
compatible with existing Opticom Infrared (IR),
GPS and Multimode installations, allowing for
easy upgrades.
DESCRIPTION
The 7614 is a plug-in, four-channel, dualpriority, multimode encoded signal device with cellular network capability.
The 7614 phase selector may be used
in Opticom IR applications, Opticom GPS
applications, NTCIP applications or a
simultaneous mixture of all.
It can be installed directly into the input rack
of NEMA TS2 and Type 170/2070 traffic
controllers equipped with priority phase
selection software and in virtually any other
traffic controller equipped with priority phase
selection inputs and related software.
Phase selectors are powered from AC mains or
24 VDC and contain their own internal power
supply to support Opticom IR detectors and
Opticom radio/GPS units.
The Opticom model 760 card rack is required
when input space is not available. When used in
GPS only mode, the Opticom model 1040 card
rack may also be used.
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Intersection to Opticom CMS
Connect Opticom Central Management
Software (CMS) to intersections to enable daily
access to vehicle and intersection logs, monitor
system performance and optimize operations. If
required, system updates can be done remotely
using Opticom CMS.
Vehicle to intersection
Receive and process priority requests
generated by the vehicle and sent via cellular
communication to the intersection.
Cabinet to central management
A 10/100Mb Ethernet port on the front panel
allows network access to other cabinet
equipment.
Upgrade existing Opticom IR and GPS
The model 7614 is compliant with NEMA
requirements for easy plug and play capability
with standard cabinets.
OPERATIONS
Cellular connectivity
The model 7614 phase selector is equipped
with a 4G LTE cellular modem providing wireless
network connectivity. With wireless connectivity,
transportation managers can more quickly
and easily connect traffic infrastructure to a
central management center, without expensive
investments in traditional wired networks.
Cellular provisioning
In order to use the cellular capabilities of the
model 7614 phase selector, the modem must
be provisioned with a mobile network carrier.
The model 7614 phase selector is compatible
Building critical
traffic connectionssm
GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES
With cellular-based network connectivity for use
with Opticom IR, GPS and Multimode systems
SOLUTIONS FOR:
Fire
Law Enforcement
EMS
Transit
Traffic
About GTT
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
(GTT), formed in 2007 from
3M’s pioneering Intelligent
Transportation Systems business,
is the manufacturer of Opticom™
priority control systems and
Canoga™ traffic sensing systems.
The Opticom 7614 phase selector
connects intersection infrastructure
using the latest cellular-based
technology.
7614 multimode phase selector
Fire
Law Enforcement
EMS
Opticom™ 7614 multimode phase selector
with most cellular network providers and GTT offers multiple options to manage cellular provisioning.
IR operation
The 7614 phase selector recognizes and discriminates among three distinct Opticom IR emitter frequency rates received via Opticom detectors: 1) high priority, 2) low priority and 3) probe priority.
Within each of these three frequency rates, the phase selectors further discriminate among 10 classes of vehicle identification codes, with 1,000 individual vehicle codes per class — 10,000 total per frequency rate.
GPS operation
The 7614 phase selector also recognizes three priority levels transmitted by Opticom GPS vehicle equipment via radio or cellular: 1) high priority, 2) low priority and 3) probe priority.
Within each of these three priority levels, the phase selectors further discriminate among 254 agency IDs and 15 classes of vehicle identification codes, with 10,000 individual vehicle codes per class — for more than 38 million total IDs per priority level.
NTCIP operation
When interfaced to third-party NTCIP compliant equipment using WiFi, cellular or wired connections, the 7614 phase selector recognizes and discriminates among ten class types; two of which − TSP priority and probe priority − are reserved.
Within each of these class levels, the phase selectors further discriminate among 255 request IDs, 130,000 unique vehicle identification codes and 10 levels of relative priority for each class level.
The model 7614 phase selector internally records each system activation, with each entry containing:
• Intersection name
• Date and time of the activity
• Vehicle class code of the activating vehicle
(not used in NTCIP mode)
• Activating vehicle’s ID number
• Agency ID (GPS only)
• Channel called
• Requested intersection entry and exit phases
• Priority of the activity (class level of the request
in NTCIP mode)
• Final green signal indications displayed at the
end of the call, using optional auxiliary interface panel • Time spent in the final greens, using optional auxiliary interface panel
• Duration of the activation
• If preempt has been requested and the reason if not
• Turn signal status at the end of the call (GPS only)
• Entry, exit and average speed (GPS only)
• Relative priority level (relative lateness level of the requester in NTCIP mode)
• Conditional priority level
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
7800 Third Street North
St. Paul, Minnesota 55128-5441
1-800-258-4610
651-789-7333
www.gtt.com
Global Traffic Technologies Canada, Inc.
157 Adelaide Street West
Suite 448
Toronto, ON M5H 4E7
Canada
1-800-258-4610
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
1210 Parkview
Reading RG7 4TY
United Kingdom
+44 (0) 7799 908916
Opticom™ 7614 multimode phase selector
Building critical
traffic connectionssm
GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES
For complete warranty information visit www.gtt.com.
Please recycle. Printed in U.S.A.© Global Traffic Technologies, LLC 2016. All rights reserved.
FEATURES
• 4G cellular network connectivity
• Backward compatible with existing Opticom IR and GPS
installations
• 3rd party NTCIP only, Opticom IR only, Opticom GPS only, or simultaneous NTCIP, Opticom IR and Opticom GPS operation • Four channels of detection
• Two auxiliary detectors per channel (IR)
• Records green signal displayed at end of preemption
• Compatible with encoded signal and non-encoded signal emitters (IR)
• High and low priority, as well as probe frequency discrimination • Conditional priority for Transit Signal Priority (TSP) (when used with compatible AVL and/or passenger counter) • “First-come, first-served” priority within each priority level • Priority-by-class setting via the interface software
• Priority-by-direction setting via the interface software • Direct installation into CA/NY Type 170 input files
• Automatic range setting, using an encoded emitter (IR) • Call bridging for both IR and GPS calls including mixed mode • Low-priority output may be configured for first-come, first-served or all-channel active
• User-adjustable range setting up to 2,500 feet of operation • Compatible with most traffic controllers
• 10/100Mb Ethernet communication on the front panel
• RS232 communications front port and rear backplane and auxiliary interface panel
• User-selected communications baud rate of 1,200 to 230,400 bits per second
• Customizable ID code validation
• Flexible programming options for priority control parameters • Detailed current system parameter information
• History log of most recent 3rd party NTCIP, Opticom IR and GPS system activities (10,000 entries)
• 30,000 frequency/class/vehicle code ID combinations (IR) • More than 38 million agency/class/vehicle code combinations (GPS) • 260,000 priority/vehicle code ID combinations (NTCIP) • Front panel switches and diagnostic indicators for testing • Accurate infrared signal recognition circuitry
• Precise output pulse
• Definitive call verification
• Regulated detector power supply (IR)
• Optically isolated outputs
• Two character display and keypad to enable diagnostics and test calls to each channel
• Display LED indicators
- High- and low-priority test calls
- Reset to default parameters
- Range setting
• User-settable range setting by ETA and/or distance
(NTCIP/Opticom GPS only)
• Varied outputs, depending on turn signal status of requesting vehicle (GPS only)
• IR detector inputs may be mapped to any channel
• Diagnostic test
• Advanced built-in diagnostics and testing
• Tested to NEMA environmental and electrical test specifications
ACCESSORIES
• Opticom on-site interface software package
• Opticom model 768 auxiliary interface panel (AIP)
• Opticom model 755 four-channel adapter card (optional) • Opticom model 760 card rack
OPERATING PARAMETERS
• Four dual-priority and probe frequency channels
• Priority override: always higher over lower
• Opticom GPS radio/GPS unit input
• Opticom infrared system detector: one input per channel on the card edge connector and two auxiliary inputs per channel through the Opticom model 768 auxiliary interface panel
• Optional interface software for flexible programming options and call history
• LED indicators
- Status
- Radio (GPS mode)
- Link (GPS mode)
- High signal/call per channel
- Low signal/call per channel
- Two-digit status display
• Voltage: 89 to 135 VAC, 60 Hz at up to 500mA or 24 VDC at up to 1 Amp
• Temperature: -37°C to +74°C (-34.6°F to +165.2°F)
• Humidity: 5% to 95% relative
• NEMA TS-2 compliance
• FCC compliance
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
Length: 7.0 in. (17.8 cm) x 8.2 in. (20.8 cm), including handle Width: 2.3 in. (5.8 cm)
Height: 4.5 in. (11.4 cm)
Weight: 0.85 lbs. (385 g)
Manage priority control systems — from your desktop
(CMS)
Building critical
traffic connectionssm
GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES
Monitor, manage and maintain your Opticom
™ priority control
systems more efficiently and make more informed traffic flow decisions — anywhere, anytime.
Opticom™ Central Management Software (CMS) provides real-time data, so traffic engineers can retrieve activity logs, diagnose maintenance issues, upgrade firmware and troubleshoot equipment. It reduces operating costs, improves workflow and results in fewer technician trips to the field.
POWERFUL
data,
smarter
decisions
MONITOR
activity
MAINTAIN
system efficiency
MANAGE
intersections
Update firmware remotely
Access inventory and asset
management reports
Configure phase selectors remotely
Track intersection activity in real time Generate maintenance reports Receive automated maintenance alerts
Remote, real-time performace
Streamline maintenance, reduce costs
smarter, faster and more affordable
priority control
Perform critical maintenance tasks remotely and reduce operating costs Be the first to know when maintenance is required
Manage centrally to reduce technician trips to the field Diagnose equipment quickly to make more informed traffic decisions Protect system integrity with secure, authorized reporting tools Schedule Transit Signal Priority (TSP) activation to improve service levels Take advantage of automated controls to leverage available resources Building critical
traffic connectionssm
GLOBAL TRAFFIC TECHNOLOGIES
Changing the way cities move
For more information:
Visit: www.gtt.com/contact
Call: 800.258.4610
Global Traffic Technologies, LLC
7800 Third Street N
St. Paul, MN 55128-5441
1-800-258-4610
651-789-7333
www.gtt.com
Global Traffic Technologies Canada, Inc.
157 Adelaide Street West
Suite 448
Toronto, ON M5H 4E7
Canada
1-800-258-4610
Opticom and the GTT logo are trademarks of Global Traffic Technologies, LLC. Used under license in Canada. Please recycle. Printed in USA. © Global Traffic Technologies, LLC 2013. All rights reserved. 79-1000-0267-0 (D) GTT empowers cities and helps them solve their most critical traffic problems. With innovative technologies like Opticom™ Central Management Software (CMS), you can be better informed, better-equipped and more in control.
First responders can reach emergency scenes more quickly and more safely. Transit systems can run more efficiently and more profitably. And traffic engineers can readily access new information that helps them minimize traffic flow disruptions.
GTT solves problems for cities of all sizes, from towns of thousands to megacities of millions.
We’re ready to help you, too.
www.emtracsystems.com
Emergency Vehicle
Priority System
About EMTRAC
The EMTRAC system utilizes reliable GPS
technology and secure frequency-hopping
spread spectrum radio to enable emergency
vehicles to request priority through signalized
intersections.
Vehicles with the EMTRAC system transmit a
priority request to equipped intersections when
passing through detection zones. The traffic
cabinet at the intersection contains an EMTRAC
Priority Detector, which relays the priority
request call to the traffic controller.
EMTRAC is completely automatic and requires
no driver interaction. In addition, the EMTRAC
system software enables agencies to generate
detailed reports of priority control events,
intersection data, and other helpful information.
Benefits of EMTRAC Priority Control
Studies on the impact of emergency
vehicle priority control have discovered the
following results:
• Sunnyvale, California: After installing the
EMTRAC system, the average emergency
vehicle travel time decreased 20 percent
in one fire district and 25 percent in
another.
• Coquitlam, British Columbia:
Emergency vehicle response times
decreased by 20 to 25 percent.
• Novato, California: After installing the
EMTRAC system on all fire engines and
ambulances, response times improved
45 percent.
Coquitlam Fire & Rescue using the EMTRAC system,
Coquitlam, British Columbia.
www.emtracsystems.com
Benefits of EMTRAC
• Precise control of prioritydetection approach zones using EMTRAC system software.
• GPS-based system uses latest
technology to ensure position
accuracy and reliability.
• Frequency-hopping spread
spectrum radio signal has
superior range and utilizes AES
encryption for security.
• Priority control requests can be
custom tailored to allow different
responses to each vehicle.
• Ability to custom tailor the
system to meet the individual
needs of each specific area in the
city.
The EMTRAC system has also proven
successful in mass transit environments.
Vehicle and Intersection Components
The main vehicle components of the EMTRAC system
include:
• Vehicle Computer Unit: This compact electronics
enclosure is easily concealed behind interior panels.
• Combo GPS/UHF Antenna: This compact antenna
easily mounts on the top of the vehicle.
The main intersection components include:
• Priority Detector: This unit is available in either a rack-mount version (for Model 170 controllers) or a
shelf-mount version (for NEMA controllers).
• Omni-Directional Antenna: This antenna mounts
on a traffic pole (or traffic cabinet) at each equipped intersection.
Vehicle Computer Unit
& Antenna
Rack or
Shelf-Mount
Priority Detector
ANALYZE
GATHER
COMMUNICATE
The CONNECT:ITS System from MH Corbin is engineered to
be a simple to use, scalable and low power advanced roadside information system. Using data from both MH Corbin and popular third party sensors, algorithms compute changing roadway conditions in real time. Data is then sorted and distributed to your existing messaging network of HAR systems, dynamic message signs and flashing beacon systems. Additional outputs can also be used to send data to in-vehicle warning systems via DSRC and or CV2X.
The CONNECT:ITS System is the right tool to communicate advanced warnings in real time. Potential applications for the CONNECT:ITS include but are not limited to: bridge deck icing, low visibility, curve warning, over height vehicle detection and wrong way detection.
The CONNECT:ITS System can also be scaled up or down for a customized solution based on specific application needs. • Roadside decision making
• Completely customizable
• More cost effective than bigger systems
• Handles environmental, traffic and
pavement data
• Decision support system utilizing
python scripting
• Communication via DSRC and/or CV2X
• NTCIP Compliant
• NEMA TS-2 2016
• NEMA TS-2 2003 Compliant for BIU Call
Data over SDLC
Quick Facts
MHCORBIN.COM
Speed
Detection
Vehicle
Data
High
Winds
Pavement
Conditions
Low
Visibility
V2I
Communication
Text &
Email Alerts
Highway
Advisory Radio
Dynamic
Message Signs
Flashing
Beacons
CONNECT:ITS SYSTEM
MH CORBIN | HIGHWAY INFORMATION SYSTEMS
CONNECT:ITS
All-in-one transportationmanagement
alert system.
Computing
PROCESSOR
Intel
MEMORY
4GB minimum
STORAGE
16GB minimum
OPERATING SYSTEM
Linux
TESTING
NEMA TS-2 2016
CONNECT:ITS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONNECT:ITS CAPABILITIES
SENSOR INPUT OPTIONS
• Radar based vehicle detectors
• Non-Invasive pavement sensor
• Precipitation/Visibility sensors
• VX21 wireless pavement sensor
• All-in-one weather sensors
• Speed Sensors
• CCTV with Analytics
DESTINATIONS
• Highway Advisory Radio
• Dynamic Message Signs
• Variable Speed Limit Signs
• Email/Text Alerts
• In-vehicle alerts via DSRC
• Traffic Management Centers/ ATMS
• Traffic Signal Controller
Physical
DIMENSIONS
6 x 5 x 3 in
MOUNTING
Din Rail or Shelf
WEIGHT
1.6 LBS
OPERATING TEMP
-29°F TO 165°f (-34°C to 74°C)
HUMIDITY
Up to 95% RH
Interface, Ports
REMOTE CONTROL
Web Interface
LEDs
Power, SBC, HDD, Heartbeat
POWER
10V-36V, 6W (not including sensors)
CONNECTORS
Ethernet (2), USB (2), RS-232 (2),
RS-485 (4), Digital Out (2), Analog
Input (2), HDMI (1), Audio In, Audio
Out, SDLC
ANTENNA
Cellular, GPS, Pavement sensors,
Satellite
CONTACT MH CORBIN
Additional information is available at
www.mhcorbin.com
[email protected]
800-380-1718
©2021 MH Corbin, LLC
Lorem ipsum | Lorem ipsum dolor sit | DD month 1111 7.5pt Roadside Unit 2X
High performance edge-computing for
best V2X experience
© 2021, Yunex Traffic, A Siemens Business
2 Lorem ipsum | Lorem ipsum dolor sit | DD month 1111 7.5pt Roadside Unit 2X – RSU2X
The Yunex Traffic RSU2X is the new Vehicle2X (V2X)
communication device for intelligent infrastructure. This best-in-class device is the central interface for wireless communication between roadside infrastructure
and Onboard Units (OBUs). Bidirectional communication
via the RSU enables both the transmission of information (e.g. speed limits) and the reception of Onboard messages in real time. The RSU2X provides key data for a more
precise picture of the current traffic situation, enables more efficient traffic control, and boasts a significant reduction in accident numbers and an even more impressive cut in
emissions than previously possible.
Superior Performance and Ease of Use
Designed for best-in-class performance in every aspect, the RSU2X provides dual-radio, dual-stack technology and can be used in 802.111p/DSRC as well as in C-V2X (3GPP
Rel. 14/15) environments, making it a flexible and future proof choice. It is intended for outdoor roadside installation and is powered via Power-Over-Ethernet (POE). All
necessary antennas are fully integrated inside the
weatherproof housing for ease of use and designed for
maximum radio coverage of up to 2500m. The quad core
processor in combination with the powerful radio modules ensure superior edge-computing performance even in high traffic load scenarios with up 4,000 message verifications and 130 message signature operations per second. For
maximum connectivity the unit features various additional communication interfaces like Ethernet, RS485, USB, LTE, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth 5.0. All necessary interfaces and
connectors are easily accessible directly or via a service hatch.
High level of security
The RSU2X has been developed according to the Product
and Solution Security process with regular threat and risk analyses and hardening measures. These include secure
passwords, secure boot, as well as the use of encrypted and authenticated TLS interfaces to protect your network infrastructure. The unit is additionally protected with a tamper response mechanism, a Hardware Security Module
(HSM) and a TPM chip for secure storage of private keys.
Key Features
• Dual-Mode with support for DSRC/802.11p as well as
C-V2X
• Fully integrated antennas custom designed for
maximum range (up to 2500m)
• Optional external antenna connectors for remote
antenna setups
• Superior performance with up to 4000 message
verifications per sec & 130 message signatures per
sec
• Ruggedized enclosure IP67/NEMA6P enclosure for
harsh environments
• High security level with tamper response and secure
key storage
• Browser based service interface for easy configuration, diagnosis and remote software update
• LTE cellular radio for long distance backhaul
communication
• Supports all global V2X standards
• Service hatch for easy access to all interfaces and
connectors
© 2021, Yunex Traffic, A Siemens Business
3 Lorem ipsum | Lorem ipsum dolor sit | DD month 1111 7.5pt Technical Details
• 2 x 5.9 GHz Dual-Radio: 1 x IEEE 802.11p / C-V2X
(3GPP Rel. 14/15), 1 x IEEE 802.11p
• Receiver sensitivity of up to -97 dBm (802.11p)
• All antennas integrated with ext. antenna option
• Software stack available for ITS-G5 and WAVE (IEEE
1609)
• Wi-Fi / Bluetooth hotspot for smart devices and travel time applications
• GNSS with 2.0 m CEP position accuracy and WAAS
corrections support (GPS, Galileo, GLONASS, Beidou)
• 2 x Ethernet with one Power over Ethernet for power
supply
• LTE for cellular backhaul (SIM Card is not included)
• Browser based WebGUI for remote diagnosis and
configuration
• Sealed weatherproof enclosure and connectors
• Waterproof service hatch for easy service access
• ~2500 meter communication range, open-field, line-ofsight Security
• Hardware Security Module (HSM) for secure storage of
V2X private keys and signature generation
• Trusted platform module (TPM) for secure storage (e.g. for X.509 certificates)
• Tamper response mechanism
CPU/Memory
• Quad core CPU at 1200 Mhz for edge computing
• 3 GB DDR RAM
• 16 GB Flash
Performance
• Up to 4,000 message verifications per second
• Up 130 message signatures per second
Interfaces
• 1 x 802.11p/C-V2X + 1x 802.11p
• 2 x RJ45 100/1000 MBit Ethernet
• 1 x 802.11 b/g/n Wifi & Bluetooth 5.0 BR/EDR/BLE
• 1 x RS485
• 1 x LTE Cat4
• 1 x internal mPCIe slot for future extension
Mechanics
• Dimensions: 30 H x 28 W x 10 D cm
12” H x 11” W x 4” D
• Weight: approx. 3kg / 7 pounds
• RSU2X Shell: Plastics
Environmental
• Operating Temperature: -40 to +85°C
-40 to +185°F
• Housing: Sealed, IP66, IP67, NEMA 6P
Power
• Input Power: 48 V PoE+ (802.3at)
• Power consumption: 12 W (typ.)
© 2021, Yunex Traffic, A Siemens Business
4 Lorem ipsum | Lorem ipsum dolor sit | DD month 1111 7.5pt Yunex Traffic, A Siemens Business
9225 Bee Cave
Road Building B,
Suite 201 Austin,
TX 78733
© 2021 – Yunex
Traffic-A Siemens
Business
All Rights Reserved
3 BLUSTATS TRAFFAX ANALYSIS SOFTWARE
A PROCESSING TOOL FOR BLUFAX OUTPUT DATA
BluSTATs Description
A software license for the standard BluSTATs traffic data analysis software is provided with each purchase of Traffax equipment. This software has been developed for convenient matching, filtering and display of travel times and speeds derived from the Traffax BLUFAX units. The analysis software is based on the analytical research and development performed at the University of Maryland, Center for Advanced Transportation Technology, and optimized and extended for commercial use by Traffax Inc..
BluSTATs performs the following functions:
Loads, archives and processes all sensor data in a graphical, user friendly interface. Provides input to appropriately label stations and segments. Processes and filters sensor input files to remove anomalies and outliers. Matches Bluetooth MAC address between designated pairs of sensor stations, applying robust statistical base filtering to flag outliers.
Outputs KML based files for easy review of sensor locations and attributes using Google Earth.
Summarizes travel time data in five minute, fifteen minute, and one hour time intervals. Writes data to standard comma separated ASCII data files that are easily imported into spreadsheets and data bases.
Creates statistical summaries of the traffic data in standard spreadsheet format. Displays and prints graphs of travel time, speed, and detection rates. Creates customized corridor reports representing travel time across multiple segments through a corridor.
Creates customized O&D and Travel Time matrix reports for designated stations.
XML
Data Feed Ethernet:
TCP:8010, DNS,
HTTP, HTTPS,
NTP
HTTPS
HTTP
HTTPS
TCP:8010
Cellular
Network
Web
Browser
Web
Cellular
Ethernet
3rd Party
Applications
Agency
Office
TrafficCast
Secure
CyberCenter
Real-Time Communications Options
BlueTOAD Speed Map
Origin/Destination Reporting
Comparison Reports
Ethernet or Cellular Communications | AC, PoE, or Solar Power Real-Time Travel Times and Speeds
Web-Enabled and Archived Data Management
BlueTOAD
Bluetooth Travel-time Origin And Destination
Advanced System
BlueTOAD™ is the most advanced traffic-monitoring system on the market, directly measuring travel times using cost-effective, non-intrusive roadside technology.
Reliable Technology
BlueTOAD detects anonymous Bluetooth signals broadcast from mobile devices to determine accurate travel times and speeds.
Real-Time Data
BlueTOAD calculates travel times and speeds in real-time to provide route management capabilities.
Flexible Installation
BlueTOAD can be installed independent of local power or communications systems by using a cellular data connection and solar panel, or can be plugged into existing electrical and/or fiber infrastructure. Utilizing Power over Ethernet (PoE) technology simplifies network design and deployment.
Powerful Data Processing
The TrafficCast secure cyber-center processes the data collected by BlueTOAD devices. Data can be viewed in real-time or analyzed historically through a BlueTOAD Web interface, which provides travel times, road speeds, and MAC address detection counts.
BlueTOAD System Advantages
• TrafficCast proven algorithms for filtering and processing data inputs to compute real-time travel times and speeds.
• Speeds/travel times updated in real-time on a secure web “Dashboard” and speed maps.
• XML schema is available for third-party integration such as an Advanced Traffic Management System (ATMS), agency
website, or Dynamic Message Sign (DMS) software control. • Secure web interface for generating statistical and analytical reports covering: speeds, travel times, origin/destination, and before and after comparisons.
• Real-time monitoring of device status and performance.
Power over Ethernet (PoE) Benefits
• Single Power over Ethernet (PoE) shielded CAT-5 Ethernet cable supplies power and network connection to each
BlueTOAD unit.
• Save conduit space and simplify installation using single Ethernet cable suitable for longer distances.
BlueTOAD Cellular
Power Specifications
Voltage Input: 6 – 30 Volts
GSM Modem-Based - Max Current
@ 12V - 350 mA (Typical 140 mA)
Power Source Options
• 100 - 240 VAC
• Solar Power 30W, 16.8Vmp Solar
Weight: 16.6 lbs. (incl. mounting
bracket)
Battery: 44 Ah Sealed AGM
• Solar Power 50W, 17.5Vmp Solar
Weight: 25.2 lbs. (incl. mounting
bracket)
Battery: 44 Ah Sealed AGM
• Power over Ethernet (PoE)
IEEE 802.3af standard
110/220 VAC supply to injector
Operating Range
-30°C to +65°C
Processor
Real time microcontroller
Connectivity
GSM Quad-band Bluetooth
Bluetooth
CSR Bluecore 4 Class 1
Data Storage
Secure Digital (SD) – up to 1 year of
storage
Antennae
Bluetooth: 4 dBi Omni (Standard)
Custom options available
GSM: I-Bar Penta Band Cellular
Antenna
GPS: Active Patch 31 dBi
NEMA 4X Enclosure
12 in. x 10 in. x 7.75 in.
Weight (with battery & mounting
brackets): 43 lbs.
BlueTOAD Ethernet
Power Specifications
DC Supply Voltage: Minimum - 6 VDC
Maximum - 40 VDC
DC Supply Current: Maximum 100 mA
@ 12 VDC
Power Source Options
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
IEEE 802.3af standard
110/220 VAC supply to injector
Operating Range
-30°C to +65°C
Processor
Real time microcontroller
Connectivity
Ethernet 10BASE-T / 100BASE-T
Static or DHCP IP Addressing
Bluetooth
CSR Bluecore 4 Class 1
Data Storage
Secure Digital (SD) – up to 1 year of
storage
Antenna
Bluetooth: 4 dBi Omni (Standard)
Custom options available
NEMA 4X Enclosure
10 in. x 8 in. x 5.75 in.
Weight (with mounting brackets): 9 lbs.
Technical Specifications
TrafficCast International, Inc., 2801 Coho Street, Suite 100, Madison, WI 53713 Phone: 608.204.0001 • Fax: 608.204.0114 • www.trafficcast.com/products • [email protected] © 2012 TrafficCast International, Inc. All rights reserved. TrafficCast, BlueTOAD, and all other associated logos are trademarks of TrafficCast International, Inc. All other logos and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
REV: 021412-5
Solar Panel
Pole-Mount or Wall-Bracket
Patent Pending
BlueTOAD PCB
GSM
Cellular Modem
Bluetooth Radio
Solar
Charge Controller
GSM Blade
Antenna
GPS Antenna
BlueTOAD Cabinet
Environmental
Bluetooth Antenna
7-Day Backup Battery
PCB Power Cord
to PoE Splitter
Serial Port (used for IP
configuration)
Bluetooth
Antenna Cable
CAT-5 Ethernet Cable to
PoE Splitter
Bluetooth
Antenna
PoE Splitter
BlueTOAD Cellular
BlueTOAD Ethernet (PoE)
BlueTOAD Cellular
Power Options
110-220 VAC / 6-40 VDC
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
110-220 VAC / 6-40 VDC
Solar Power with Battery
110-220 VAC
AC Power 110-220 VAC / 6-40 VDC
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
BlueTOAD Ethernet
Power Options
Functionality BlueTOAD
Cellular
BlueTOAD
Ethernet
Non-intrusive
detection
Power over Ethernet
Solar Power Option
Real-Time
Communications
Web-based Software
Travel Time, Speed
Reports & Graphs
Archived data
Vantage Velocity®
Bluetooth or Wi-Fi based travel time calculation
and performance measurement system
Fast, easy, accurate travel time capture
Vantage Velocity® takes advantage of the large number of vehicle that are driving with Bluetooth or Wi-Fi enabled devices such as smart phones. Each Velocity reader senses a devices unique “MAC” address as they pass a reader station and transmits the time and location of the device to a central host system. As devices are detected at successive Velocity readers, the Host System calculates average travel times and speeds for a roadway segment. The device specific network address of an individual is totally anonymous.
Simple to install and set up
Field installation is simple; the system can be easily rack or shelf mounted inside a traffic signal cabinet, or as a standalone unit. Various communication methods are available to transmit data to the Host system.
Benefits of the
Vantage Velocity System
Immediate access to real-time speed
and travel time information
Simple installation
Historical data for planning purposes
Copyright © 2016 Iteris, Inc. All rights reserved.
NOTICE: Iteris, Inc. reserves the right to change product specifications without notice. Information furnished is for informational purposes only.
This information may not be complete or the latest revision. For the most up-to- date information, please contact Iteris, Inc.
Vantage Velocity®
Bluetooth or Wi-Fi based travel
time calculation and performance
measurement system
August 2016 Rev1
More Benefits
• Real-time data for traffic operations
• High accuracy, simple integration
• Agency owns all data
• Collect either bluetooth or Wi-Fi devices
Weight 1.0 lbs (0.45 kg)
Bluetooth Antenna Bluetooth 2.0+EDR Class 1
Multiband Antenna (Cellular and Bluetooth integrated)
Detectable Area Up to 300 feet (100 meters)
Approvals FCC Class A
Warranty 3 year limited warranty
Manufactured in USA
Host Software Server Requirements
MS Windows XP/7Pro
.NET Framework 3.5 or higher
IIS 6.0 or 7.0
Internet connectivity required for congestion map functionality Wired or wireless Ethernet connectivity to field unit required
SPECIFICATIONS
Field Unit
Processor 500MHz ARM9
Processing Method Asynchronous multi-thread read
Measured Item Bluetooth MAC address in
hexadecimal 00:00:00:00:00 format
Timestamp To nearest 1 second
Memory 128MB DDR-RAM
512MB NAND Flash, high-speed (17MB/s)
2 SD sockets (1 micro-SD, 1 full-size SD)
1/O 2 SATA ports
2 USB 2.0 480Mbps host/slave ports
1 RS-232 Port
Gigabit Ethernet, 10/100/1000 speeds
Power Consumption 3.5 watts normal, 5.0 watts maximum
Supply Voltage 9-28 VDC
Temperature -34oC to +74oC
MTBF Greater than 100,000 hours
Dimensions 5.25” x 4.5” x 2.5” (h*w*d)
To schedule a demo, go to www.sensysnetworks.com/senstraffic SensTraffic.
UNLOCK THE DATA IN YOUR ROADS.
Presenting a new traffic data and analytical
Smart City platform for managing your corridors
and intersections.
SensTraffic provides automated statistical processing of precise traffic detection data, detailed performance measures, and remote network monitoring and diagnostics. It’s time to expect better data from your detection solution.
SensTraffic drives:
25% less travel time
31% fewer accidents
41% reduction in
traffic delays
TURN OUR ACCURATE DETECTION
IN YOUR ROADS INTO ACTIONABLE
DATA AT YOUR FINGERTIPS
To schedule a demo, go to
www.sensysnetworks.com/senstraffic
SERVICE OVERVIEW DESCRIPTION
SensDiag System Health Remote diagnostics monitoring & alerts SensBike Bicycle Counts Accurate real-time bicycle counts, including non-ferrous bike frames SensID Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Re-ID
MAC address re-identification for Travel
Times, Intersection Delay, & Origin/Destination
SensFlow Vehicle Counts
Volume, Occupancy & Speed with Congestion Mapping
(Optional VMT and VHT available)
SensMetrics Signal & Safety
Optimization
High-resolution performance measures
and data analytics including V/C ratios,
arrivals on green, turn movement counts,
Purdue Coordination Diagrams, red light
violations and more
SensTraffic can be customized to suit your needs using the following data packages:
Axis IP surveillance.
Endless possibilities for video surveillance.
Meeting
today’s video
surveillance
challenges.
The transition to network video is a reality as customers take advantage of flexible, industry standard systems for security and video surveillance.
As security management over the IP network expands and intelligence capabilities move out to network cameras, systems can scale much more easily. This move to open systems empowers a much more productive and cost-effective means of surveillance than was ever possible.
The video surveillance market is growing constantly, driven by increased public and private security concerns, as well as a technology shift.
Superior image quality
Image quality is clearly one of the most important
features of any camera, if not the most important.
Superior image quality enables the user to more closely follow details and changes in images, making way for
better and faster decisions to more effectively safeguard people and property. It also ensures greater accuracy for automated analysis and alarm tools. Axis
network cameras provide high-quality video images,
and megapixel and HDTV network cameras are available to provide even more image details.
Remote accessibility
With network video, users can access real-time
video at any time from any authorized computer
anywhere. Axis network video products provide an
easy way to capture and distribute high quality video
over any kind of IP network or the Internet. The video
can be stored at remote locations for convenience and
security, and the information can be transported over
the LAN or Internet.
Easy, future-proof integration
There are almost no limitations as to where a
network video product can be placed. Axis network
video has the capacity to provide a high level of
integration with other equipment and functions,
making it a continually developing system. A fully
integrated Axis network video system can be used
for a multitude of applications simultaneously: for
instance, access control, building management,
point-of-sales systems, ATMs, as well as fire alarms,
intruder and visitor management.
For the security manager, the shift to network video creates new opportunities where digital technology can be put to use to deliver maximum value.
IP Surveillance | 3
Scalability and flexibility
An Axis network video system can be expanded by adding more network cameras. You can choose exactly what you need today, and scale the system at any time
to meet your growing needs. New technologies, additional cameras, and extra storage capacity can all be easily added when required, thanks to strict adherence
to industry standards.
Cost-effectiveness
Based on open standards, Axis network video
products run on IP networks. Using standard PC server
hardware rather than proprietary equipment such as
DVRs radically reduces management and equipment
costs, particularly for larger systems where storage and servers are a significant portion of the total solution cost. Additional cost savings come from the infrastructure used. IP-based networks such as LANs and the Internet can be leveraged for other applications across the organization.
Distributed intelligence
These days, a massive amount video is being
recorded, but never watched or reviewed due to
lack of time. As a result, events and activities are
missed, and suspicious behaviors remain unnoticed.
With network video, intelligence has been brought
into the camera itself. Network cameras can have
built-in video motion detection and alarm management
so the camera decides when to send video, at what
frame rate and resolution, and when to alert a specific operator. Other unique features include audio detection and active tampering alarm.
AXIS Q7406 Video Encoder Blade
AXIS Q7406
Video Encoder Blade
0 - 0 -
AXIS Q7900 Rack
100-240
50-50 Hz
4-2 A
FNP 30
Power-one
AC
ACTIVITY
LOOP
NETWORK
1 2 3 4
PS1
PS2
FANS
POWER POWER
100-240 AC
50-50 Hz
4-2 A
FNP 30
Power-one
AC
The IP way
Protecting existing CCTV investments
Significant investments in analog CCTV systems may
have already been made. The technology shift to network video does not, however, mean that existing analog CCTV investments have to be discarded. With an Axis
network video solution, you can integrate your existing analog system into an IP-based solution. The solution
enables you to take advantage of numerous functionalities such as remote pan/tilt/zoom, Power over Ethernet, audio detection and video motion detection, while
meeting user requirements for image quality, recording
capabilities, reliability, and cost-effectiveness.
Axis video encoders and
rack solutions
Axis video encoders make it possible to move toward a network video system without having to discard
existing analog equipment. They
connect to analog cameras, digitize
the images and send them over an
IP network, allowing analog cameras to take advantage of many of the same benefits as provided by
network cameras.
Analog cameras
Leveraging IT investments and achieving a
lower total cost of ownership
The majority of businesses now have high-speed,
IP-based networks connected to the Internet. Adding
an Axis network video system simply utilizes and
extends the same infrastructure to include video functionality. Standard IT equipment such as switches, PC servers for video recording and storage, are used, so
existing investments in IT infrastructure and devices
can be leveraged, ensuring high return on investment.
Megapixel and HDTV network cameras
Megapixel network cameras enable at least three times
higher resolution of video images than can be provided
by analog CCTV. An HDTV network camera provides even
better video quality with full frame rate and excellent color representation. Megapixel and HDTV technology
enhances the ability to identify people and objects.
Outdoor, day/night and thermal video
surveillance
Many network video products are designed for tough
environments. Network cameras and video encoders can
be resistant to dust, vibrations, humidity and vandalism.
Automatic day and night functionality ensures good image quality even during night time - outdoors as well as indoors. Thermal network cameras enable operators to
detect people, objects and incidents also in complete
darkness and other difficult conditions such as smoke
and haze.
An Axis network video system is able to send
video without the need for a dedicated physical
infrastructure. It uses standard IP networks,
such as Local Area Networks (LANs)
and the Internet, for transporting
information, rather than dedicated
point-to-point cabling used in
analog video systems.
IP NETWORK
Video management and
storage
A standard PC with video management software can be used to monitor and record the video.
Remote access
Any camera can be monitored remotely from anywhere on the LAN or the Internet.
Axis video decoder
If network video streams need to be
monitored on existing analog equipment, an Axis video decoder can be used.
Axis network cameras
They capture and send live video
after connecting directly to the IP
network.
IP Surveillance | 5
1. Network cameras for any need
Axis provides the market’s largest portfolio of network cameras, delivering key benefits to video surveillance users.
Fixed network cameras
A fixed network camera meets a variety of application
needs, and its traditional camera design adds a deterring effect. The viewing direction is set once the camera is mounted. There are several models with a varifocal
lens and/or exchangeable lenses for increased flexibility. Housings are available for mounting the camera outdoors or in harsh environments.
Thermal network cameras
A thermal network camera creates images based on
the heat that always radiates from any object, vehicle
or person. The cameras see through complete darkness
and deliver images that allow operators to detect and
act on suspicious activity around the clock in all conditions. Thermal network cameras are a perfect complement to any professional IP surveillance system.
1. 2.
Fixed dome network cameras
A fixed dome network camera is a compact camera
solution with a dome casing. Its main benefit lies in
its discreet, nonobtrusive design, as well as in the fact that it is difficult to see in which direction the camera is pointing. The camera’s dome casing design offers
efficient protection against redirection and defocusing.
PTZ dome network cameras
Offers network video functionality combined with pan/
tilt/zoom capability, enabling wide area coverage and
great details when zooming in. The camera’s movement is easily controlled by an operator, or it can be run in guard tour mode, where the camera automatically
moves between preset positions. PTZ dome network
cameras are available in outdoor-ready models for easy
and reliable installation in tough environments.
3. 4.
4. Video management software
Axis provides a complete range of software solutions for a broad spectrum of industry segments and applications.
2. Video encoders
A cost-effective way to integrate analog cameras and gain important benefits of network video.
3. Accessories
AXIS Camera Companion
Basic surveillance where video is recorded in the cameras and no other recording device is needed, typical for small businesses. AXIS Camera Companion provides everything
needed for basic video surveillance, for example live view and recording, video search and efficient video exporting.
Hosted Video
Surveillance provided as a cloud-based service, typical for businesses with several small sites. Axis network of video service providers handle storage, maintenance as
well as additional services such as remote guard tour
- making it a trouble-free alternative to a traditional on-site solution.
Standalone video encoders
Standalone video encoders are versatile solutions for
migrating analog cameras to network video in small to
large installations. Axis offers standalone video
encoders with different levels of functionality supporting 1, 4 or 16 analog channels, and ruggedized versions are available for tough environments.
Axis accessories
Axis offers a wide range of accessories for enhanced
operability and image quality. This includes housings
for protection of cameras against rain, heat, cold, dust and vandalism, and mounting accessories for easy
Video encoder blades and racks
Blade versions of video encoders offer the same
capabilities as standalone products, but require mounting in a video encoder rack to function. A rack with encoder blades provides a high-density solution for
migrating large-scale analog installations to IP, and
can accommodate from 1 up to as many as 84 analog
channels in one unit, providing a flexible and expandable solution. installation of cameras in various locations. A broad
selection of lenses and illuminators can be used to
complement the cameras and optimize image quality.
AXIS Camera Station
Fully featured surveillance where video is recorded on
a system server, typical for medium-sized businesses. It supports the unique capabilities of Axis network video
products and provides everything needed for professional surveillance: alarm management, site maps, tampering alarm, cross-line detection, and more.
Axis’ Application Development Partners
Customized and specialized surveillance solutions
provided by Axis partners for any system complexity or size – small, medium or enterprise. Axis works with more than 800 Application Development Partners
globally to ensure tightly integrated software solutions for Axis network video products.
Axis offers intelligent security solutions that enable a smarter, safer world. As the global market leader in network video, Axis is driving the industry by continually launching innovative network products based on an open platform - delivering high value to its customers and carried through a global partner network. Axis has long-term relationships with partners and provides them with knowledge and ground-breaking network products in existing and new markets.
Axis has more than 1,600 dedicated employees in more than 40 countries around the world, supported by a network of over 60,000 partners across 179 countries. Founded in 1984, Axis is a Sweden-based company listed on NASDAQ OMX Stockholm under the ticker AXIS.
For more information about Axis, please visit our website www.axis.com. ©2014 Axis Communications AB. AXIS COMMUNICATIONS, AXIS, ETRAX, ARTPEC and VAPIX are registered trademarks or trademark applications of Axis AB in various jurisdictions. All other company names and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. We reserve the right to introduce modifications without notice.
About Axis Communications
54774/EN/R1/1401
IP Cameras for
any application
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 3
With thousands of IP camera options to choose from, there’s a Pelco™ by Schneider Electric™ IP camera suitable for every lighting condition, environment, and application imaginable. From fixed, entry-level cameras to high-performance pan/tilt/zoom (PTZ) and thermal imaging systems, Pelco has IP cameras that allow you to capture your important video data with confidence.
Fixed IP Cameras
• Sarix™ Enhanced Range
• Sarix Professional Range
Panoramic IP Cameras
• Optera™ Multi-Sensor Cameras
• Evolution Fisheye Cameras
IP Positioning Systems
• Spectra™ Enhanced
Dome Systems
• Spectra Professional
Dome System
• Esprit™ Enhanced Integrated
Positioning System
Specialty IP Cameras
• ExSite™ Explosion-Proof
Camera Systems
• Sarix TI Thermal
Imaging Cameras
Pelco IP Cameras
4 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
Features:
• SureVision 2.0 technology, including:
• True WDR (100 dB)
• Low Light Down to 0.1 lux
• Antibloom technology
• Automatic adjustment for
above lighting conditions
• 3D noise filtering
• Enhanced tone mapping
• Up to 30 ips at 3 MPx
• Up to two 1080p, 30 fps video streams
• PoE, IEEE 802.3af
• Built-in Pelco analytics suite
• Local storage (Micro SD)
• Compatible with Pelco and third-party
video systems
• ONVIF™
Profile-S and Profile-G conformant
Models:
• Sarix IME Series Indoor, Environmental,
and Vandal Mini Domes
• Sarix IXE Series Box Cameras
Sarix Enhanced Range With SureVision 3.0
Designed for performance, premium experience, and mission-critical applications, the Sarix Enhanced Range with SureVision™ 3.0 delivers the best possible image when the scene contains difficult lighting conditions, such as bright areas, shaded areas, and intense light. The discreet design, motorized zoom, built-in analytics, and advanced features of the Sarix Enhanced Range provide a best-in-class user experience. Engineered with superior reliability and fault tolerance, these rugged fixed IP cameras ensure you always get the video that you need.
Box Cameras
Bullet Cameras
Indoor Mini Domes
Next Generation Sarix Enhanced Range
Features:
• SureVision 3.0 technology
• True WDR 130dB, min illumination 0.03 LUX
• Up to 3 MPx resolution
• Up to 60 ips at 3MPx
• Autofocus Varifocal 3 - 9 mm, 9 - 22 mm lenses
(Domes and Bullets)
• CS lens mounts with auto back focus (Box)
• PoE (Bullet); PoE, 24 Vac, 12Vdc (Domes and Box)
• Built-in analytics suite
• Up to 128 GB edge storage with SD card
• Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS)
• Compatible with Pelco and third-party video systems
• ONVIF Profile S and Profile G conformant
• Full 3-Year warranty and support
Models:
• Sarix IME Series Indoor and Environmental Mini Domes
• Sarix IBE Series Indoor and Environmental Bullet Cameras • Sarix IXE Series Box Cameras
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 5
Sarix Professional Range IP Cameras
The next generation Sarix Professional Range cameras pack the most popular fixed IP camera features and functionality into a broad assortment of affordable indoor and environmental cameras to maximize your video security options and protect your people, property, and bottom line. Their superior low light performance and adaptive IR illumination excel at capturing important details in the dark, such as faces and license plates, which are critical for effective site security and asset protection.
Next Generation Sarix Professional Range
Features:
• Up to 5 MPx resolution
• Up to 30 ips at 3 MPx
• WDR 75dB, min illumination 0.05 LUX
• Up to 64 GB edge storage with Micro SD card
• Operating temperature up to 55 °C (131 °F)
• Domes and bullets vandal resistant to IK10, all surfaces • IP66 ingress protection in environmental models
• Adaptive IR available in environmental models
• Compatible with Pelco and third-party video systems
• ONVIF Profile S and Profile G conformant
• Full 3-year warranty and support
Models:
• Sarix IBP Series Indoor and Environmental Bullets
• Sarix IMP Series Indoor and Environmental Mini Domes
• Sarix IJP Series Indoor Micro Dome
• Sarix IWP Series Vandal Resistant Wedge
Features:
• Up to 5 MPx resolution
• Up to 30 ips at 1080p
• Autofocus motorized remote zoom lens
(Bullet and Mini Domes)
• Integrated adaptive infrared (IR) illumination
(Bullet and Mini Domes)
• Multiple CS-mount lens options (Box
Cameras)
• Accessible edge storage with Micro SD card
• PoE and 24 Vac power input
• Compatible with Pelco and third-party
video systems
• ONVIF Profile-S conformant
Models:
• Sarix IXP Series Box Cameras
• Sarix IBP Series Environmental
Bullet Cameras
• Sarix IMP Series Indoor, Environmental,
and Environmental with IR Mini Domes
Environmental Mini Domes
with Optional IR
Indoor Mini Domes
Bullet Cameras
Bullet Cameras with Optional IR
Indoor Micro Dome
Wedge Cameras
6 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
180° Optera Series
This option looks both ways along
a straight line and is ideal for wall
positions, platforms and streets.
270° Optera Series
The unique Optera 270º configuration
is ideal for situations where you want
to see out across the horizon and also
below the camera, such as outside
corner deployments and over doorways
and entrances.
360° Optera Series
The Optera 360º configuration gives
a complete 360-degree panoramic
view and is ideal for wide open spaces,
including lobbies, parking lots, and
building perimeters.
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 7
Optera with SureVision 2.0
Features:
• Constant, seamless situational awareness
• Multiple immersive PTZ views at VMS
• Up to 12.5 frames per second (fps) at 12 MPx resolution • Outstanding WDR and low-light performance at the
same time
• 8 Pelco video analytic behaviors
• Local storage (Micro SD)
• ONVIF Profile-S and Profile-G conformant
• Compatible with Pelco VideoXpert™, Digital Sentry™, and third-party VMS partners
• Power over Ethernet Plus (PoE+)
• 3-year warranty
Models:
• Optera IMM 180° Series with SureVision 2.0
• Optera IMM 270° Series with SureVision 2.0
• Optera IMM 360° Series with SureVision 2.0
Optera is the next best thing to being in the middle of the scene itself, offering the unparalleled ability to find and capture the necessary evidence to make critical, business-enabling decisions. Optera’s Panomersive Experience delivers up to 12 MP resolution with the option for completely stitched, seamless, and blended panoramic views without the disruption and distraction of disjointed sensor boundaries. ↘
SureVision 2.0 —
For a higher
quality image
Without SureVision 2.0
With SureVision 2.0
8 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
Panoramic IP cameras
for 360º surveillance
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 9
Evolution Fisheye Cameras
Maximize your video security coverage and investment with the Evolution 360⁰ fisheye cameras. Evolution cameras provide total situational awareness over a 360⁰ field of view, generating a number of video streams at a choice of resolutions, as well as configurable privacy zones and video motion detection within defined areas of interest. With client-side dewarping and retrospective analysis, you have the best forensic fisheye camera available on the market today.
Features:
• Constant 360° surveillance, no blind spots
• Patented client-side 3D dewarping technology
• H.264/MJPEG multistream
• Silent operation, no moving parts
• PoE or 12 Vdc
• Ceiling/wall/table mount
• Ultra-small, 4 1/2-inch (108mm) indoor form factor available • ONVIF Profile-S compliant
Models:
• 12MP and 5MP Evolution 360° Indoor Cameras
• 12MP and 5MP Evolution 360° Indoor Concealed Cameras
• 12MP and 5MP Evolution 360° Outdoor Dome Cameras
• 5MP Evolution 360° Mini
Indoor Concealed Camera 5MP Mini Camera 12MP Indoor Camera 12MP Outdoor Cameras
10 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
Pelco IP positioning systems deliver
unparalleled image quality
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 11
Spectra Enhanced with SureVision 3.0 — PTZ High Speed Dome System Spectra Enhanced, the symbol for security the world over, has long provided Full HD 1080p 20x and 30x optical zoom cameras that run at up to 60 frames per second and provide 130dB of True Wide Dynamic Range (WDR). Pelco’s PTZ high speed dome systems take a leap in low light performance with the addition of SureVision 3.0 in select 20x and 30x optical zoom environmental models, offering low light video down to 0.03 lux—that is twenty times better than base Spectra Enhanced models.
↘
Endless Adaptability
Increased resolution over standarddefinition IP cameras delivers unmatched forensic detail.
An ideal solution to view and
identify specific features, such as
faces, license plates, playing cards
(gaming applications), etc.
• Commercial
• Industrial
• City surveillance
• Traffic monitoring
• Gaming
Features:
• SureVision 3.0 Technology, Including:
• Up to 130 dB Wide Dynamic Range (WDR)
• Low Light Down to 0.03 LUX on Select Models
• Anti-Bloom Technology
• 3D Noise Filtering
• Enhanced Tone Mapping
• Up to Full HD 1080p
• Up to 60 Images per Second (ips)
• Power over Ethernet (HPoE and PoE+), 24 VAC, 24 VDC
• Three Automatic Defog Options
• Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS)
• Built-in Analytics Suite
• Vandal Resistant IK10 Smoked or Clear Bubble
• Up to 32 GB Edge Storage with Micro SD Card
• Compatible with Pelco and Third-Party Video Systems
• ONVIF Profile S and Profile G Conformant
• 3-Year Warranty and Support
Models:
• Spectra Enhanced Low Light Series 20x Environmental Cameras • Spectra Enhanced Low Light Series 30x Environmental Cameras • Spectra Enhanced Series 20x Standard or Environmental Cameras • Spectra Enhanced Series 30x Standard or Environmental Cameras 12 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
↘
Innovation
Continues
Spectra Professional delivers clear,
live-streaming, HD images.
The camera delivers beautiful video
images with an impressive number
of pixels on target so that critical
identifying features can be seen
with great detail.
APPLICATIONS
• Commercial
• Industrial
• City surveillance
• Traffic monitoring
• Gaming
Spectra Professional - PTZ High Speed Dome System
Pelco breaks the price vs. performance barrier with the powerful, cost-effective Spectra Professional Series of discreet, integrated, high-speed dome camera. Spectra Professional delivers 2.0 MPx resolution (1920 x 1080P @ 30IPS), high-profile H.264 compression, built-in analytics including motion detection and camera sabotage, 20X optical zoom and fast continuous 360° pan and tilt speed. The dome system features open architecture connectivity for third-party VMS and recording solutions allowing integration into virtually any IP-based system.
Features:
• Up to 1920 x 1080p resolution
• 16:9 aspect ratio; 1080p at 30 ips
• 2.0 MPx, 20X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom IP camera • Ability to control and monitor video over IPv4 or IPv6 networks • Built-in analytics including Motion Detection and Camera Sabotage • Two video streams: Dual H.264 or H.264 and Scalable MJPEG • Fast and continuous 360° pan and tilt
• Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast, Multicast IGMP), UPnP, DNS, DHCP, RTP, RTSP, NTP, IPv6, GB28181, and more • PoE+ IEEE 802.3 at Class 4 (for non-environmental units) • Four preset tours, 64 dome presets, 8 window blanks
• ONVIF Profile-S and Profile-G conformant
• IK10 rated
• 32 GB on board storage via SD card
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 13
A critical part of
your site’s security
infrastructure
14 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
Pelco’s iconic Esprit Series positioning system provides best-in-class image quality and pan/tilt performance. In addition to Full HD 1080p 30x optical zoom, Esprit Enhanced now features SureVision 3.0 with 130dB of True Wide Dynamic Range and low light performance up to twenty times better than the previously available Esprit HD cameras.
The new SureVision 3.0 camera is available in either a standard or pressurized 30x optical zoom module that delivers market leading image quality for the toughest outdoor environments.
Esprit Enhanced with SureVision 3.0 — Integrated and Pressurized PTZ Systems Features:
• SureVision 3.0 Technology, Including:
• Up to 130 dB Wide Dynamic Range (WDR)
• Low Light Down to 0.03 LUX on Select Models
• Anti-Bloom Technology
• 3D Noise Filtering
• Enhanced Tone Mapping
• Up to Full HD 1080p
• 2.0 MPx, 30X optical zoom
• Up to 30 Images per Second (ips)
• Three Automatic Defog Options
• Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS)
• Built-in Analytics Suite
• Compatible with Pelco and Third-Party Video Systems
• ONVIF Profile S
• 3-Year Warranty and Support
Models:
• Esprit Enhanced Low Light Series 30x Standard and Pressurized Cameras • Esprit HD Series 30x Standard or Pressurized Cameras
↘
The Best Just
Got Better!
Esprit Enhanced delivers crystalclear, live-streaming images over IP networks. With six times the
resolution of standard-definition
positioning systems, Esprit
Enhanced is an ideal solution to view
details such as faces, license plates,
tattoos, or other specific features.
APPLICATIONS
• Traffic monitoring
• City center surveillance
• Airports & marine environments
• Heavy commercial & industrial
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 15
Specialty IP cameras to handle any
of your hazardous environments or
impossible lighting conditions
16 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
The ExSite Series offers network-based, explosion-proof PTZ and fixed camera systems with integrated camera/ lens/receiver for safe and efficient installation in hazardous locations. Featuring low-light technology, multiple compression formats, and both upright and inverted operation, ExSite IP provides the image quality, performance, and reliability you demand in the most challenging environments.
ExSite IP Series — Explosion-Proof Camera Systems
Features:
• Integrated Camera with 36X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom • H.264, MPEG-4, and MJPEG compression
• Compatible with Pelco and third-party video systems
• ONVIF 1.02 conformant
• Up to two simultaneous video streams
• Electropolished 316L stainless steel construction
• -60 °C to +60 °C operating temperature range
• Upright or inverted operation
• Manual 200° pan and 180° tilt adjustments (EHXME Series) • 360° continuous pan rotation with tilt range +90° to -90° from horizontal (IPSXME Series)
• Password protection
• Optional window wiper
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 17
Sarix TI Thermal IP Cameras
Features:
• Plug-and-play with the industry’s most common recording and VMSs
• Fully integrated sensor, camera, enclosure,
and pan/tilt system
• Fixed and pan/tilt models
• Integration into any IP or analog system
• Sun-safe amorphous silicon sensor
• Five types of Security Video Analytics
• Full and reduced frame rate options
• Multiple resolution options, up to 640 x 480
• Compatible with Pelco and third-party video systems
• SD Card local recording
• ONVIF 1.02 conformant
Sarix TI excels in automatic detection and impossible light, including blinding sun, smoke, and total darkness. It has enhanced image quality, easy network integration, advanced analytics, and unprecedented value. Sarix TI puts thermal imaging within reach for any application. With cameras available in both fixed and pan/tilt models, Sarix TI is flexible enough to fit into any new or existing system.
Standard Visible Light Camera
Sarix TI Camera
18 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
Visible Light Camera Sarix TI Camera
From borders and building perimeters to industrial pipelines, Sarix TI can discover potential safety threats in any lighting condition, maximizing the time you have to respond.
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 19
Sarix TM Thermography IP Cameras
Features:
• Fixed or pan/tilt (PT) options
• Built-in thermography analytics and alarms
• Temperature monitoring event and metadata streaming
• Minimum/maximum/average temperature algorithms
• Auto environmental compensation and correction
• Up to 16 user-defined alarm zones for each profile
• Compatible with Pelco and third-party video systems
• Uncooled, sun-safe, amorphous silicon microbolometer
• Long wave infrared (LWIR)
• SD Card local recording multiple lens options
• Complete with sun shroud and heater/defroster
• Meets NEMA Type 4X and IP66 standards
The Sarix TM Thermography IP camera is an advanced thermal imaging camera designed for easy integration into any new or existing video security application. The camera provides predictive maintenance and process monitoring capabilities by detecting temperature fluctuations in user-defined areas. Every Sarix TM camera features IP outputs and an integrated, environmentally protected IP66-rated enclosure. Available in fixed and pan/tilt models.
Empowering customers with more options
Pelco is committed to providing a range of products and integration options that is unmatched in the industry.
Open systems and design
For many video security professionals, openness is as important as reliability.
And as physical security cements its presence on the network, customers are demanding open platforms and interoperability to enhance their solutions.
From point-of-sale and access control to the deployment of advanced mapping systems, Pelco is actively bringing third-party solution sets in line with our existing products and technologies to give customers the flexibility they need without sacrificing the system performance they require.
Partner First integration
With an industry-leading approach to open systems design and the development of strategic alliances and partnerships, Pelco truly understands the value that comes with working together to deliver fully integrated video security solutions.
Our groundbreaking Partner First program marks a new level of openness as we work on a daily basis to identify and bring to market additional features, capabilities, and solutions to our existing portfolio of video security solutions. Please see pelco.com/partnerfirst to see a full directory of integration partners.
POS
Command and
Control
Capture
Data Analysis
Manage
Display
Network
IP
Open and Integrated
Pelco products are designed to easily integrate with the industry’s leading manufacturers.
↘
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 21
IP Driven — Ask for genuine Pelco IP camera accessories Whether you’re looking for specialized functionality, enhanced capabilities, or simply added peace of mind, look to Pelco for the industry’s widest and most complete selection of IP camera accessories.
Engineered to the highest standards and tested extensively to ensure precise compatibility and optimum performance, all of our accessories offer genuine Pelco quality, supported by the best service and guarantees in the industry. Save time and money, and provide tested and proven solutions for your customers — ask for genuine Pelco IP camera accessories.
New IP accessories include:
• Fortified Camera Enclosure Systems
• IP-Ready General-Purpose Enclosures
• IR and White Light LED Illumination
• IP Fiber Optic Transmission
• Ethernet Over Coax/UTP Transmission
• PoE Midspan Power Transmission
• Hd Lcd Monitors/Displays
• Portable Ip Camera Installation Tool
22 | Pelco IP Camera Overview
Enterprise Class Solutions
VideoXpert: VideoXpert’s intuitive design and easy-to-navigate presentation effortlessly displays what’s needed, when it’s needed, allowing security professionals to make fast, effective decisions that drive businesses forward. Its powerful integration capabilities deliver a single solution to leverage the expertise of new and existing third-party providers for expanded and customizable functionality. From solutions for hundreds or thousands of cameras to multi-location infrastructures, the VideoXpert platform is designed to meet your security needs.
Endura VMS: The Endura IP VMS offers the scalability, performance, and reliability required for mission-critical surveillance applications.
Scalable to thousands of cameras, Endura is designed to fit a wide range of customer applications — including airports, casinos, and city surveillance — where unmatched fault tolerance and system integrity are mandatory.
Solutions for Mainstream Applications
Digital Sentry VMS: With full-featured DSNVs video management software, a robust DSSRV network video recorder, analog camera support via optional direct-attached or network video encoders, multisite monitoring, and support for third-party IP cameras, Digital Sentry is a flexible VMS for mainstream security applications.
Manage Your IP Cameras With Pelco VMS
When it comes to your VMS, one size doesn't fit all. That's why Pelco has evolved our VMS platform to enable, empower and support our customers with a solution for any application. From the groundbreaking user experience of VideoXpert, to the powerful scalability of Endura, to the mainstream flexibility of Digital Sentry, to cloud-based video management solutions, Pelco IP VMS solutions provide a solid foundation from which you can securely and efficiently operate your entire video security landscape.
Pelco IP Camera Overview | 23
Camera Selector Tool
Our Camera Selector Tool makes it easy to find the right camera for your next installation.
You can quickly compare up to four cameras to ensure you have selected the camera that most accurately suits your needs.
Selection Guides
The guessing game is over. Pick the right mounting accessories every time, by leveraging the Quick Reference Guide. Or get an overview of our most popular products using the IP Product Comparison Guide to quickly see all that Pelco has to offer.
IP camera tools designed with you in mind
From an array of online tools, calculators, and selection guides to quick-and-easy access to product documentation, software downloads, licensing agreements, product marketing materials, and more — Pelco has the valuable tools you need. These resources provide a portfolio of customerfocused programs, tools, and services specifically designed to elevate your success.
August 2016
©2016 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. Schneider Electric, Pelco, Sarix, Optera, Esprit, ExSite, SureVision, VideoXpert, Digital Sentry, and Endura are trademarks owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. www.schneider-electric.com • SC-621_GMA-US Pelco by Schneider Electric
3500 Pelco Way
Clovis, California 93612 USA
Tel.: 559-292-1981
IP driven. Customer focused.
At Pelco, we are committed to the development and manufacturing of open IP video security systems coupled with an unparalleled level of customer service and support. From an expanded selection of IP security cameras and VMSs to full HD displays, traditional surveillance technologies, accessories, and more, Pelco is your trusted video security partner.
As part of Schneider Electric, Pelco connects you to the global specialist in energy and security management, and has the ability to deliver integrated security and building management solutions that let you control your entire security landscape across enterprises, from a single user interface.
For more information, please visit pelco.com or call 800-289-9100 (United States and Canada) or 559-292-1981 (international). For pricing information or to purchase Pelco products, please contact your manufacturer’s representative or the Pelco office in your area.
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC
MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC
H.265
u AI-based traffic detection for traffic monitoring
(no camera calibration required)
u Open platform that allows third-party apps from
the Application store from Security & Safety
Things
u Starlight camera technology with excellent lowlight sensitivity (color = 0.0047 lx) and High dynamic range (120 dB) (to see details in bright
and dark areas simultaneously)
u Flexible streaming capabilities powering three
independent streams
u Edge intelligence and object detection even
when the camera is moving
The MIC inteox 7100i camera is an advanced PTZ
surveillance platform based on an open operating
system, driven by OSSA, from Security and Safety
Things. With starlight imaging technology and
excellent low-light sensitivity, the camera is the
perfect solution for robust and high-quality imaging
needs for mission-critical applications.
The camera’s ruggedized design meets customer
expectations in demanding environments that exceed
the capabilities of conventional IP cameras. Even in
installations subject to harsh shock/vibration
conditions and/or extreme weather, the camera
provides high-quality video images.
The camera is the ideal choice for:
• Transportation: highways, bridges/tunnels, and
ports
• Critical infrastructure: power generation/
transmission, refineries/pipelines, and mining
• High-security: government facilities and data
centers
• Mission-critical applications involving harsh
environments that require high-resolution imaging
• Complex scenes with many details under any
lighting condition
• Installations where downtime is undesired because
of high service costs
Intelligent open, flexible, and extendable camera
platform
The camera has a powerful, embedded processor with
dedicated hardware to support advanced machine
learning and neural-network-based Video Analytics.
All cameras with this platform have high image quality, built-in Video Analytics, intelligent bitrate
management, and the highest levels of data security.
The platform also gives you the flexibility to customize your camera to your specific requirements.
The camera platform integrates with the cloud
infrastructure of Security and Safety Things for app
management across devices. Also, Bosch offers
advanced device management and services through
the Bosch Remote Portal (https://
remote.boschsecurity.com/). From the Bosch Remote
Portal you can (remotely):
• Complete initial configuration of your online and
connected Bosch devices.
• Update firmware for single or multiple devices.
• Manage certificates through Configuration Manager
or the web interface of your camera.
• Monitor the health of and receive alerts for your
connected Bosch devices.
• Connect your Bosch devices to the Security and
Safety Things portal for app management.
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 2 | 12
AI-based traffic detection for traffic monitoring
The camera includes an AI-based traffic detector to
detect and track cars in front of traffic lights, on
intersections, roads, highways, and in tunnels. Even in dense traffic such as vehicles stopped at traffic lights and in traffic jams, the AI-based traffic detector
reliably separates the different cars for accurate
counting results.
Functions
Exceptional low-light performance
The latest sensor technology combined with the
sophisticated noise suppression results in an
exceptional sensitivity in color. The low-light
performance is so good that the camera continues to
provide excellent color performance even with a
minimum of ambient light.
High dynamic range
The dynamic range of the camera is outstanding and is
obvious in real-world performance comparisons. In
extended dynamic range mode, the camera uses an
electronic shutter to capture four images with
different exposure time and reproduce a high-contrast
frame. The result is that you can view details in both
the bright areas (highlights) and the dark areas
(shadows) of a scene at the same time. You can easily
distinguish objects and features (for example, faces)
with bright backlight.
Ruggedized design for extreme applications
The camera is designed to last in surveillance
applications that are beyond the mechanical
capabilities of conventional positioning systems. The
entire metal body is anodized and has been
engineered to withstand high-impact, low-frequency
vibration. The camera models comply to IK10 rating
for impact resistance and to the IEC 60068 standards
applicable to vibration and shock.
The camera has a closed-loop positioning system. The
system allows the camera to maintain its position
under continuous vibration or after an extreme shock
event, even without homing or pre-position
calibration.
The camera benefits from Bosch domain knowledge in
material engineering and coatings. As a result, the
superior metallurgy and the finish of the camera
provide unprecedented protection against corrosion.
The camera has been tested to and meets the ISO
12944:6 standard C5-M - very high (marine) on
Aluminum Housing Components.
Defroster on the viewing window
Note: This feature is available on enhanced models
only.
For installations in environments where ice build-up or condensation is a possibility, the enhanced MIC
models have an automatic defrosting function. The
inside of the camera window has a transparent
coating that puts heat directly on the glass. The heat
on the glass helps to decrease and to prevent a buildup of ice as well as condensation on the camera window.
Based on the same technology used to de-ice aircraft
windscreens, the defroster can melt 1 cm (0.4 in.) of
accumulated ice in five minutes in environments as
cold as -25 °C (-13 °F). The defroster starts
automatically at <= 5 °C (41 °F). Even in very cold
environments, where other cameras suffer from
frosted windows, the enhanced MIC models let you
see more and see better.
Both the defroster and the IP67 kit, correctly installed on the connectors in the camera base, help to
decrease condensation on the camera window.
Robust design rated to an industry-leading IP68,
Type 6P, IK10
Subjected and certified to rigorous dust and
immersion tests (IP68, Type 6P) and impact test
(IK10), MIC cameras are perfectly suited for
installation in even the most unforgiving
environments. Anodized aluminum housing and
robust, powder coat paint give unequalled corrosion
protection to each MIC camera. Reliable O-ring seals
completely protect the internal components from the
external environment, meaning that there is no need
to pressurize the camera. To guarantee unit integrity,
the factory tests each MIC camera for leaks before
shipping.
Pan and tilt drive mechanism
The pan and tilt mechanisms use ruggedized, all-metal
intermeshing gears, which are more resistant to shock
and to vibration. Cameras with all-metal gears have a
longer operational life than cameras with plastic gears and drive belt systems of rubber. High-efficiency
motors with brushless positioning control the pan and
tilt movement directly to support continuous
operation without significant wear and tear.
Innovative dual spring-loaded gears on the pan and tilt stage reduce backlash and further improve positional
accuracy. The spring-loaded gears provide a more
stable image compared to belt-driven cameras.
Note: The anti-backlash drivetrain is available on
enhanced models only.
Dual-mode Illumination
The MIC illuminator accessory (sold separately) has IR
LEDs and White light LEDs. The illuminator is fieldinstallable.
The following table identifies the application for each type of LED.
Application Type of illuminator
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 3 | 12
The MIC camera can steer the IR beam dynamically to
match the illumination intensity with the camera’s
field of view according to the zoom level.
Beam intensity is controlled automatically or manually, depending on user preference. Decreasing intensity
reduces overexposure.
The patented, integrated Constant Light technology
supplies a consistent level of illumination during the
life of the product, even in changing temperatures.
White light mode allows operators to capture full
scene details in color or use the light as a deterrent
effect.
H.265 high-efficiency video encoding
The camera is designed on the most efficient and
powerful H.264 and H.265/HEVC encoding platform.
The camera is capable of delivering high-quality and
high-resolution video with very low network load. With
a doubling of encoding efficiency, H.265 is the new
compression standard of choice for IP video
surveillance systems.
More flexibility in streaming capabilities
The camera has three independent encoder streams.
Users can configure each stream individually to
change the video resolution and the frame rate. Users
have two options:
1. Let the camera deliver what is possible based on
its encoding performance across the streams
equally.
2. Select one of the three streams to be prioritized,
for example, to guarantee “quality of service” for
the recording stream.
Users can select the coding standard (H.264/H.265)
for each stream.
Each stream also has its own set of 8 encoder profiles
that users can configure.
Recording and storage management
Control recording management with the
Bosch Video Recording Manager application, or use
the local storage and iSCSI targets in the camera
directly without any recording software.
Use a memory card of a maximum of 2 TB for
recording "at the edge" or for Automatic Network
Replenishment (ANR) technology to improve the
reliability of the recording.
Pre-alarm recording in RAM reduces bandwidth
consumption on the network and extends the
effective life of the memory card.
Intelligent Video Analytics on the edge
The camera includes the latest release of
Intelligent Video Analytics application for use on prepositions.
Designed for mission-critical applications, the video
analytics can reliably detect, track, and analyze
moving objects while suppressing unwanted alarms
from spurious sources in the image, even in harsh
weather conditions.
Advanced tasks like multiple line crossing, loitering,
idle / removed object detection, crowd density
estimation, occupancy and people counting are
available for live alarming and forensic search. Object filters based on size, speed, direction, aspect ratio,
and color can be defined.
A simplified calibration mode reduces installation time significantly, because you only need to enter the
installation height once for each camera, independent
of pre-positions.
After the camera is calibrated, the analytics engine
can automatically classify objects as upright person,
car, bike, or truck.
Support for specific use cases
The video analytics software offers easy setup by
providing optimal default values for several
applications. Calibrate the camera, then simply select
the desired use case and adapt the offered alarm
fields and lines to your field of view. This is available for the following scenarios:
• Intrusion detection: small area, single alarm field
• Intrusion detection: long distance, two alarm fields
have to trigger
• People counting
• Traffic monitoring: wrong way detection
• Traffic monitoring: automatic incident detection
with wrong way detection, pedestrian detection,
slow vehicles, stopped vehicles and dropped
objects
With a future-proof design, the camera can tackle new
use cases by delivering more reliable detections, more
detailed classifications, and thus more insights on
what is happening in a scene. Based on the open
platform principle, these capabilities are leveraged by Intelligent Video Analytics by Bosch as well as by
third-party apps from the Application store from
Security and Safety Things.
Video Analytics while camera is moving
Outside of pre-positions and even while the PTZ
camera is moving, whether on guard tours or
manually, the Intelligent Video Analytics application
can detect and start alarms when objects are in alarm
fields. These alarm fields are defined once across all
PTZ camera views. The camera can automatically
trigger an alarm if any part of a field within the
camera's view becomes active while on a guard tour
sweeping across the monitored areas.
Image Stabilization
Cameras on unstable mounts can move sufficiently to
change the field of view. The higher the zoom value,
the larger the change of the field of view. This change can make images unusable.
The camera has an Image stabilization algorithm that
lets the camera sense continuous vibration. If it
detects vibration, the camera corrects the shaky video
in the vertical axis and the horizontal axis. The result is excellent image clarity and a stable field of view on Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 4 | 12
the monitor. The Image stabilization function is
important to eliminate movement that unstable
camera mounts cause.
Auto Exposure (AE) region and Focus region
With the Auto Exposure (AE) function, the camera
computes the lighting condition of the entire scene.
Then the camera determines the optimum level of iris,
gain, and shutter speed.
In AE region mode, users can designate a specified
area of the scene, based on pre-positions. The camera
computes the lighting condition of the specified area.
Then the camera determines the optimum level of iris,
gain, and shutter speed to get an image.
Focus region mode, unlike normal auto focus mode,
allows users to focus on a specified area of the scene.
Snap to zoom
Drawing a box in the image will trigger the camera to
zoom to the correct position.
Simple set-up
The camera has a very intuitive user interface that
allows fast and easy configuration. Configurable scene
modes are provided with the best settings for a
variety of applications.
• Standard
This mode is optimized for most standard scenes both
indoor and outdoor.
• Sensitivity boost
This mode provides maximum sensitivity in low light
scenes by using longer exposure times, resulting in
bright images even in extreme low light.
• Fast movement
This mode is used for monitoring fast moving objects
like cars in traffic scenes. Motion artifacts are
minimized and the image is optimized for a sharp and
detailed picture in color and monochrome.
• Vibrant
This mode provides a more vivid image with increased
contrast, sharpness, and saturation.
• Color Only (Traffic)
In this mode, the camera does not switch to
monochrome mode at low light levels. The mode is
optimized to minimize motion artifacts and to capture
the color of vehicles/pedestrians and traffic lights,
even at night, for scenarios such as city surveillance
and traffic monitoring.
• Illuminator
This mode gives optimized performance when using
the MIC illuminator accessory.
Custom mode #1 and Custom mode #2 give users the
option to customize 2 scene modes of their own.
Data security
Special measures are necessary to ensure the highest
level of security for device access and data transport.
On initial setup, the camera is only accessible over
secure channels. A three-level password protection
with security recommendations lets users customize
device access. Unsecure ports are disabled. Firmware
updates are only possible with Bosch-signed firmware
files. The Embedded Login Firewall improves
robustness against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks.
The software sealing functionality can detect changes
in a configuration. HTTPS or other secure protocols
prevent access to the web browser and the viewing
client. With the feature of secure and verified boot,
you can trust all executed code in the device.
TPM functionality is provided by “Secure
Element” (dedicated AES/DES/PKI crypto coprocessor) that:
• Is independently certified with Assurance Level
(EAL) 6+ based on Common Criteria for Information
Technology Security Evaluation [out of 7 levels
according to ISO/IEC 15408]
• Has cryptography with a maximum of 4096 bit RSA
keys for TLS (maximum version 1.3) and device
identity (Future-proof until 2031 and beyond)
[according to NIST Special Publication 800-57, part
1, page 56]
The advanced certificate handling offers:
• Self-signed, unique certificates automatically
created when required
• Client and server certificates for authentication
• Client certificates for proof of authenticity
• Certificates with encrypted private keys
Only trusted and authenticated third-party apps can
be uploaded. A safe sandbox environment enables the
secure execution of trusted third-party software.
There is full transparency on individual app
requirements to access system resources (listed in
the Application store from Security and Safety
Things).
Software sealing
After camera configuration is set and should not be
changed, system administrators can enable software
protection that seals the camera configuration. Any
change of the sealing status and any change to static
configuration, accidentally or intentional, will break
the seal. The camera then sends an alarm message
that the video management system can use to start an
appropriate alarm scenario. The camera creates a
separate log file of all changes that have an effect on the sealing status.
System integration and ONVIF conformance
The camera conforms to the specifications for ONVIF
Profile S and ONVIF Profile G. (ONVIF is the acronym
for Open Network Video Interface Forum.) For H.265
configuration, the camera also supports Media Service
2, which is part of ONVIF Profile T. Compliance with
these standards guarantees interoperability between
network video products, regardless of manufacturer.
Third-party integrators can easily access the internal
feature set of the camera for integration into large
projects. For more information, see the Bosch
Integration Partner Program (IPP) website
(ipp.boschsecurity.com).
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 5 | 12
Cameras with this platform are intended to be
backwards compatible with existing VMS integrations.
Compatibility of the app feature set that is available in the Application store is the responsibility of the app
developer and of Security and Safety Things.
Ease of installation
The camera has been designed for quick and easy
installation, a key feature from Bosch IP video security products.
The camera supports mounting in upright, inverted, or
canted orientation. The on-site canting functionality
lets installers tilt down the upper section of the
camera at a 35° angle. At this angle, operators can see the scene directly below the camera.
Power options
The camera can be powered by a network compliant
to High Power-over-Ethernet using a Bosch model of
High PoE Midspan (sold separately). With this
configuration, only a single cable connection
(Cat5e/Cat6 Shielded Twisted Pair (STP)) is needed
to view, to power, and to control the camera.
For maximum reliability, the camera can operate with
a redundant power system of a High PoE Midspan and
a separate 24 VAC power source connected
simultaneously. If either the High PoE or 24 VAC
power source fails, the camera seamlessly transitions
to the remaining power source.
The 60 W midspan can supply power to models
without an illuminator accessory. The 95 W midspans
can supply power to MIC cameras with or without the
illuminator accessory.
The camera can also accept a standard 24 VAC power
source if a High PoE network interface will not be
used. User-supplied wiring must be in compliance
with electrical codes (Class 2 power levels).
Refer to the table in the Installation/configuration
notes section for more information.
Camera Diagnostics
The camera has several built-in sensors / advanced
diagnostics that display warnings on the camera’s
OSD about the health of the camera. The diagnostics
log records the events such as:
• Low voltage - a drop in incoming power below the
level where the camera becomes non-functional
• High temperature - the internal temperature
exceeds specifications
• Low temperature - the internal temperature
exceeds minimum levels
• High humidity - the internal humidity exceeds 70%
• High vibration - the acceptable level of acceleration forces was exceeded
• Total hours of camera operation
• Illuminator aging history
Certain events also appear on the camera’s OSD.
These diagnostic records are available for the
installation or service technician to review.
Unsurpassed reliability
As with all Bosch products, the camera is designed
using the industry’s best design process and is
subjected to the most stringent testing standards
such as HALT (highly accelerated life testing), which
pushes the limits of products to ensure reliability
throughout their lifetime.
Project Assistant
Project Assistant by Bosch is the market’s most easyto-use app for initial installation and basic configuration of IP cameras. Off-site and without
connection to the camera, basic configurations can be
created and then shared with colleagues. On-site,
these pre-configurations can be pushed onto the
camera, making the installation procedure easier and
less time-consuming. Cameras previously configured
can be integrated as well. The app allows easy viewing
and adjustment of the camera's field of view. The app
automatically generates a comprehensive report of the
commissioned cameras.
Certifications and approvals
For a full list of all related certifications/standards, refer to the Product Tests Report, available on the
online catalog, on the Documents tab of the product
page for your device. If the document is unavailable on the product page, contact your sales representative.
!
"#$
%
&
'
&
(
)*
+,*
*
-
.
/
),
/
)0)
"
%!
$
/
,0
+(
,0
(
+
!
%
1*
*
+2*
/*
+
.
1
30,3)
1
3)*
4
0 2/5+20040
/4
3)'
/
30,3)
/
3)
/
300
2/5+20040
/4
30,3))
30,3)
406
3)
4066
300
40
#7 1*
*
*
#*
2*
8*
&*
9+
* Except the Steady-state test (6.2.2.2) for Australia
** Except the Steady-state test (5.4.10.2.3) for
Australia
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 6 | 12
Installation/configuration notes
In the table below, an "X" identifies the power source
options for MIC IP camera models.
#
%
: :
#
%
: : :
6 .
08
)82*
2
%
%
%
Mounting Bracket Options
Bosch designed MIC IP 7100i cameras for use in
outdoor applications. In an enclosed installation area
(for example, in a foundry, near a furnace, etc.),
temperatures outside of the camera might exceed
+65 °C (+149 °F). If you install a camera in an
enclosed area, make sure that the operating
temperature of the camera is a maximum of +60 °C
(+140 °F). Make sure that air circulates around the
camera to supply cooling.
The following figure identifies the optional mounting
brackets for MIC cameras. Refer to the datasheets of
each bracket for details. Some brackets may not be
available in all regions.
Fig. 1: Optional Mounts, MIC IP 7100i series
)
7
0
7
, (
7 3 +
%
For more options, refer to the MIC IP cameras
Accessory Quick Selection Guide (https://
media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/pb/media/
support_1/tools/
mic_ip_cameras_accessory_quick_selection_guide.pdf).
Dimensional Drawings
3.5 mm
(0.14 in.)
400.34 mm
(15.76 ni .)
287.93 mm
(11.34 in.)
210.65mm
(8.29 in)
374.5 mm
(14.7 in.)
260.25 mm
(10.2 in.)
Fig. 2: Canted
Technical specifications
)50
4 #;+
-
(
"(
<$
),'
<
)'
"04)0
#($
,<
=
>?
343
)
?
&)4
&4
&
-
% 04)@
4,@
&
2
%
-
*
2
%
-
= )0<
!5
2
",)A*
-
!
B*
)5,*
&)43*
,
$
4'
<
#
4),
<
!"
#
9 !
)0
C
#
303'3
(
$
)3
C
Firmware
(
(
((),
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 7 | 12
"$%& "
$'(
WIDE 1X TELE 30X Scene
width
0D
<5
"D
<5
$
3D
"003D
$
0D
"3',D
$
''D
"0,D
$
; -
3,D
<5
")D
<5
$
0'D
"D
$
,)D
"0'03D
$
,)D
")0D
$
)0D
<5
",D
<5
$
)D
"3D
$
)D
"),'D
$
)D
"D
$
0D
<5
"'3D
<5
$
'D
"0,D
$
0)D
"3D
$
D
"03D
$
Additional Camera Settings
#
-
%
-
2
<
*
&
E
2E*
&
<*
2
9
=
-
+
+
"2+$
)5)
)53*
+
/
"+/$ FDC
C7
"C$
; │ ;
│
2
<
"2$
0
A
)*
A
2G
*
2 C
9*
<
2G
*
#
*
+
2 *
+
!5
#
│ │ 2
-
-
!
%
-
%
!
%
4
/
!
/
+ *
3*
*
*
)0*
)3
*
+*
%
0
G
(
-!
#7 ,0
-
!
(
-!
#7?
<
(
?
%
,*
?
!
%
4
H2
H
*
-
7
4
H#
H
*
-
(
-!
#7
%
-
4
8
#7 0
-
!
8
#7
" 7
-
*
*
!
*
4$
(
03
(
*
%
0
G
E
G
G
%
"0$*
,
.
(
")$*
03
-!*
")$
=
%
03
+
*
=
*
*
&
*
E *
*
(
*
(
*
*
+
*
I *
2
<
*
H
H
%
"$
-
%
"$4
*
!
-*
-
-*
-
*
7
- 4
8
7
4
%
!
4
Video content analysis
2 !
!
D8
D2 !
;
5 E
82
5 (
)
)3
2
%
Alarm rules
(combinable)
2 !
J*
; J
*
*
*
-
*
*
&%
*
J*
-
J*
*
;
!*
%
*
*
+
!
*
G
Object filters
*
+
=*
2
-5
*
+ *
*
; J
"1
*
C
7*
*
G
7$*
2
G
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 8 | 12
Network
+ 58
9403*
9403
"+;5
)3$*
#I(E*
I(E
+
,
!
*
%
-
-
82
-!
%
)
*+,- ,
)
9 )0
<
)
'0
9 )0
<
'0
,0
+ '3
<
,0
0
+ )0
<
0
( (-*
(-3*
1(*
G(*
9GG(*
9GG(+*
G(5G(*
E#(
8058,*
#(*
#(-3*
G+(*
&G(*
2(*
9(*
2((2
"2
(*
7
$*
/G(
"+/G($*
/+*
/+-3*
/+
"! /+4
*
9;+G4*
4$*
+#G(*
++*
1( (
"++($*
+-
"K+$*
(*
+;2(*
<L*
92(*
Note: Dropbox is a trademark of Dropbox, Inc.
)C2+G:5)
CG*
*
5
<*
2 #:
!
G+
)4*
G+
)4)*
G+
)40*
2+)0*
2+03
I
E;(
(*
C(*
CC(
! ,
.
0'
"!
$
! ;/8&
(
D+*
;/8&
(
E*
;/8&
(
G
The table that follows shows the average typical
optimized bitrate, in kbits/s, for different frame rates:
FPS 9403 9403
, 0' 03
) )3 )03
0 0 ,)
) 03 )
The average is for the highest resolution of the
camera.
Actual bitrate may vary depending on the scene,
picture settings, and encoder profile settings.
Mechanical
-
1 C
*
5
-
+
1
*
-*
(
,3@
G
2 0@
"%
%
$
G
"
%
$
1
.
@
M@?
-.
@
M@?
.
@
M3@
8
(
+ 40@5
)0@5
8
G
+ 40@5
@5
+
(
)0@5
(
2
! M54@
(
(
5 G
>
N
2
/
O3
C
Electrical
-
0),
82*
53
9=?
9 (%
-
38
(%
"!
$*
%
(%
"!
$*
%
'
*
0
82
P,4)2
*
9 (
P)42
9 (
#
0
82 %
4
%
*
!
%
%
4
+
C
%*
*
%7
"
2Q
+
4$
Communications / Software Control
+
5 8
%
%
R
!
S
%
T
4U*
C
#
*
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 9 | 12
C
8
#
+!
"C8#+$*
8 D+
!D
"8+$*
(J
2
*
!
%
+
%
1 /%7
%
Local Storage
#!
1
+
"<
0 GC$
"
!$
.
+ !
+
%
7
User Connections
E
%
%
-
*
%
I
3
9 (
#
"/(3)C$
9 (
#
"/()2
/()$*
0),
82*
53
9=?
&
I
-
*
%
I
9 (
#
"/()2
/()$6
0),
82*
53
9=?
&
I
(%*
0
82
" %
!$
8
I
)C2+G:
6 #
/()2
/()
9 (
4
Audio
E4'))*
22*
)3
"
-
$
+
/
"+/$
2
.
'
C2
2
.
C2
# G%%!*
<
1
.
),7
!
5 )48*
<
.
48
04
*
!
Environmental
The customer is responsible for making sure that the
installation complies with the specified stresses that
follow.
Note: Unit includes internal heater and fan.
(
5+
30
(33
5 (3
5 G!
3(
"
$
%
#2*
#
%
%
#+24
(3'
"
$
%
(3'
A
"#A(3'(A$
4
G
7
T
%
C
4
<
#
"A
5
$
30030
A)
"<
%
%$
;
@
M3
@
"
@&
M)
@&$
/#2
G+
00,
"0$*
D04)44)
4D04)
,DV
M'DV
",DV&
M)3DV&$
)
+
G
@
"
@&$
"T
3
%
(G>
4$
+
@
M'
@
"
@&
M)
@&$
9
! )B
+
%
)3)
7 ")
$
2
-
%
%
0)
7 ")
$4
2
%
%
0'
75
")3
$4
-
(J
2
"(2$
M
2.
4'0
W
"4'
W$
M
2
M
.
4
W
"40
W$
8
3303.
))
9=*
)4E
"4E
$*
)5W*
0
+%
/#2
G+0
+
0404.
,
9=*
4E
#+G)3')2
+
7
3300'*
G
.
+
7*
*
))
*
E
"0E
$*
-
7
"
7
<
$
/#2
G+
0 +
0404
+
7
" $
G
9
%-
))
*
)E
(%
+-
G
/#2
G+0
+
0404'40
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 10 | 12
(%
/#2
G+0
+
0404)
#+G)
#
!
+
G
#
#+G)E*
)4
9 G
?
#
+G)E*
04
%
G
?
#
+G)E*
,4
G
+
7?
#
+G)E*
4
+
?
#
+G)E*
34
?
#+G)E*
4
+
&
?
#+G)E*
)4
+
+
#
+ !
"
G$
+;
)03.
#
"9
$?
2
9
Construction
"
<
9 <
$
!
.
Upright, Inverted.
0'4,
<
4,
<
0)43
"))4,
4 <
)4'3
4 <
40
4$
Canted.
0340
")40
4$
<
,'4
")4'
4$
4'
A
")40
$
% &
"%
!$
!
OX
D@
")D@&$4
#
2
=
%
*
%
+
"
-
$
;
"
!$
;
!
C7
"2
$
"2
)$
E!
"2
')$
+
&
*
%
*
Dimensional Drawings
3.5 mm
(0.14 in.)
400.34 mm
(15.76 ni .)
287.93 mm
(11.34 in.)
210.65mm
(8.29 in)
374.5 mm
(14.7 in.)
260.25 mm
(10.2 in.)
Fig. 3: Canted
Ordering information
MIC-7602-Z30BR-OC PTZ 2MP 30x starlight enhanced
black OC
Ruggedized PTZ camera; 1080p, 30x, starlight imaging,
defroster, SD card slot.
open camera platform
AI-based traffic detection for traffic monitoring
Black (RAL 9005). Sand finish.
Order number MIC-7602-Z30BR-OC | F.01U.382.397
MIC-7602-Z30WR-OC PTZ 2MP 30x starlight enhanced
white OC
Ruggedized PTZ camera; 1080p, 30x, starlight imaging,
defroster, SD card slot.
open camera platform
AI-based traffic detection for traffic monitoring
White (RAL 9010). Sand finish.
Available in specific regions only.
Order number MIC-7602-Z30WR-OC | F.01U.382.398
MIC-7602-Z30GR-OC PTZ 2MP 30x starlight enhanced
gray OC
Ruggedized PTZ camera; 1080p, 30x, starlight imaging,
defroster, SD card slot.
open camera platform
AI-based traffic detection for traffic monitoring
Grey (RAL 7001) color. Sand finish.
Available in specific regions only.
Order number MIC-7602-Z30GR-OC | F.01U.382.399
Accessories
MIC-ILB-400 Illuminator, white-IR light, black
Illuminator accessory for certain MIC IP cameras, IR
Light (850 nm/940 nm) + White light LEDs
Black (RAL 9005). Sand finish.
Order number MIC-ILB-400 | F.01U.370.191
MIC-ILW-400 Illuminator, white-IR light, white
Illuminator accessory for certain MIC IP cameras, IR
Light (850 nm/940 nm) + White light LEDs
White (RAL 9010). Sand finish.
Order number MIC-ILW-400 | F.01U.370.192
MIC-ILG-400 Illuminator, white-IR light, gray
Illuminator accessory for certain MIC IP cameras, IR
Light (850 nm/940 nm) + White light LEDs
Grey (RAL 7001) color. Sand finish.
Order number MIC-ILG-400 | F.01U.370.193
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 11 | 12
NPD-6001B Midspan, 60W, single port, AC in
60 W indoor midspan for cameras without illuminators
Order number NPD-6001B | F.01U.347.358
F.01U.392.458
NPD-9501A Midspan, 95W, single port, AC in
95 W indoor midspan for AUTODOME 7000 and MIC IP
cameras with or without illuminators
Order number NPD-9501A | F.01U.286.250
F.01U.392.336
NPD-9501-E Midspan 95W 1 port outdoor
95 W outdoor midspan for AUTODOME 7000 and MIC IP
cameras with or without illuminators
Order number NPD-9501-E | F.01U.365.279
VG4-A-PSU1 PSU, 120VAC, for AUTODOME, MIC7000
Power supply for AUTODOME 7000, MIC IP cameras
without illuminators.
120VAC in, 24VAC out
Order number VG4-A-PSU1 | F.01U.261.377
F.01U.009.667 F.01U.081.593
VG4-A-PSU2 Power supply, 230VAC, AUTODOME,
MIC7000
Power supply for AUTODOME 7000, MIC IP cameras
without illuminators.
230VAC in, 24VAC out
Order number VG4-A-PSU2 | F.01U.009.668
F.01U.096.639 F.01U.097.433 F.01U.081.604
F.01U.261.378
MIC-ALM-WAS-24 Interface box, alarm, washer pump,
24VAC
Grey polycarbonate interface box for alarms and washer
pump connections for MIC IP cameras
Order number MIC-ALM-WAS-24 | F.01U.286.248
MIC-DCA-HB Deep conduit mount, M25 holes, black
DCA mount for MIC7000 family and MIC IP fusion 9000i
cameras. Aluminum. Two M25 holes for conduit/cable
glands.
Black (RAL 9005) color.
Order number MIC-DCA-HB | F.01U.286.244
MIC-DCA-HBA Deep conduit mount, M25 holes, black
DCA mount for MIC7000 and MIC IP fusion 9000i
cameras. Aluminum. Two M25 holes for conduit/cable
glands. Includes an conduit adapter (male M25 to female 3/4" NPT). Available in specific regions only.
Black (RAL 9005) color.
Order number MIC-DCA-HBA | F.01U.303.166
MIC-DCA-HW Deep conduit mount, two M25 holes,
white
DCA mount for MIC7000 family and MIC IP fusion 9000i
cameras. Aluminum. Two M25 holes for conduit/cable
glands.
White (RAL 9010) color.
Order number MIC-DCA-HW | F.01U.286.245
MIC-DCA-HWA Deep conduit mount, M25 holes,white
DCA mount for MIC7000 and MIC IP fusion 9000i
cameras. Aluminum. Two M25 holes for conduit/cable
glands. Includes an conduit adapter (male M25 to female 3/4" NPT). Available in specific regions only.
White (RAL 9010) color.
Order number MIC-DCA-HWA | F.01U.303.167
MIC-DCA-HG Deep conduit mount, two M25 holes, grey
DCA mount for MIC7000 family and MIC IP fusion 9000i
cameras. Aluminum. Two M25 holes for conduit/cable
glands.
Grey (RAL 7001) color.
Order number MIC-DCA-HG | F.01U.286.246
MIC-DCA-HGA Deep conduit mount, M25 holes,grey
DCA mount for MIC7000 and MIC IP fusion 9000i
cameras. Aluminum. Two M25 holes for conduit/cable
glands. Includes an conduit adapter (male M25 to female 3/4" NPT). Available in specific regions only.
Grey (RAL 7001) color.
Order number MIC-DCA-HGA | F.01U.303.168
MIC-WMB-BD Wall mount bracket , black
Wall mount bracket, black sand finish (RAL9005)
Order number MIC-WMB-BD | F.01U.143.155
MIC-WMB-WD Wall mount bracket, white
Wall mount bracket, white sand finish (RAL9010)
Order number MIC-WMB-WD | F.01U.143.156
MIC-WMB-MG Wall mount for rugged PTZ camera, grey
Wall Mount Bracket.
Grey (RAL 7001) color. Sand finish.
Order number MIC-WMB-MG | F.01U.296.299
MIC-SCA-BD Shallow conduit adapter, black sand
Shallow conduit adapter for a MIC-WMB, a MIC-PMB, or
a MIC-SPR, black sand finish (RAL9005)
Order number MIC-SCA-BD | F.01U.143.153
MIC-SCA-WD Shallow conduit adapter, white sand
Shallow conduit adapter for a MIC-WMB, a MIC-PMB, or
a MIC-SPR mount, white sand finish (RAL9010)
Order number MIC-SCA-WD | F.01U.143.154
MIC-SCA-MG Conduit adapter, shallow, grey sand
Shallow conduit adapter for a MIC-WMB, a MIC-PMB, or
a MIC-SPR.
Grey (RAL 7001) color. Sand finish.
Order number MIC-SCA-MG | F.01U.296.297
MIC-PMB Pole mount bracket
Pole mount bracket (includes 2 x 455 mm stainless steel banding straps for pole diameters 75 to 145 mm)
Order number MIC-PMB | F.01U.087.283
MIC-CMB-BD Corner mount bracket, black
Corner mount bracket, black sand finish (RAL9005)
Order number MIC-CMB-BD | F.01U.143.158
MIC-CMB-WD Corner mount bracket, white
Corner mount bracket, white sand finish (RAL9010)
Order number MIC-CMB-WD | F.01U.143.159
MIC-CMB-MG Corner mount bracket, grey sand
Corner mount bracket.
Grey (RAL 7001) color. Sand finish.
Order number MIC-CMB-MG | F.01U.296.296
MIC-SPR-BD Wall mount spreader plate, black sand
Aluminum spreader plate suitable for brickwork surface
mounting, black sand finish (RAL9005)
Order number MIC-SPR-BD | F.01U.143.164
MIC-SPR-WD Wall mount spreader plate, white sand
Aluminum spreader plate suitable for brickwork surface
mounting, white sand finish (RAL9010)
Order number MIC-SPR-WD | F.01U.143.163
Video - MIC inteox 7100i - 2MP OC 12 | 12
MIC-SPR-MG Wall mount spreader plate, grey sand
Aluminum spreader plate suitable for brickwork surface
mounting.
Grey (RAL 7001) color. Sand finish.
Order number MIC-SPR-MG | F.01U.296.298
MIC-IP67-5PK Connector kit, IP67, 5pcs
5-pack weather protection kit for MIC7000 cameras.
Provides an IP67-rated barrier against dust or moisture.
Recommended when MIC camera is mounted directly to
installation surface (instead of onto a MIC-DCA or MIC
wall mount).
Order number MIC-IP67-5PK | F.01U.294.750
MIC-7100I-SNSHLD-W Sunshield for MIC 7100i white
Sunshield for MIC IP ultra 7100i camera models
Order number MIC-7100I-SNSHLD-W | F.01U.353.591
MIC-M25XNPT34 Adapter, M25 to 3/4"NPT, stainless
steel
Stainless Steel M25 to ¾” NPT thread adapter
Order number MIC-M25XNPT34 | F.01U.301.975
Services
EWE-MIC7IF-IW 12mths full wrty ext MIC IP 7000i
12 months warranty extension
Order number EWE-MIC7IF-IW | F.01U.382.951
Represented by:
Europe, Middle East, Africa: Germany: North America: Asia-Pacific:
Bosch Security Systems B.V.
P.O. Box 80002
5600 JB Eindhoven, The Netherlands
Phone: + 31 40 2577 284
[email protected]
emea.boschsecurity.com
Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH
Robert-Bosch-Ring 5
85630 Grasbrunn
Germany
www.boschsecurity.com
Bosch Security Systems, LLC
130 Perinton Parkway
Fairport, New York, 14450, USA
Phone: +1 800 289 0096
Fax: +1 585 223 9180
[email protected]
www.boschsecurity.us
Robert Bosch (SEA) Pte Ltd, Security Systems
11 Bishan Street 21
Singapore 573943
Phone: +65 6571 2808
Fax: +65 6571 2699
[email protected]
www.boschsecurity.asia
Data subject to change without notice | 202106030041 | V5 | June 03, 2021 © Bosch Security Systems 2021 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION camera solutions
C3946 / REVISED 11-8-16
International Standards
Organization Registered Firm;
ISO 9001 Quality System
Spectra® Enhanced Series IP PTZ Domes
HIGH-SPEED PTZ, 20X & 30X MODELS, FULL HD, WDR, LOW-LIGHT PERFORMANCE Product Features
• SureVision 3.0 Technology, Including:
– 130 dB Wide Dynamic Range (WDR)
– Advanced Low Light Down to 0.03 LUX on Select Models
– Anti-Bloom Technology
– 3D Noise Filtering
– Enhanced Tone Mapping
• Up to Full HD 1080p
• Up to 60 Images per Second (ips)
• Power over Ethernet (HPoE and PoE+), 24 VAC, 24 VDC
• Three Automatic Defog Options
• Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS)
• Built-in Analytics Suite
• Vandal Resistant IK10 Smoked or Clear Bubble
• Up to 32 GB Edge Storage with Micro SD Card
• Compatible with Pelco and Third-Party Video Systems
• ONVIF Profile S and Profile G Conformant
• 3-Year Warranty and Support
Top of the Line IP Performance
Pelco’s Spectra® Series of high speed PTZ domes provide top tier image quality and performance. They include valuable embedded features that enhance the value of the product. Low latency video and control make the camera incredibly easy to use.
Full High Definition SureVision 3.0 Cameras
Spectra Enhanced has long provided Full HD 1080p 20x and 30x optical zoom cameras that run at up to 60 frames per second and provide 130dB of True Wide Dynamic Range (WDR). With Pelco’s latest product evolution a powerful new camera option is now available that features the same powerful WDR capabilities as before but now with the addition of Pelco’s latest SureVision 3.0 low light performance. In addition to 130dB of True WDR SureVision 3.0 adds a new level of low light performance that is up to twenty times better than base Spectra Enhanced models. The new SureVision 3.0 camera is available in both the 20x and 30x optical zoom in select models.
Embedded Features
Included in all models are a full suite of built in video analytics including: Abandoned Object, Adaptive Motion Detection, AutoTracker, Camera Sabotage, Directional Motion, Loitering Detection, Object Counting, Object Removal, and Stopped Vehicle.
Spectra Enhanced also allows for up to 32 window blanking privacy zones that are configurable with custom blurring options. Three levels of Image Defog provide options for enhancing the image on foggy or rainy days. Five White Balance modes are available for overcoming difficult lighting conditions day and night. A Vivid Imaging mode can be enabled to automatically increases color saturation and sharpening. Spectra Enhanced supports up to 32GB of onboard local storage (not supplied) that is easily accessible through the ONVIF Profile G protocol or FTP.
Intuitive Design
Spectra Enhanced features the same ease of installation and maintenance that you have come to expect from Spectra. Each dome system consists of a back-box, a dome drive, and an IK10 rated lower dome. There is a choice of five form factors: in-ceiling, environmental in-ceiling, pendant, environmental pendant, and stainless steel environmental pendant.
VMS Integration
Spectra Enhanced easily connects to Pelco IP and hybrid video systems such as VideoXpert, Endura 2.0 (or later), and Digital Sentry
7.3 (or later). The camera is also compatible with Digital Sentry NVS (DS NVS), a full-featured video management software, which is available as a free download at www.pelco.com. DS NVS includes four free Pelco IP licenses and allows for the management of video from up to 64 cameras.
Pelco endeavors to be the most open and integrated camera provider in the industry and as a part of that effort Spectra Enhanced is integrated with a long and ever-growing list of 3rd party software and Video Management Systems (VMS).
BACK BOX FEATURES
NOTE: VALUES IN PARENTHESES ARE INCHES; ALL OTHERS ARE CENTIMETERS.
In-Ceiling (Indoor)
• Single Back Box for Suspended or Hard Ceiling Applications with Light Gray Trim Ring, RAL9002
• Requires 13.35 cm (5.25 in.) Space Above Ceiling and 8.25 cm (3.25 in.) Below • Minimum Ceiling Thickness 1.27 cm (0.50 in.); Maximum 4.45 cm (1.75 in.) • Aluminum Construction, IK10 Rated Nylon Bubble
• Suitable for Use in Environmental Air Handling Spaces • 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F) Sustained Operating Temperature Environmental In-Ceiling
• Single Back Box, RAL9011, for Hard Ceiling Applications • Requires 11.18 cm (4.40 in.) Space Above Ceiling;10.92 cm (4.30 in.) Below • Type 4X and IP66
• Includes Heater and Blower
• Minimum Ceiling Thickness 1.27 cm (0.50 in.); Maximum 4.45 cm (1.75 in.) • Aluminum Construction, IK10 Rated Nylon Bubble
• –45° to 50°C (–50° to 122°F) Sustained Operating Temperature Standard Pendant
• Standard Pendant Available in Black or Light Gray Finish, RAL9002 • Aluminum Construction, IK10 Rated Nylon Bubble
• Uses 1 1/2-inch NPT Thread
• –5° to 50°C (23° to 122°F) Sustained Operating Temperature Environmental Pendant
• Environmental Pendant Available in Light Gray Finish, RAL9002 • Aluminum Construction, IK10 Rated Nylon Bubble
• Type 4X and IP66
• Uses 1 1/2-inch NPT Thread
• Includes Sun Shield, Heater, and Blower
• –45° to 50°C (–50°F to 122°F) Sustained Operating Temperature Stainless Steel Environmental Pendant
• Stainless Steel Environmental Pendant Available in Light Gray Finish, RAL9002 • All Stainless Steel Construction, IK10 Rated Nylon Bubble • Type 4X and IP66
• Uses 1 1/2-inch NPT Thread
• Includes Sun Shield, Heater, and Blower
• –45° to 50°C (–50° to 122°F) Sustained Operating Temperature
13.2 (5.2)
19.0 (7.5)
20.8 (8.2)
15.0 (5.9)
9.2 (3.6)
25.2 (9.9)
11.2 (4.4)
15.0 (5.9)
21.8 (8.6)
11.2 (4.4)
21.8 (8.6)
15.0 (5.9)
28.2 (11.1)
15.0 (5.9)
28.2 (11.1)
23.8 (9.4)
15.0 (5.9)
28.2 (11.1)
23.6 (9.3)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAMERA/OPTICS
SOFTWARE FEATURES
• 256 presets
• 16 tours
• ±0.1° preset accuracy
• Multilingual menus (English, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, German, French, Russian, Turkish, Arabic, Simplified Chinese, and Korean) • Password protection
• 32 window blanks, configurable in size, with 5 window blur options • “Auto Flip” feature rotates dome 180° at bottom of tilt travel • Configurable park with actions
• Proportional pan/tilt continually decreases pan/tilt speeds in proportion to depth of zoom
• Pelco analytics including nine user-configurable behaviors • Image Defog modes
PELCO ANALYTICS BEHAVIORS
Spectra Enhanced includes nine user-configurable behaviors. The camera is capable of running up to three behaviors simultaneously; although, the number of behaviors is limited to the available processing power of the camera and the type of analytic being used. • Abandoned Object: Detects objects placed within a defined zone and triggers an alarm if the object remains in the zone longer than the user-defined time allows. An airport terminal is a typical installation for this behavior. This behavior can also detect objects left behind at an ATM, signaling possible card skimming.
• Adaptive Motion Detection: Detects and tracks objects that enter a scene and then triggers an alarm when the objects enter a user-defined zone. This behavior is primarily used in outdoor environments with light traffic to reduce the number of false alarms caused by environmental changes.
• AutoTracker: Detects and tracks movement in the field of view. When the AutoTracker behavior is configured, the system automatically pans and tilts to follow the moving object until the object stops or disappears from the monitored area.
• Camera Sabotage: Detects contrast changes in the field of view. An alarm is triggered if the lens is obstructed by spray paint, a cloth, or a lens cap. Any unauthorized repositioning of the camera also triggers an alarm.
• Directional Motion: Generates an alarm in a high traffic area when a person or object moves in a specified direction. Typical installations for this behavior include an airport gate or tunnel where cameras can detect objects moving in the opposite direction of the normal flow of traffic or an individual entering through an exit door.
• Loitering Detection: Identifies when people or vehicles remain in a defined zone longer than the user-defined time allows. This behavior is effective in real-time notification of suspicious behavior around ATMs, stairwells, and school grounds.
• Object Counting: Counts the number of objects that enter a defined zone. This behavior can be used to count the number of people at a store entrance/exit or inside a store where the traffic is light. This behavior is based on tracking and does not count people in a crowded setting. • Object Removal: Triggers an alarm if an object is removed from a user-defined zone. This behavior is ideal for customers who want to detect the removal of high value objects, such as painting from a wall or a statue from a pedestal.
• Stopped Vehicle: Detects vehicles stopped near a sensitive area longer than the user-defined time allows. This behavior is idea for airport curbside drop-offs, parking enforcement, suspicious parking, traffic lane breakdowns, and vehicles waiting at gates.
Specification 20X 20X Low Light 30X 30X Low Light
Sensor Type 1/2.8-inch Type Exmor CMOS Sensor 1/2.8-inch Type Exmor CMOS Sensor Optical Zoom 20X 30X
Digital Zoom 12X 12X
Maximum Resolution 1920 x 1080 1920 x 1080
Lens f/1.6 ~ f/3.5, focal length 4.7 mm (wide) ~ 94.0 mm (tele) f/1.6 ~ f/4.7, focal length 4.3 mm (wide) ~ 129.0 mm (tele) Horizontal Angle of View 55.4° (wide) ~ 2.9° (tele) 59.5° wide - 3.3° tele 59.5° (wide) ~ 2.1° (tele) 63.7° wide - 2.3° tele Aspect Ratio 16:9 16:9
Light Sensitivity
Color (33 ms) 0.20 lux 0.03 lux 0.20 lux 0.03 lux
Color (250 ms) 0.025 lux 0.008 lux 0.025 lux 0.008 lux
Mono (33 ms) 0.06 lux 0.004 lux 0.06 lux 0.004 lux
Mono (250 ms) 0.008 lux 0.001 lux 0.008 lux 0.001 lux
Note: Sensitivity in lux for 90% reflectance, f/1.6 (wide angle), 50 dB gain at 30 IRE (30% of signal level) with Sensitivity Boost OFF; 4X improvement to sensitivity with Sensitivity Boost ON Day/Night Capabilities Yes Yes
Shutter Range 1/1 ~ 1/10,000 sec 1/1 ~ 1/10,000 sec
Signal-to-Noise Ratio >50dB >50dB
IR Cut Filter Yes Yes
Wide Dynamic Range 130 dB 130 dB
Iris Control Auto iris with manual override Auto iris with manual override Backlight Compensation Yes Yes
Automatic Gain Control Yes Yes
Active Noise Filtering Yes 3D Noise Filtering Yes 3D Noise Filtering Electronic Image Stabilization
(EIS) Yes No Yes
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VIDEO
Video Encoding H.264 High, Main, or Base profiles and
MJPEG
Video Streams Up to 2 simultaneous streams; the second
stream is variable based on the setup of the
primary stream
Frame Rate Up to 60, 50, 30, 25, 15, 12.5, 10, 8.333, 7.5, 6, 5, 3, 2.5, 2, 1 (depending on the coding,
resolution, and stream configuration)
Available Resolutions
NETWORK
Supported Protocols TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast, Multicast IGMP), UPnP, DNS, DHCP, RTP, RTSP, NTP, IPv4, IPv6*,
SNMP v2c/v3, QoS, HTTP, HTTPS, SSH, SSL,
SMTP, FTP, and 802.1x (EAP)
Users
Unicast Up to 20 simultaneous users depending on
resolution settings (2 guaranteed streams)
Multicast Unlimited users H.264
Security Access Password protected
Software Interface Web browser view and setup
Pelco System Integration Endura 2.0 (or later)
Digital Sentry 7.3 (or later)
Open API Pelco API or ONVIF Profile G and Profile S
Mobile Application Integrated to Pelco Mobile App
Video Motion Detection Simple motion detection and camera sabotage
Local Storage 32 GB SD Card;
Capture 1–5–10 second video clips on camera
sabotage, motion detection, or alarm input;
record video continuously in the case of
network outage with option to overwrite;
access video through FTP protocol and ONVIF
Profile G
MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Processor Intel® Core™ i3 Processor, 2.4 GHz
Operating System Windows® 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) with
DirectX® 11, Windows XP Service Pack 3 with
DirectX 9.0c, or Mac® OS X 10.4 (or later)
Memory 4 GB RAM
Network Interface Card 100 megabits (or greater)
Monitor Minimum of 1024 x 768 resolution, 16- or
32-bit pixel color resolution
Web Browser Internet Explorer® 8.0(or later) or Firefox 3.5 (or later); Internet Explorer 8.0 (or later) is
recommended for configuring analytics
Media Player Pelco Media Player†
or QuickTime® 7.6.5 for
Windows XP and Windows 7; or QuickTime
7.6.4 for Mac OS X 10.4 (or later)
ANALYTICS
Required Systems for Pelco Analytics
Pelco Interface WS5200 Advanced System Management
Software on an Endura 2.0 (or later) system
Open API The Pelco API can transmit behavior alarm
data to third-party applications, available at
pdn.pelco.com
GENERAL
Construction
Back Box Aluminum
Dome Drive Aluminum, thermo plastic
Lower Dome Nylon
Stainless Steel Construction
Back Box 316 stainless steel; gray, polyurethane
powder coated finish
Lower Dome 316 stainless steel; black, polyurethane
powder coated finish
Bubble Nylon, clear or smoked
Light Attenuation
Smoked f/0.5 light loss
Clear f/0.0 light loss
Cable Entry (back box)
In-Ceiling 0.75-inch conduit fitting
Pendant Through 1.5-inch NPT pendant mount
Weight (approximate) Unit Shipping
In-Ceiling 2.6 kg (5.7 lb) 4.6 kg (10.2 lb)
Environmental In-Ceiling 2.9 kg (6.5 lb) 4.9 kg (10.8 lb) Standard Pendant 3.1 kg (6.8 lb) 5.0 kg (11 lb)
Environmental Pendant 3.7 kg (8.2 lb) 5.5 kg (12.2 lb)
Stainless Steel 6.5 kg (14.3 lb) 8.6 kg (19 lb)
Environmental Pendant
Effective Projected Area (EPA) 20.5 square inches (without mount), 47 square inches (with IWM Series mount)
ALARM
Unsupervised Detects open or closed alarm state
Supervised Detects open and short alarm state with
external 1-kohm resistor
Input 3.5 VDC maximum, 3.5 mA maximum
Relay Output ±32 VDC maximum, 150 mA maximum
AUDIO
Input/Output Line level/external microphone input;
600-ohm differential, 1Vp-p maximum signal
level
Streaming Embedded audio
Resolution H.264 High Profile
(IP GOP structure)
MPx Width Height Aspect
Ratio
Maximum
IPS
Recommended
Bit Rate (Mbps)
2.07 1920 1080 16:9 60 8.00
2.07 1920 1080 16:9 30 6.05
0.92 1280 720 16:9 30 3.00
0.36 800 448 16:9 30 2.00
0.23 640 352 16:9 30 1.80
* Supports mixed IPv4 and IPv6 installations, but not IPv6-only deployments. † Pelco Media Player is recommended for control, smoothness, and reduced latency as compared to QuickTime.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
OPERATING TEMPERATURE*
* Assumes no wind chill factor.
† Cold starts within 90 minutes at specified temperature. ‡ Removes icing of 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) within 3 hours after power-up. § PEO75U HPoE injector accessory required for heater operation.
OPERATING HUMIDITY
In-Ceiling (indoor),
Standard Pendant 10 to 90% RH (noncondensing)
Environmental In-Ceiling,
Environmental Pendant,
Stainless Steel
Environmental Pendant 10 to 100% RH (condensing)
MECHANICAL
(Dome Drive Only)
Variable Speed 0.1° to 80°/sec (manual pan speed)
Preset Accuracy ±0.1°
Pan Movement 360° continuous pan rotation
Vertical Tilt +1° to –90°
Maximum Pan Speed Up to 450° per second
Maximum Tilt Speed Up to 450° per second
Manual Pan/Tilt Speeds
Pan 0.1° to 80°/sec manual operation
Tilt 0.1° to 45°/sec manual operation
Preset Speeds
Pan 450°/sec
Tilt 450°/sec
ELECTRICAL
Ports RJ-45 connector for 100Base-TX
Auto MDI/MDI-X
Autonegotiate/manual setting
Cabling Type Cat5e or better for 100Base-TX
Input Voltage 18 to 32 VAC; 24 VAC nominal
22 to 27 VDC; 24 VDC nominal
Input Power
24 VAC 24 VA nominal (without heater and blower);
81 VA nominal (with heater and blower)
24 VDC 1 VA nominal (without heater and blower);
3 VA nominal (with heater and blower)
PoE+ 18 W, Environmental models (with heater off,
blower on);*
15 W, Non-Environmental (with heater and
blower off)
HPoE 60 W, Environmental models (with heater and
blower on);†
15 W, Non-environmental (with heater and
blower off)
* Heater is disabled with PoE+ power selection.
†Only 27 W of power is supplied to the heater.
CERTIFICATIONS/RATINGS/PATENTS
• CE, Class A
• FCC, Class A
• ICES-003, Class A
• UL/cUL Listed
• C-Tick
• NEMA TS-2 (Temp.) para 2.2.7.3 - 2.2.7.7
• KC
• ONVIF Profile S
• ONVIF Profile G
• Cisco® Medianet Media Services Proxy 2.0 compatible
• Environmental models, including stainless steel, were tested in accordance with:
– IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-14, IEC 60068-2-30, and IEC 60068-2-78
• Environmental pendants, including stainless steel, were tested in accordance with:
– IEC 60068-2-6 and IEC 60068-2-27
• Environmental models meet NEMA Type 4X and IP66 standards when installed properly (B6-F-E, B6-PG-E, and B6-PSG-E)
• U.S. Patents 5,931,432; 6,793,415 B2; 6,802,656 B2; 6,821,222 B2; 7,161,615 B2
• IK10 impact-resistant bubble on all models were tested in accordance with:
– IEC 62262
Temperature
Models
In-Ceiling
(24 VAC, PoE+)
Standard Pendant
(24 VAC, PoE+)
Environmental Pendant and In-Ceiling
24 VAC HPoE§ PoE+
Sustaining Maximum 50°C (122°F) 50°C (122°F) 50°C (122°F) 50°C (122°F) 50°C (122°F) Minimum 0°C (32°F) –5°C (23°F) –45°C (–49°F) –45°C (–49°F) –20°C (–4°F) Absolute Maximum N/A N/A 60°C (140.2°F) 60°C (140.2°F) 60°C (140.2°F) Minimum N/A N/A –51°C (–60°F) N/A N/A
Ice Free N/A N/A –30°C (–22°F) –30°C (–22°F) –10°C (14°F) Cold Start† 0°C (32°F) 0°C (32°F) –40°C (–40°F) –35°C (–31°F) –10°C (14°F) De-Icing‡ N/A N/A –30°C (–22°F) –30°C (–22°F) N/A
Storage Temperature –20°C to 60°C (–5°F to 140°F)
Pelco by Schneider Electric
3500 Pelco Way, Clovis, California 93612-5699 United States USA & Canada Tel (800) 289-9100 Fax (800) 289-9150
International Tel +1 (559) 292-1981 Fax +1 (559) 348-1120 www.pelco.com www.pelco.com/community
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SYSTEM MODEL NUMBERS
COMPONENT MODEL NUMBERS
*Use the pendant lower domes with the environmental in-ceiling and environmental pendant back boxes.
RECOMMENDED MOUNTS
In-Ceiling Domes
SD5-P 2' x 2' drop ceiling panel, aluminum
construction; replaces 2' x 2' ceiling tile
SCA1 Support rails for B5-F; for use in ceiling tile
applications
Pendant Domes
BB5-PCA-BK Pendant conduit adapter, black
BB5-PCA-GY Pendant conduit adapter, gray
IWM Series Wall mount, with or without integral 24 VAC, 100 VA transformer; black or gray finish; can
be adapted for corner, parapet or pole
application
MRCA Ceiling mount, black
PP4348 Parapet roof mount
PP350/PP351 Parapet wall/roof mount
SWM Series Compact wall mount, black or gray finish; can be adapted for corner or pole applications
IDM4012SS Stainless steel wall mount with feed-through
capabilities
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
POE1AT-US PoE+ Injector† with US power cord
POE1AT-EU PoE+ Injector†
with EU power cord
POE75U-1UP HPoE Injector†
(no power cord)
POE75U-1UP-US HPoE Injector†
with US power cord
POE75U-1UP-EUK HPoE Injector†
with EU/UK power cord
MCS Series Indoor, 24 VAC power supply
WCS Series Outdoor, 24 VAC power supply
Refer to individual power supply specifications for more information. †
PoE+ will not provide enough power for heater operation. Use the HPoE Injector to provide sufficient heater power.
Type Back Box Color Lower Dome Spectra Enhanced,
2.0 MPx, 20X
Spectra Enhanced,
2.0 MPx, 30X
Spectra Enhanced
Low Light,
2.0 MPx, 20X
Spectra Enhanced
Low Light,
2.0 MPx, 30X
In-ceiling, indoor White with
white trim ring
Smoked S6220-FW0 S6230-FW0 N/A N/A
Clear S6220-FW1 S6230-FW1 N/A N/A
In-ceiling,
environmental
Black with
black trim ring
Smoked S6220-YB0 S6230-YB0 N/A N/A
Clear S6220-YB1 S6230-YB1 N/A N/A
Pendant, standard
Gray Smoked S6220-PG0 S6230-PG0 N/A N/A
Clear S6220-PG1 S6230-PG1 N/A N/A
Black Smoked S6220-PB0 S6230-PB0 N/A N/A
Clear S6220-PB1 S6230-PB1 N/A N/A
Pendant,
environmental Gray
Smoked S6220-EG0 S6230-EG0 S6220-EGL0 S6230-EGL0
Clear S6220-EG1 S6230-EG1 S6220-EGL1 S6230-EGL1
Pendant,
environmental,
stainless steel
Gray
Smoked S6220-ESG0 S6230-ESG0 S6220-ESGL0 S6230-ESGL0
Clear S6220-ESG1 S6230-ESG1 S6220-ESGL1 S6230-ESGL1
Back Box High Definition (HD) Lower Dome* Dome Drive
B6-F In-ceiling LD6F-0 IK10, In-ceiling, smoked D6220 20X B6-F-E In-ceiling, environmental LD6F-1 IK10, In-ceiling, clear D6230 30X B6-PG Pendant, gray LD6PB-0 IK10, Pendant, smoked D6220L 20X B6-PB Pendant, black LD6PB-1 IK10, Pendant, clear D6230L 30X B6-PG-E Pendant, gray, environmental LD6SS-0 IK10, Pendant, smoked, stainless steel B6-PSG-E Pendant, gray, environmental, stainless steel LD6SS-1 IK10, Pendant, clear, stainless steel Pelco, the Pelco logo, and other trademarks associated with Pelco products referred to in this publication are trademarks of Pelco, Inc. or its affiliates. ONVIF and the ONVIF logo are trademarks of ONVIF Inc. All other product names and services are the property of their respective companies.
Product specifications and availability are subject to change without notice. ©Copyright 2016, Pelco, Inc. All rights reserved.
©CohuHD Costar™, LLC reserves the right to change specifications without notice 4260HD 2016.3
RISE 4260HD Series
H.264 High-Definition, IP67 Camera Positioning System
youtube.com/CohuHD
linkedin.com/company/CohuHD
twitter.com/CohuHD
facebook.com/CohuHD
CohuHD.com
(858) 391-1800
Advanced Optics
• Superior 1080p image quality
• Powerful 30x optical zoom with 12x
digital zoom (360x total)
• Image defog/dehaze analytics
• Electronic image stabilization (EIS)
• Dark scene enhanced intensity
• Bright source whiteout reduction
• Presets, tours, sectors and privacy
zones
Rugged Construction
• Operates in hurricane force winds
• Built-in electrical transient/surge
protection to CISPR 24 levels
• Precision positioning of 0.05°
• Pressurized IP67, optional IP68
protection
• NEMA TS2 temperature range,
-40°C to 75°C
• Integrated faceplate wiper option
Flexible Installation and Seamless
Interoperability
• ONVIF Profile S compliant
• NTCIP 1205 compliant
• Hybrid IP/analog video-serial PTZ
operation
• User defined video stream profiles
• H.264 Base/Main/High profiles and
MJPEG encoding
• Web server configuration, operation
and viewing
• Inverted mounting capability
• Single CAT5e cable with PoE++
• Pendent, wall, pole and corner
mounting bracket options
CohuHD Costar’s 4260HD camera
positioning system combines crystal clear
HD image quality, bandwidth efficient
H.264 compression, smooth variable
speed positioning and IP67 protection
delivering the CohuHD quality and
performance you expect!
The 4260HD provides full 1080p imaging
with 30x optical zoom, delivering full frame
rate HD images over the entire zoom
range for very cost effective long-range
surveillance applications.
True day/night technology using
a removable IR cut filter produces
exceptional low light sensitivity down to
0.00025 fc.
For installations subject to wind or
vibration, electronic image stabilization
assures steady, clear images and enables
the system designer to utilize existing
bridge sign and traffic light poles for
camera mounting.
The 4260HD includes defog/dehaze image
processing, enhancing video performance
in foggy and hazy conditions encountered
in surveillance and traffic monitoring
applications.
The 4260HD includes variable hi-speed
pan and tilt drive, with 360° continuous
pan and 360° tilt. Fast positioning speeds
result in 180° movements in less than
2 seconds. The high-torque motor and
gearing design ensures the positioner
maintains position in high shock, vibration
and hurricane force winds.
Providing multiple video stream profiles,
the 4260HD delivers up to 5 or more
independently configured H.264/MJPEG
streams as well as analog video output
with serial RS422 camera PTZ control.
Use of the IP and analog output allows
integration with analog systems today
while providing a smooth transition to HD
Video over IP tomorrow.
The 4260HD provides a full function web
server, allowing complete administrative
and operator control capabilities.
Administrative features include configuring
network settings, user password
assignments, setting video streaming
properties, configuring camera imaging
properties, defining presets and tours and
assigning camera ID labels.
The 4260HD is designed to operate
in harsh weather with its purged and
pressurized IP67 enclosure protection
(IP68 optional). This eliminates the
effects of water intrusion, pollutants and
corrosives.
CohuHD delivers years of clean, reliable
images and backs it with a world class
three-year warranty.
CAMERa
Sensor 1/2.8” CMOS
Scanning Progressive
Resolution 1,920 x 1,080
Digital Formats 1080p, 1080i, 720p
Frame Rate 30 fps
Camera Format Day/Night (IR Cut Filter)
Day/Night Modes Auto, Color, B/W
S/N Ratio >50 db
SENSITIVITY
Standard
Color, 1/30, f1.4 0.4 lux (0.04 fc)
B/W, 1/30, f1.6 0.04 lux (0.004 fc)
Digital Slow Shutter
Color, 1/2, f1.4 0.025 lux (0.0025 fc)
B/W, 1/2, f1.6 0.0025 lux (0.00025fc)
OPTICS
Zoom Lens 30x, 4.4 to 132mm
Aperture f1.4 -> f4.6
HAFOV 63.4° to 2.1°
Focus Auto/Manual [Near, Far]
Focus Search Normal, Bright, Point
Source
Focus Sensitivity Low, Normal, High
Iris Auto/Manual [Open/Close]
Digital Zoom 12x, Off/On [Depth]
IMAGE PROCESSING
Defog Mode Off/Auto/Manual [3 Levels,
Strength and Color Adj.]
Image Stabilization Off/On
Enhanced Intensity Off, Enhanced, Whiteout
Reduction
Dynamic Range >90dB Off/On [3 Levels,
Normal, Combo, Contrast]
Back Light Comp Off/On [Level Setting]
Shutter (AES) Auto/Manual [1/2 ->
1/30,000]
Slow Shutter Off/On [1/15->1/2] with
Limit Setting
IR Correction Off/On [850nm]
White Balance Auto/Manual [Red/Blue
Adjustment]
(WB) Modes Normal, Mercury, Sodium
Vapor
AGC 1 to 48db, Adjustable
Sharpness Soft, Normal, Sharp,
Sharpest
Noise Reduction 4 Levels [Normal, Medium,
Strong, Fixed]
IP Stream
Video Streams 5 or more video streams
dependent on available
processing budget
Video Codec H.264 Base, Main and High
Profiles, MJPEG
Video Protocols RTSP/RTP
RTSP Interleave
HTTP Tunneling
RTP Multicast
Video Resolution 1080p, 720p, D1, VGA, QVGA,
QQVGA,
Video Frame Rate 1 to 30 fps, 30 fps default
Video Data Rate 64Kbs to 8Mbs
Video Rate Control Variable or Constant Bit Rate
Video GOV 1 to 600, 30 default
Video Latency Four frames (0.133 sec.)
Video Transmission 99.999% error free
NETWORK INTERFACE
Network Format 802.3u 100Base-T, MDI-X
auto-sensing, full duplex
Network Protocol TCP, UDP, IPv4, IGMP, ICMP,
DNS, DHCP, RTP, RTSP,
RTCP, NTP, HTTP, SOAP,
HTTPS ARP, FTP, SMTP,
Telnet. ONVIF Profile S
Media Players VLC, Quick Time or any media
player compliant with RFC
2326, 3984, 3550, 2435, ISO/
IEC 13818-1
ONVIF Profile S
Camera Protocols ONVIF, NTCIP 1205, CohuT,
CohuHD legacy
Security 4 Levels: Admin, Operator,
User, Anonymous [User
Name + Password], Digest
Authentication
Updates File upload over network
using camera web server
interface
ANALOG INTERFACE
Video NTSC or PAL
Serial PTZ RS422, full/half duplex,
1,200 to 115k baud
adjustment, data, stop and
parity bit configuration.
Camera Protocols CohuHD Legacy, NTCIP 1205,
Pelco D, Ultrak/honeywell
On screen display (osd)
OSD Capacity Up to 8 OSD Elements
can be selected for
display on video
OSD Elements Camera Title, Preset Title,
Position, Compass,
Sector Title, Event Title,
Time/Date, Service
Message, Status, Logo
OSD Characters ASCII set, Up to 25 characters
per element
OSD Size Small, Medium or Large.
OSD Size is scaled to image
resolution, where small = 4%,
medium = 5% and large = 6%
of the image vertical resolution.
OSD Color White
Position Grouped [Top Left, Top Right,
Bottom Left, Bottom Right
or Custom [Each element
is positioned using x, y
coordinates]
Logo Display xxx.bmp format [x, y position]
POSITIONING DRIVE
Pan Range 360° continuous rotation
Tilt Range 360°
Pan Speed 0.05° to 45°/second
Tilt Speed 0.05° to 45°/second
Speed Resolution 16 or 64 Variable Speed
Levels
Preset Speed 180° < 2 Seconds
Accuracy +/- 0.05°
Resolution +/- 0.05°
Holding Torque Maintains position and
operates in winds up to 100
mph
Presets Up to 256, Includes pan, tilt,
zoom, focus, preset ID, I/O
output state
Tours Up to 256, Includes presets
with dwell, speed, direction
and recurrence properties
Auto Park Returns to a preset or tour
after timer expires, Timer
Value [ Off, 1 Minute to
999 Hours]
Features Auto focus/iiris on PTZ,
Proportional PTZ, Video Freeze
on Preset, High Wind/Vibration
mode
Privacy masks
Capacity Up to 16 Rectangular Masks.
Note: Use of Mosaic reduces
capacity to 8 Masks
Color Selectable from available
palette
Transparency 0 to 100%
Mosaic Off, Fine, Medium and Coarse
settings - See Note in Mask
Capacity
EVENT MANAGEMENT
Digital I/O
Digital Inputs Two (2) Sensor Inputs, Dry
contact, N.O or N.C
Digital Outputs Two (2) Control Output,
Open collector
ELECTRICAL
Input Voltage PoE++, 24Vac or 120Vac
Power Up to 60 watts maximum
Voltage Range NEMA standard TS 2-2003
section 2.2.7 tests C thru H
Transient/Surge CISPR 24
Emmisions CISPR 22
Mechanical
Weight 21.5 pounds (9.75 kg
maximum
Dimensions Refer to dimensional diagram
Construction Powder Coated aluminum
Faceplate Wiper Model Dependent, [On/Off,
Dwell, Time Out Settings]
Sunshield Included as standard
Inverted Mounting Yes. Software selectable
ENVIRONMENTAL
Protection Rating Camera - IP67, Pressurized
with Dry Nitrogen, 3.5 psi.
Positioner Body - IP66
Optional Protection - IP68
Operating Temp -40°F to 167°F (-40°C to 75°C)
Per NEMA TS2 2.2.7
Humidity Up to 100%
Vibration Per NEMA TS2 para. 2.2.8.
5-30Hz sweep @ 0.5g
applied in each of 3 mutually
perpendicular planes.
Shock Per NEMA TS2 para. 2.2.9.
10g applied in each of 3
mutually perpendicular planes
Wind Survivability Up to 150 mph
- 120 mph for 45 minutes
- 150 mph for 15 minutes
CERTIFICATIONS
FCC Class A, CE, RoHS
ACCESSORIES
Mounts
Pedestal 7411542-001
Wall 8425-7
Pole 8503-0
Corner 8503-1
Parapat 8503-2
7.0” BC Plate 8481-9
Field Cables
CA276, CA277, CA278 Series
Ordering model numbers
4261-1000 PoE++, RJ45 Pigtail
4261-1100 PoE++, RJ45 Pigtail,
Faceplate wiper
4261-1010 PoE++, IP68, RJ45 Pigtail
4262-1000 PoE++, RJ45 Pigtail,
Accessory Signals Pigtail
4262-1100 PoE++, RJ45 pigtail,
Accessory Signals Pigtail,
Faceplate wiper
4263-1000 PoE++, RJ45 pigtail,
Accessory Signals Pigtail,
MS Connector
4263-1100 PoE++, RJ45 pigtail,
Accessory Signals Pigtail MS
Conn, Faceplate wiper
4264-1000 24Vac, RJ45 pigtail,
Accessory Signals Pigtail
4264-1100 24Vac, RJ45 pigtail,
Accessory Signals Pigtail,
Faceplate wiper
4265-1000 24Vac, RJ45 pigtail,
Accessory Signals Pigtail
MS Conn
4265-1100 24Vac, RJ45 pigtail,
Accessory Signals Pigtail MS
Conn, Faceplate wiper
4266-1000 24Vac Legacy Replacement,
MS Conn
4266-1100 24Vac Legacy Replacement,
MS Conn, Faceplate Wiper
4267-1000 120Vac Legacy Replacement,
MS Conn
4267-1100 120Vac Legacy Replacement,
MS Conn, Faceplate Wiper
4268-1000 120Vac Legacy Replacement,
MS Conn
4268-1100 120Vac Legacy Replacement,
MS Conn + RJ45 Pigtail,
Faceplate Wiper
4269-1000 120Vac Legacy Replacement,
AMP Conn + RJ45 Pigtail
4269-1100 120Vac Legacy Replacement,
AMP Conn + RJ45 Pigtail,
Faceplate Wiper
RISE 4260HD Series
H.264 High-Definition, IP67 Camera Positioning System
Pigtail Configuration System Function 4261-xxxx 4262-xxxx 4263-xxxx 4264-xxxx 4265-xxxx 4266-xxxx 4267-xxxx 4268-xxxx 4269-xxxx RJ45 Pigtail
(approx. 3 ft)
Ethernet P P P P P P P
PoE++ Power P P P
Accessories Pigtail
(approx. 3 ft)
24Vac Power P P P
120Vac Power P P P
Ethernet P P
RS422 P P P P P P P P
Analog Video P P P P P P P P
Digital I/O P P P P P P
4261-xxxx 4262-xxxx 4263-xxxx 4264-xxxx 4265-xxxx 4266-xxxx 4267-xxxx 4268-xxxx 4269-xxxxx RJ45 Pigtail RJ45 Pigtail
Accessory Pigtail
RJ45 Pigtail
Accessory Pigtail
Prepped Wires MS Connector
RJ45 Pigtail
Accessory Pigtail
Prepped Wires
RJ45 Pigtail
Accessory Pigtail
MS Connector
RJ45 Pigtail
Accessory Pigtail
MS Connector MS Connector MS Connector Accessory Pigtail Accessory Pigtail RJ45 Pigtail
AMP Connector
Accessory Pigtail
RISE 4260HD Series
H.264 High-Definition, IP67 Camera Positioning System
VIEWING DISTANCE COMPARISON MATRIX
Range Image
Format Resolution Sensor Zoom HAFOV
(degrees)
Identify
(120 VPoT)
Recognize
(30 VPoT)
Detection
(10 VPoT)
Medium D1 640x480 1/4" 35x 1.73 1,060 ft. (322 m) 4,270 ft. (1,298 m) 13650 ft. (4,150 m) Medium 720p 1280x720 1/3" 18x 3.25 1,130 ft. (343 m) 4,560 ft. (1,386 m) 14,560 ft. (4,427 m) Medium 720p 1280x720 1/3" 30x 2.1 1,770 ft. (538 m) 7,120 ft. (2,165 m) 22,730 ft. (6,911 m) Medium 1080p 1920x1080 1/3" 20x 2.9 1,850 ft. (562 m) 7,440 ft. (2,262 m) 23,760 ft. (7,224 m) Medium 1080p 1920x1080 1/3" 30x 2.3 2,340 ft. (713 m) 9,450 ft. (2,880 m) 30,160 ft. (9,193 m) RJ45 IP67 Coupler, p/n 7610203-001, Included with CA276A cable.
If you do not use CohuHD CA276A cable, please specify the IP67 coupler separately.
CAT5e/6/6a shielded cable with a 6mm-7mm O.D. is required for waterproofing.
Vertical PIXELS ON TARGET (vpot)
120 vpot 30 vpot 10 vpot
pigtail configurations
Specification s
RISE 4260HD Series
H.264 High-Definition, IP67 Camera Positioning System
Dimension inches (mm)
12.5 (317.5) 15.0 (381.0)
6.1 (154.9) 5.7 (144.8)
12.1 (307.3)
Clearance
15.9 (403.9)
.91 (23.11)
10.2 (259.1) 4.8 (121.9)
7.5 (190.5)
R11.35 (288.3)
Clearance radius from
the center of the base mount
Mounting
Pedestal Mount
7411542-001 or
7411444-001 or
7411444-002
Pole Mount 8503-0 Wall Mount 8425-7 Pedestal Mount*
*
Ø 4.75 (120.6)
4x Ø.201(5.1) THRU
1/4-20 UNC THRU
(at 90°)
Mounting bolt pattern
15.9 (403.9)
.91 (23.11)
10.2 (259.1) 4.8 (121.9)
7.5 (190.5)
R11.35 (288.3)
Clearance radius from
the center of the base mount
RISE Series IP Video Cameras
Rugged Innovation with Superior Endurance
The RISE Series IP video cameras and designed and built by CohuHD Costar for critical infrastructure applications demanding high-quality images, rugged construction and seamless interoperability. The RISE Series delivers advanced performance at unbeatable pricing.
About CohuHD CostarTM
CohuHD Costar is a leading manufacturer of high-definition video systems designed to satisfy the demanding performance requirements for critical infrastructure applications. CohuHD solutions integrate the latest high-definition video imaging and compression technologies into ruggedized camera products for monitoring in critical, sensitive environments.
AXIS P5635-E Mk II PTZ Dome Network Camera
HDTV 1080p PTZ with 30x zoom and focus recall
AXIS P5635-E Mk II is a cost-effective, outdoor-ready HDTV 1080p camera with 30x optical zoom for high-definition video surveillance of large areas. It features continuous 360° pan for fast camera repositioning and continuous tracking of objects. The focus recall feature offers instant focus in predefined areas, while the day/night functionality and WDR provide great image quality even in complex light conditions. It offers shock detection, video motion detection, Advanced Gatekeeper and electronic image stabilization. Axis’ Zipstream technology significantly reduces bandwidth and storage requirements. It supports two-way audio, I/O ports, an SD card slot, PoE+ and 24 V AC/DC. > Continuous 360° pan
> Excellent light sensitivity
> HDTV 1080p and 30x optical zoom
> Focus recall
> Axis’ Zipstream technology
Datasheet
AXIS P5635-E Mk II PTZ Dome Network Camera
Models AXIS P5635-E Mk II 50 Hz
AXIS P5635-E Mk II 60 Hz
Camera
Image sensor Progressive scan CMOS 1/2.8”
Lens 4.3–129 mm, F1.6–4.7
Horizontal field of view: 65.6°–2.0°
Vertical field of view: 39.0°–1.2°
Autofocus, auto-iris
Day and night Automatically removable infrared-cut filter Minimum
illumination
Color: 0.2 lux at 30 IRE F1.6
B/W: 0.01 lux at 30 IRE F1.6
Color: 0.25 lux at 50 IRE F1.6
B/W: 0.02 lux at 50 IRE F1.6
Shutter time 1/66500 to 2 s
Pan/Tilt/Zoom Pan: 360° endless, 0.2°/s–350°/s
Tilt: 180°, 0.2°/s–350°/s
30x optical zoom and 12x digital zoom, total 360x zoom, 256 preset positions, e-flip, limited guard tour, control queue, on-screen directional indicator, set new pan 0°, focus window, speed zoom, focus recall
Video
Video
compression
H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) Baseline, Main and High Profiles Motion JPEG
Resolutions 1920x1080 (HDTV 1080p) to 320x180
Frame rate Up to 25/30 fps (50/60 Hz) in 1080p
Up to 50/60 fps (50/60 Hz) in 720p
Video streaming Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264 and Motion JPEG
Controllable frame rate and bandwidth
Axis' Zipstream technology in H.264
VBR/MBR H.264
Image settings Compression, Color, Brightness, Sharpness, Contrast, Local contrast, White balance, Exposure control, Exposure zones, Automatic backlight compensation, Fine tuning of behavior at low light,120 dB WDR - Forensic Capture, Manual shutter time, Text and image overlay, 20 individual 3D privacy masks, Image freeze on PTZ
Electronic Image Stabilization
Audio
Audio streaming Two-way
Audio
compression
AAC-LC 8/16 kHz, G.711 PCM 8 kHz, G.726 ADPCM 8 kHz
Configurable bit rate
Audio
input/output
External microphone or line input, and line output (Requires Axis 10-pin Push-pull System Connector or Axis Multicable C I/O Audio Power 1 m/5 m, not included)
Network
Security Password protection, IP address filtering, HTTPSaencryption, IEEE 802.1Xanetwork access control, Digest authentication, User access log, Centralized certificate management
Supported
protocols
IPv4/v6, HTTP, HTTPSa, SSL/TLSa, QoS Layer 3 DiffServ, FTP, SFTP, CIFS/SMB, SMTP, Bonjour, UPnPTM, SNMP v1/v2c/v3 (MIB-II), DNS, DynDNS, NTP, RTSP, RTP, TCP, UDP, IGMP, RTCP, ICMP, DHCP,
ARP, SOCKS, SSH, NTCIP
System integration
Application
Programming
Interface
Open API for software integration, including VAPIX®
and AXIS Camera Application Platform; specifications at www.axis.com
AXIS Video Hosting System with One-Click Connection
ONVIF® Profiles S and G, specifications at www.onvif.org Analytics Video motion detection, Advanced Gatekeeper
Audio detection
Support for AXIS Camera Application Platform enabling
installation of third-party applications, see www.axis.com/acap Event triggers Detectors: live stream accessed, video motion detection, shock detection, day/night mode, audio detection
Hardware: network, temperature
Input Signal: manual trigger, virtual inputs, digital input signal PTZ: error, moving, preset reached, ready
Storage: disruption, recording
System: system ready
Time: recurrence, use schedule
Event actions Day/night mode, overlay text, video recording to edge storage, pre- and post-alarm video buffering, send SNMP trap, WDR mode External output activation, play audio clip
PTZ: PTZ preset, start/stop guard tour
File upload via FTP, SFTP, HTTP, HTTPS and email
Notification via email, HTTP, HTTPS and TCP
Data streaming Event data
Built-in
installation aids
Pixel counter
General
Casing IP66-, IK10- and NEMA 4X-rated
Metal casing (aluminum), clear dome (PC), repaintable skin cover Sustainability PVC free
Memory 512 MB RAM, 256 MB Flash
Power Axis PoE+ midspan 1–port: 100–240 V AC
IEEE 802.3at Type 2 Class 4
Camera consumption: typical 8 W, max 21 W
Multi-connector cable:
20–28 V DC, typical 7 W, max 20 W
20–24 V AC, typical 12 VA, max 28 VA
(PoE+ midspan or power supply not included)
Connectors RJ45 for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX PoE
RJ45 Push-pull Connector (IP66) included
I/O connector for DC or AC input, 4 configurable alarm
inputs/outputs, mic in/line in, line out (Axis 10-pin Push-pull System Connector or Axis Multicable C I/O Audio Power1 m/5 m, not included)
Storage Support for SDHC UHS-I/SDXC UHS-I card
Support for recording to dedicated network-attached storage (NAS)
For SD card and NAS recommendations see www.axis.com
Operating
conditions
-30 °C to 55 °C (-22 °F to 131 °F)
Humidity 10–100% RH (condensing)
Storage
conditions
-40 °C to 70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F)
Approvals EMC
EN 55022 Class B, EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 55024, EN 50121-4, IEC 62236-4, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A+B, ICES-003 Class B, VCCI Class B, RCM AS/NZS CISPR22 Class B, KCC KN22 Class B, KN35
EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3
Safety
IEC/EN/UL 60950-1, IEC/EN/UL 60950-22
Environment
IEC/EN 60529 IP66, NEMA 250 Type 4X, IEC/EN 62262 IK10, IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-14, IEC 60068-2-27, IEC 60068-2-78, ISO 4892-2
Dimensions 217 x 188 x 188 mm (8 9/16 x 7 3/8 x 7 3/8 in) Weight 2.5 kg (5.5 lb)
Included
accessories
RJ45 Push-pull Connector (IP66), Hard ceiling mount, Spring pipe adaptor, U-profile pipe adaptor, Installation Guide, Windows decoder 1-user license, AVHS Authentication key
Optional
accessories
AXIS T91B Mounts, AXIS T94A02L Recessed Mount, Outdoor
RJ45 cable with premounted connector, AXIS T8133 Midspan 30 W 1-port, Repaintable skin covers
Smoked dome, Axis 10-pin Push-pull System Connector,
Axis Multicable C I/O Audio Power 1 m/5 m
Video
management
software
AXIS Companion, AXIS Camera Station, Video management
software from Axis’ Application Development Partners available on www.axis.com/techsup/software
Languages English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Traditional Chinese Warranty Axis 3-year warranty and AXIS Extended Warranty option, see www.axis.com/warranty
a. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (www.openssl.org), and cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
Environmental responsibility:
www.axis.com/environmental-responsibility
www.axis.com
©2016 Axis Communications AB. AXIS COMMUNICATIONS, AXIS, ETRAX, ARTPEC and VAPIX are registered trademarks or trademark applications of Axis AB in various jurisdictions. All other company names and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. We reserve the right to introduce modifications without notice. 1496710/EN/M7.4/082016
FLIR’s PT-Series brings thermal and visible-light imaging together in a system that gives you video and control over both IP and analog networks.
The PT-Series’ precision pan/tilt mechanism gives you accurate pointing control while providing fully programmable scan patterns, radar slewto-cue, and slew-to-alarm functions. PT-Series cameras define a new standard of performance with five models that provide full 640 × 480 thermal resolution with full WDR Thermal video.
Designed for high performance, easy installation, and long-term reliability, PT-Series cameras give you the image detail needed for optimal threat detection capability and peak analytics performance - even in challenging imaging environments.
Because FLIR understands that you need cameras for the real world, PT-Series cameras are qualified beyond industry standard for survivability, and are backed by FLIR’s unparalleled 2-year system warranty and 10- year detector warranty.
KEY FEATURES
• Simultaneous IP and analog video outputs – thermal and visible-light – along with IP and serial control interfaces for easy integration into IP or analog networks; use them in an existing analog environment, and migrate easily to a future IP network
• Sun-safe VOx uncooled thermal sensor technology; looking directly at the sun won’t damage FLIR uncooled thermal security cameras • Exchangeable camera cassettes allow for quick upgrade or repair of sensors and optics
• All 640 x 480 resolution products are based on FLIR’s 17-micron pixel pitch arrays, the most advanced uncooled detectors available on the commercial market
• Open IP standards for plug-and-play integration; ONVIF compliant • Multiple simultaneous channels of streaming digital video available in H.264, MPEG-4, or M-JPEG formats
www.flir.com
FLIR
PT-SERIES
High Performance Pan/Tilt Multi-Sensor Thermal Cameras
Crisp image detail gives you optimum clarity to identify and address any number of security threats
PT-SERIES
www.flir.com
NASDAQ: FLIR
SANTA BARBARA
FLIR Systems, Inc.
70 Castilian Drive
Goleta, CA 93117
USA
PH: +1 805.690.5097
PORTLAND
Corporate Headquarters
FLIR Systems, Inc.
27700 SW Parkway Ave.
Wilsonville, OR 97070
USA
PH: +1 866.477.3687
BELGIUM
FLIR Systems
Luxemburgstraat 2
2321 Meer
Belgium
PH: +32 (0) 3665 5100
CHINA – SHANGHAI
FLIR Systems, Co., Ltd.
K301-302, No.26 Lane
168, Daduhe Road,
Putuo District, Shanghai
200062,P.R.China
PH: +86-21-5169 7628
Equipment described herein may require US Government authorization for export purposes. Diversion contrary to US law is prohibited. Imagery for illustration purposes only. Specifications are subject to change without notice. ©2014 FLIR Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. (Updated 12/03/14) www.flir.com
Specifications
Camera Model PT-Series
Camera Platform Type PTZ Multi-Sensor PTZ Multi-Sensor PTZ Multi-Sensor Thermal Camera Specs
Array Format (NTSC) 160 × 120 320 × 240 640 × 480
Detector Type Long-Life, Uncooled VO×
Microbolometer
Long-Life, Uncooled VO×
Microbolometer
Long-Life, Uncooled VO×
Microbolometer
Effective Resolution 19,200 76,800 307,200
Pixel Pitch 25 µm 25 µm 17 µm
Field Of View
24° × 20° (PT-124; 9 mm)
17° × 14° (PT-117; 13 mm)
12° × 10° (PT-112; 19 mm)
48° × 39° (PT-348; 9 mm)
34° × 28° (PT-334; 13 mm)
24° × 19° (PT-324; 19 mm)
13 °× 10° (PT-313; 35 mm)
7° × 5° (PT-307; 65 mm)
4.6° × 3.7° (PT-304; 100 mm)
45° × 37° (PT-645; 13 mm)
25° × 20° (PT-625; 25 mm)
18° × 14° (PT-618; 35 mm)
12° × 10° (PT-612; 50 mm)
10° × 8° (PT-610; 65 mm)
6.2° × 5° (PT-606; 100 mm)
Zoom 2× E-zoom 2× & 4× E-zoom 2× & 4× E-zoom
Spectral Range 7.5 μm to 13.5 μm 7.5 μm to 13.5 μm 7.5 μm to 13.5 μm Focus Range athermalized, focus-free athermalized, focus-free athermalized, focus-free Outputs
Composite Video
NTSC or PAL Standard Standard Standard
Video over Ethernet
Two independent channels
of streaming MPEG-4,
H.264, or M-JPEG for each
of two cameras
Two independent channels of
streaming MPEG-4, H.264,
or M-JPEG for each of two
cameras
Two independent channels
of streaming MPEG-4,
H.264, or M-JPEG for each
of two cameras
Control
Point to point
(stand alone) Yes Yes Yes
Ethernet Yes Yes Yes
Serial RS-232/-422;
Pelco D, Bosch
RS-232/-422;
Pelco D, Bosch
RS-232/-422;
Pelco D, Bosch
Network Enabled Yes Yes Yes
Software
Developer’s Kit Option Option Option
External Analytics
Compatible Yes Yes Yes
Pan/Tilt Performance
Pan Angle/Speed Continuous 360°; 0.1°
to 60°/sec
Continuous 360°; 0.1°
to 60°/sec
Continuous 360°; 0.1°
to 70°/sec
Tilt Angle/Speed +90° to -90°; 0.1°
to 30°/sec
+90° to -90°; 0.1°
to 30°/sec
+90° to -90°; 0.1°
to 30°/sec
Programmable presets 128 128 128
General
Weight ~37 lb
(configuration dependent)
~37 lb
(configuration dependent)
~37 lb
(configuration dependent)
Dimensions (L,W,H) 13.7” × 18.4” × 12.8”
(348 mm × 467 mm × 326 mm)
13.7” × 18.4” × 12.8”
(348 mm × 467 mm × 326 mm)
13.7” × 18.4” × 12.8”
(348 mm × 467 mm × 326 mm)
Input Voltage 24 VAC (21-30 VAC)
24 VDC (21-30 VDC)
24 VAC (21-30 VAC)
24 VDC (21-30 VDC)
24 VAC (21-30 VAC)
24 VDC (21-30 VDC)
Power Consumption
(Consult product manuals
for details of power
requirements)
24 VAC:
85 VA (max w/o heaters)
215 VA (max w/heaters)
24 VDC:
65 W (max w/o heaters)
195 W (max w/heaters)
24 VAC:
85 VA (max w/o heaters)
215 VA (max w/heaters)
24 VDC:
65 W (max w/o heaters)
195 W (max w/heaters)
24 VAC:
85 VA (max w/o heaters)
215 VA (max w/heaters)
24 VDC:
65 W (max w/o heaters)
195 W (max w/heaters)
Visible Light
Camera Sony FCB-EX1010 Sony FCB-EX1010 Sony FCB-EX1010
Sensor Type 1/4” Exview HAD CCD
Lens Field of View 57.8° (h) to 1.7° (h)
Focal Length 3.4 mm to 122.4 mm
Zoom 36× Optical zoom, 12× E-zoom
F/# 1.6 to 4.5
Effective pixels (NTSC) 380,000 380,000 380,000
Video | IVA 6.0 Intelligent Video Analysis
IVA 6.0 Intelligent Video Analysis
www.boschsecurity.com
u Embedded analytics eliminates dedicated PCs
u Adds metadata for forensic search to recordings
u Broad range of detecting tasks and object filters
available
u New: automatic classification of person, bike, car,
truck
The Intelligent Video Analysis system by Bosch,
IVA 6.0, is the guard-assistant system of choice when
you need reliable video motion detection for indoor or
outdoor use.
IVA 6.0 is state-of-the-art intelligent video analysis that reliably detects, tracks, and analyzes moving objects
while suppressing unwanted alarms from spurious
sources in the image.
Advanced tasks like multiple line crossing, route
following, loitering, idle and removed object detection, counter flow detection, crowd density estimation, and
overhead people counting are available. Object filter
based on size, speed, direction, aspect ratio, and color can be defined.
For calibrated cameras, IVA 6.0 now automatically
distinguishes between the object types upright
person, car, bike, and truck.
The software allows you to record all of the object
information and change the rules even after the fact
for fully configurable forensic search.
IVA 6.0 is based on IVA 5.60 which is i‑LIDS approved
primary detection system for operational alert use and
event based recording system in sterile zone
monitoring applications.
IVA 6.0 is a licensed option already fully prepared in
many Bosch cameras and encoders.
Functions
Robust motion detection
IVA 6.0 is continuously developed in-house by the
Bosch research group and brings the latest level of
intelligence to IVA. It intelligently adapts to difficult conditions like changes in lighting or environment such as rain, snow, clouds, and leaves blowing in the wind.
The built-in tamper detection generates alarms on
camera hooding/masking, blinding, defocusing, and
repositioning.
The following tasks are available:
• Detect objects within, entering, or leaving an area
• Detect multiple line crossing from single line up to
three lines combined in a logical row
• Detect objects traversing a route
• Detect loitering in an area related to radius and time • Detect objects which are idle for a predefined time
span
• Detect removed objects
• Detect objects who’s properties such as size, speed,
direction, and aspect ratio change within a configured
time span according to specification (for example
something falling down)
• Count objects crossing a virtual line or entering a
certain area
• Overhead people counting (Bird's eye view)
• Detect a certain crowd level in a predefined field
• Detect specified motion direction and speed even in
crowds (for example a person moving the wrong way
in a one-way gate)
• Detect objects that move contrary to the motion of all other objects in the scene, even in crowds
• Take snapshots of frontal faces
• Combine tasks using scripts
Filters
To enhance robustness, IVA 6.0 can be configured to
ignore specified image areas and small objects.
For calibrated cameras, IVA 6.0 now automatically
distinguishes between upright persons, bikes, cars,
and trucks.
Furthermore, object size, speed, two-way direction,
aspect ratio, and color filters can be used in any
combination to create specific detection rules for
exactly the objects you are looking for.
Statistics on object properties are stored and can be
displayed for fine tuning the object filters. Object
properties can also be defined by selecting an
appropriately similar object in the video.
Intelligence-at-the-edge concept
IVA 6.0 is available in Bosch cameras and encoders.
This intelligence-at-the-edge concept allows a decision on which videos are captured based on video content
analysis. By only selecting alarm video for streaming or recording, less bandwidth and storage is used.
Alarm conditions can be signaled by a relay output on
the unit or an alarm connection, to stream video to a
decoder or video management system. Alarms can also
be transmitted to a video management system to start
extended alarm scenarios.
As well as creating alarms, IVA 6.0 produces metadata
that describes the content of the analyzed scene. This
metadata is sent over the network—and may also be
recorded—together with the video stream.
Forensic Search
The recorded metadata can be used for a full forensic
search where the rules can be changed even after the
fact within Bosch Video Management System
(Bosch VMS ) or Video Client.
New tasks can be defined and adapted for each
search, and the recorded metadata is then scanned
and evaluated accordingly.
Forensic Search is very time efficient and can scan a
huge recording database for events within seconds.
Intuitive graphical user interface
Setup is available via device web page as well as via
Configuration Manager. A wizard-based graphical user
interface guides through the configuration and
provides all the necessary tools to set up IVA 6.0 and
specify detection or counting tasks.
All configuration options are visualized exemplarily as overlays for feedback and can directly be manipulated
for intuitive configuration.
When movement is detected, the object is outlined in
yellow on the display and its motion is displayed as a
green trajectory. If an object and its motion match the rule conditions defined for one of the detector tasks,
an alarm is created and the object outlines are
switched to red. Additionally, an idle object is marked with an [I] and a removed object with an [X].
Configuration complexity on demand
In the minimal configuration, IVA 6.0 will alarm on any object in the scene. More complex setups are
supported as well: Up to eight independent tasks can
be set up in the GUI, and the alarm objects for each
task can be restricted according to their properties.
Camera calibration can be added for perspective
correction and to obtain object properties in metric or imperial systems. Half-automated calibration wizards
are available to support the calibration. A task script editor is available for fine tuning and combining
predefined tasks, and additional eight tasks can be set up there.
Installation/configuration notes
IVA 6.0 is available on the following IP cameras:
• DINION IP starlight 8000 MP
• DINION IP ultra 8000 MP
• FLEXIDOME IP panoramic 7000 MP
Further devices with a hardware design that allows the
usage of the new IVA features will follow with the next firmware and IVA release 6.10.
The IVA 6.0 software functionality is a free-of-charge
upgrade of IVA 5.60 and already part of all IVA 6.0
enabled products with the firmware release of 6.0 or
later. It upgrades automatically from an already
installed IVA 5.60 when installing the 6.0 firmware to
the device.
New IVA 6.0 customers only need to enable the 6.0
license to make it operational.
The IVA 6.0 license enables all IVA 6.0 features. IVA 6.0 is set up using either the device web page or the
Configuration Manager that is included with the
product and available for download from the Bosch
website.
Configuration Manager can be installed as often as
required on any PC that will be used for configuration
of IVA 6.0 and the products themselves.
2 | IVA 6.0 Intelligent Video Analysis
3 | IVA 6.0 Intelligent Video Analysis
Represented by:
Americas: Europe, Middle East, Africa: Asia-Pacific: China: America Latina:
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
130 Perinton Parkway
Fairport, New York, 14450, USA
Phone: +1 800 289 0096
Fax: +1 585 223 9180
[email protected]
www.boschsecurity.us
Bosch Security Systems B.V.
P.O. Box 80002
5617 BA Eindhoven, The Netherlands
Phone: + 31 40 2577 284
Fax: +31 40 2577 330
[email protected]
www.boschsecurity.com
Robert Bosch (SEA) Pte Ltd, Security
Systems
11 Bishan Street 21
Singapore 573943
Phone: +65 6571 2808
Fax: +65 6571 2699
[email protected]
www.boschsecurity.asia
Bosch (Shanghai) Security Systems Ltd.
201 Building, No. 333 Fuquan Road
North IBP
Changning District, Shanghai
200335 China
Phone +86 21 22181111
Fax: +86 21 22182398
www.boschsecurity.com.cn
Robert Bosch Ltda Security Systems Division
Via Anhanguera, Km 98
CEP 13065-900
Campinas, Sao Paulo, Brazil
Phone: +55 19 2103 2860
Fax: +55 19 2103 2862
[email protected]
www.boschsecurity.com
© Bosch Security Systems 2014 | Data subject to change without notice 14376206987 | en, V1, 27. Nov 2014
Comprehensive Video Analytics Solutions
savViTM is a unified video analytics software solution that offers a wide variety of analytics functionalities through a single, easy to use platform that integrates with existing or new surveillance systems. Featuring real-time event detection, video search and business intelligence applications, savVi provides a complete solution to the diverse video analytics requirements of multiple vertical markets.
savVi boasts a set of advanced, automated video analysis tools that provide for the immediate detection and extraction of events and valuable data from surveillance footage, replacing the manual and time-consuming tasks traditionally employed to monitor live video feeds or sift through recorded video. By employing savVi, users can make optimal use of their surveillance systems and allocate their time and attention in a more effective manner, thus increasing the return on investment in the surveillance system, as well as improving overall security, safety and business operations.
savVi leverages the use of surveillance systems by providing:
Automated Real-Time Detections and Alerts – Events of interest are automatically detected through real-time analysis of multiple video sources
Rapid Video Search – Masses of recorded video can be queried and events of interest may be located and extracted within seconds
Comprehensive Business Intelligence – Statistical information regarding traffic volumes, traffic trends and motion patterns can be automatically generated from surveillance video savVi Highlights
• Scalability – Allows running a full set of video analytics functionalities on up to 200 cameras per server • Flexibility – Enables deployment of any combination of video analytics applications on every camera with no restrictions
• Accuracy – Leverages over a decade of field-proven technology to provide high probability of detection (POD) and low false alarm rates (FAR)
• Automated Set-up and Calibration – Offers automated tools for simple, rapid and efficient set-up which eliminate the need for manual calibration
• Robustness – Delivers superior results in complex environments, including indoor and outdoor scenes, varying weather conditions and on multiple camera types (fixed, PTZ, thermal, and panoramic) • Pure Software Solution – Runs on COTS hardware
• Interoperability – Integrates with the industry’s leading video management solutions and cameras • Enterprise Grade – Provides full redundancy and fault tolerance to ensure 24/7 continuous operation • Cost-Effective – Reveals the true potential of the surveillance system for only a fraction of the cost of the entire system
savVi Real-Time Detections and Alerts
savVi delivers highly accurate real-time event detections, eliminating the need to rely on the alertness or response discipline of the system’s operator. Users define potential events of interest in advance and receive alerts when such events occur, enabling rapid responses to incidents, as they emerge.
• Transforms video surveillance system from a passive tool to a proactive detection system • Detects a wide range of events relating to people, vehicles and static objects • Analyzes video from multiple sources in parallel, and allows complex detection scenarios linking detection rules from different cameras
• Enables unlimited combinations of analytics detection rules to be applied to each camera • Offers innovative “Rule Test” for validation of detection accuracy in the installation phase • Features an Event Dispatcher tool to enable notification of real-time events via a range of communication applications (email, SMS, MMS etc.)
savVi Video Search
savVi boasts automatic and effortless retrieval and analysis of recorded video, replacing cumbersome, labor-intensive, manual searches. Users define parameters regarding the event/object of interest and receive matching search results within seconds, enabling rapid access to specific video segments buried in the stored video. • Offers extensive range of search parameter filters to pinpoint video segments of interest • Presents versatile visualization displays that minimize video viewing time • Delivers rapid results: Searches 24 hours of video in a few seconds • Enables simultaneous search on any number of cameras
• Increases efficiency in investigations relying on recorded video • Allows search to be applied in near real-time for enhanced situational awareness and incident response
savVi Business Intelligence
savVi offers automated statistical analysis to present traffic volumes, movement trends and motion patterns, enabling effortless extraction of operational data from surveillance video. Equipped with such information, facility managers, marketing leaders and business owners can make educated decisions regarding various operational and resource allocation aspects at their facility.
• Delivers accurate, wide-ranging statistical data related to people and vehicles • Offers advanced visualization tools including charts, graphs and heat maps, as well as a cloudbased reporting portal (“BI Portal”), for effortless analysis of the data • Enables exporting of the raw data for further analysis or integration with other systems • Enhances operations and marketing decisions for the retail sector through customer behavior analysis
• Provides key metrics for highway operators through vehicle flow and speed analysis Real-Time Detection Capabilities
Person Rules Moving in an area • Crossing a line • Tailgating • Loitering • Crowding • Occupancy Vehicle Rules Moving in an area • Crossing a line • Tailgating • Stopped vehicle • Speed analysis Static Object Rules Suspicious object • Asset protection • Lighting detection PTZ Rules Multiple real-time rules on PTZ presets • Autonomous PTZ Target Tracking Video Search Capabilities
Search Parameters and Capabilities Target Type – People, Vehicles, Static Objects • Event Type – Moving, Stationary, Crossing a line, Occupancy, Crowding • Search by Color • Search by Size • Search within defined time frames • Search on selected cameras or group of cameras • Search for Similar Targets
Search Results – Viewing Options Thumbnails – Search results presented in video playback thumbnails • Video Summary – Search results presented as one condensed clip of all related events • Target Path – Search results shown as graphical presentation of all motion paths in a scene for identification of trends/anomalies • Site Map – Search results of “Target Path” on a site map, showing multiple camera displays in a single view Business Intelligence Capabilities
Business Intelligence Rules for
BI Portal / Statistical Reports
Count targets (people/vehicles) • Speed analysis (vehicles) • Crowding (people) • Occupancy (people)
Business Intelligence Query Results –
Viewing Options
Statistical Analysis – Behavioral statistics in graphical and tabular reports • Target Path Analysis – Search results shown as graphical presentation of all motion paths in a scene for identification of trends/anomalies • Heat Map – Visualization of traffic levels to identify high/low traffic zones • Site Map – Search results of “Target Path Analysis” and “Heat Map” on a site map, showing multiple camera displays in a single view
Integration Partners
Supported Cameras & Encoders Axis, Cisco, Hikvision, Hanwha Techwin (Samsung), Verint, Vicon, Vivotek For additional vendors and supported models contact [email protected] Supported Video Management
Systems
Cisco, Genetec, Hanwha Techwin (Samsung), Hikvision, ISS, Milestone, OnSSI, Pelco, Verint, Vigilant
For additional vendors and supported versions contact [email protected] Supported Video Alarm Management
Software
SureView Systems
For additional vendors and supported versions contact [email protected] Agent Vi™, savVi™ and Vi™ are trademarks of Agent Video Intelligence Ltd. © 2016 Agent Video Intelligence Ltd. All rights reserved.
Agent Video Intelligence Ltd. USA: +1-855-AgentVi (+1-855-243-6884) EMEA: +972-72-220-1500 For more information, visit: www.agentvi.com or email: [email protected] Agent Video Intelligence (Agent Vi™) is the leading global provider of open architecture, video analytics software. The comprehensive video analytics solutions offered by Agent Vi extend from real-time video analysis and alerts to video search and business intelligence applications, and are fully integrated with a range of cameras, encoders and video management systems.
Based on Agent Vi’s unique, patented, Image Processing over IP (IPoIP™) software architecture – which distributes the video analysis task between the camera and a server – Agent Vi’s solutions can support up to 200 cameras running a full suite of video analytics functionalities on a single server, while offering superior accuracy and detection performance.
Integrating Agent Vi’s advanced video analytics capabilities into existing or new surveillance networks enables users to benefit from the true potential of their surveillance networks, transforming them into intelligent tools that respond to the practical challenges of the 21st century.
ABOUT DAKTRONICS
WHAT MAKES US DIFFERENT
Our service capabilities make us unmatched in the ITS industry with 120 sales and service representatives nationwide. There’s always someone to help you from sale to installation and beyond. From potential operator questions to future upgrades, you can be confident in your relationship with us and the life of your DMS systems.
ON-SITE SERVICE
› Certified engineers are ready to help you
TECHNICAL SUPPORT
› Phone service and on-site training when you need it
ONLINE SUPPORT
› Search our knowledge base or submit a service request
PROTECTION PLANS
› Extended service plans available to choose from
LARGE INVENTORY
› Millions of dollars of spare parts ready to ship
WHAT WE DO FOR YOU
Since first producing Dynamic Message Signs (DMS) in 1988, we continue to improve and deliver a reliable product. Over the years, traffic density increases while your budget may do the opposite. That’s where we come in. Daktronics engineers create innovative options while our sales, project managers, support technicians and local field engineers work together to meet your budget and deadline.
EXPERIENCE
› 5,000+ DMS installations with 45+ years of designing and manufacturing
RELIABILITY
› In-field, third party and DOT-tested NTCIP compliance
STABILITY
› Publicly traded on the NASDAQ: DAKT (FY2016 net sales $570 million)
QUALITY
› ISO 9001:2008 registered and designed to meet all US ITS standards 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
20 mm 34 mm 66 mm
TEXT SIZE
The table to the right will help determine the
appropriate character size for a display based on
viewing distance or the speed at which viewers may
be traveling. Viewing times are in seconds. Contact
a Daktronics representative for help in determining
what viewing angle best fits your needs.
30°
140°
100 ft
−700 ft−700 ft−0 ft−100 ft−200 ft−200 ft−300 ft−300 ft−400 ft−400 ft−500 ft−500 ft−600 ft−600 ft 200 ft
300 ft
400 ft
500 ft
600 ft
700 ft
800 ft
900 ft
1000+ ft −100 ft
70 30
30 15
70 30
LED TECHNOLOGY CONSIDERATIONS
RESOLUTION
The number of pixels in the physical area of a
DMS is your resolution. The greater the number per
square foot, the greater the amount of detail. See the
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)-
approved graphics as if they were displayed on a 5'
high DMS on the right.
MAXIMUM
VIEWING
DISTANCE
MINIMUM
CHARACTER
HEIGHT
MPH
15 25 35 45 55 65 75
300 ft/91 m 6 in/152 mm 13.7 8.2
450 ft/137 m 9 in/229 mm 20.5 12.3 8.8
650 ft/198 m 12 in/305 mm 29.7 17.8 12.7 9.9
1100 ft/335 m 18 in/457 mm 41.1 24.6 17.5 13.7 11.2 9.5 8.2 Shaded areas indicate adequate viewing time (seconds).
VIEWING ANGLES
Two things need to be considered when thinking about viewing angles: road configurations and DMS locations. Vanguard offers two viewing angles:
› 30 degrees — wide viewing angle for roadside placement › 140 degrees* — wider viewing angle for broad
roadways and streets
Use the graphic to the right to learn how a wide
a viewing cone should be or contact a Daktronics
representative for help in determining what viewing
angle best fits your needs.
*140 degree viewing angle only available on VS6
4 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNOLOGY COMPARISON
“Compared with text-only messages, the graphic-aided messages could be identified easier, quicker and from a further distance; seen better under adverse viewing conditions; and understood better by people who cannot understand the language in the text.”
-Hesar, Wang and Collyer
University of Rhode Island Study on Adding Graphics
to Dynamic Message Sign Messages
FULL-MATRIX AMBER (66 mm)
Take advantage of the multiple font sizes and
graphics available to help ensure motorists clearly
see your messages.
MEDIUM-RESOLUTION AMBER (34 mm)
Further improve your message legibility with sharp
characters and MUTCD-compliant graphic symbols
with more pixels in the same area as the 66 mm.
MEDIUM-RESOLUTION FULL-COLOR (34 mm)
Use highly-recognizable MUTCD-compliant graphic
symbols so viewers can see warnings in low visibility
weather like smoke and fog.
HIGH-RESOLUTION FULL-COLOR (20 mm)
Produce any text, sign or symbol in the MUTCD
catalog when you need it for traffic management
control with low-cost maintenance and service.
BENEFITS OF GRAPHICS
When using graphics on your DMS, full color improves reaction time even further. Comprehension time for messages with graphics decreases and recognition increases among non-native English speakers and older drivers. Due to this and enhanced legibility, full-color DMS have the potential to make roads safer. See the reproduced MUTCD traffic symbols below.
Daktronics was the first
DMS manufacturer to
develop full-color DMS
that adhere to all US ITS
standards. These signs
can display more than
32,000 colors using
high-quality LEDs while
the full-color technology
reduces the time
required for motorists to
recognize a message.
5 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DMS APPLICATIONS
Daktronics offers a wide range of DMS products for any roadway application. Vanguard DMS can display character heights ranging from 6"–18", as well as the viewing angles and industry-accepted brightness to ensure DMS legibility in any roadway setting.
ARTERIAL ROADS
Increase safety, alleviate smog and curb
accident rates by designating lanes in
metro areas.
FREEWAYS
Improve comprehension in less time for
high-speed traffic with MUTCD symbols
and text.
TRAVEL TIMES
Display travel times on a large sign by
using a smaller, dedicated display for
each route.
TUNNELS
Maximize safety by preparing traffic for
constricted passages, construction zones
and more.
MANAGED LANES
Direct traffic to HOV and HOT lanes
with smaller, economical display
symbols and text.
LANE USE
Control multi-lane highways with
full-color graphics and text readily
recognized by drivers.
BRIDGES
Prepare incoming and outgoing drivers
for congested areas, traffic incidents,
and harsh weather.
TOLL FACILITIES
Create a visual connection with
drivers to provide clear instruction and
organize lanes.
6 TABLE OF CONTENTS
We designed the Vanguard product line with your needs in mind, satisfying a variety of transportation purposes. The following table specifies the differences between each model. Make sure to discuss all of your options with your Regional Sales Manager to find the best fit.
ACCESS
Front
Walk-In
Rear
LED COLOR
Full-Color (RGB)
Amber (A)
Tricolor (RG)
PIXEL PITCH
15.85 mm
19.8 mm
20 mm
34 mm
46 mm
66 mm
VIEWING ANGLE
30 140
MINIMUM INTENSITY
9,200 cd/m2 (A) see
product
12,400 cm/m page 2 (RGB)
COMMUNICATION
Ethernet
Fiber
Cellular
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
NTCIP 1203 v03
NEMA TS-4
AASHTO
UL
ANSI/AWS D1.2
Structural Welding Code
FCC
NEC
OTHER
Redundant power
Conformal coating
VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VS-5220 VM-1020
VANGUARD PRODUCT SELECTION
7 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Freeway Travel Time
WALK-IN ACCESS DMS
VANGUARD VF-2020
FEATURES
WALK-IN ACCESS
Eliminates lane closures and provides a safe work environment when located over traffic
EASE OF MAINTENANCE
Even in extreme weather, technicians can work on conveniently-located components with ample work space SAFETY
OSHA-compliant equipment, tie-offs, guard rails and other cabinet space provide a safe working environment for technicians
RANGE OF SIZES
See page 9 for a listing of standard configuration options and find the model that fits your project needs
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
NTCIP 1203 v03, NEMA TS-4, AASHTO, UL, ANSI/AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code, FCC, NEC PRODUCT SELECTION VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VM-1020 VS-5220 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS
VF-2020
WALK-IN ACCESS
FULL-MATRIX DMS - MASKED FACE
30 DEGREE VIEWING CONE
MODEL NUMBER
APPROX. CABINET
DIMENSIONS1
FEET / INCHES
(HxWxD)
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
6" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
9" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
12" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
18" HIGH
WEIGHT
POUNDS
AMPS PER
LEG3
TYPICAL
POWER
USAGE
WATTS4
VF-2020-96x288-20-RGB 7'11" x 21'6" x 4'0" 9/48 5/29 4/22 3/15 3,000 31 2,066 VF-2020-96x304-20-RGB 7'11" x 22'7" x 4'0" 9/50 5/30 4/23 3/16 3,100 33 2,182 VF-2020-96x320-20-RGB 7'11" x 23'8" x 4'0" 9/53 5/32 4/24 3/17 3,200 34 2,257 VF-2020-96x336-20-RGB 7'11" x 24'9" x 4'0" 9/56 5/33 4/26 3/17 3,400 36 2,413 VF-2020-96x352-20-RGB 7'11" x 25'10" x 4'0" 9/58 5/35 4/27 3/18 3,500 38 2,528 VF-2020-96x368-20-RGB 7'11" x 26'11" x 4'0" 9/61 5/37 4/28 3/19 3,600 32 2,661 VF-2020-96x384-20-RGB 7'11" x 28'0" x 4'0" 9/64 5/38 4/29 3/20 3,800 33 2,770 VF-2020-96x400-20-RGB 7'11" x 29'1" x 4'0" 9/66 5/40 4/31 3/21 3,950 33 2,880 VF-2020-96x416-20-RGB 7'11" x 30'2" x 4'0" 9/69 5/41 4/32 3/22 4,000 37 2,968 VF-2020-96x432-20-RGB 7'11" x 31'3" x 4'0" 9/72 5/42 4/33 3/22 4,200 38 3,117 VF-2020-54x150-34-RGB 7'11" x 18'4" x 4'0" - 5/25 4/19 3/12 2,550 19 972 VF-2020-54x180-34-RGB 7'11" x 21'7" x 4'0" - 5/30 4/22 3/15 3,000 20 1,120 VF-2020-54x210-34-RGB 7'11" x 24'10" x 4'0" - 5/35 4/26 3/17 3,500 23 1,313 VF-2020-54x225-34-RGB 7'11" x 26'5" x 4'0" - 5/37 4/28 3/18 3,600 25 1,411 VF-2020-54x240-34-RGB 7'11" x 28'1" x 4'0" - 5/40 4/30 3/20 3,800 26 1,487 VF-2020-54x255-34-RGB 7'11" x 29'8" x 4'0" - 5/42 4/32 3/21 3,900 28 1,603 VF-2020-27x75-66-A 7'11" x 18'4" x 4'0" - - - 3/12 2,550 19 494 VF-2020-27x90-66-A 7'11" x 21'7" x 4'0" - - - 3/15 3,000 20 538 VF-2020-27x105-66-A 7'11" x 24'10" x 4'0" - - - 3/17 3,400 21 622 VF-2020-27x110-66-A 7'11" x 25'11" x 4'0" - - - 3/18 3,530 21 637 VF-2020-27x120-66-A 7'11" x 28'1" x 4'0" - - - 3/20 3,800 22 667 VF-2020-27x125-66-A 7'11" x 29'2" x 4'0" - - - 3/21 3,840 22 681 NOTES
1. Display cabinet depth dimensions include zee-extrusion mounting brackets on the rear of the cabinet. Contact Daktronics for specific mounting details.
2. Many other font sizes are available. Contact Daktronics for details about other fonts.
3. Amps Per Leg numbers are based on a maximum load of typical DMS, including a fully loaded 15A convenience outlet. Maximum current is a per leg value for 120/240 3W+G system and will vary with auxiliary options installed in the DMS. Contact Daktronics for more information.
4. Typical power includes a partially illuminated LED sign (15% of the pixels at full amber intensity and 38% of the pixels at full color intensity), the sign controller and ventilation system.
5. Sign front face paint color is semi-gloss black. Other sides are mill finish aluminum.
6. Consistent with Daktronics continuous improvement program, all product features are subject to change without notice. 66 mm FONT
INTERCHARACTER INTER-LINE
18" 7x5_1 1 3
34 mm FONT
INTERCHARACTER INTER-LINE
9" 7x5_1 1 3
12" 9x6_2 2 4
18" 14x10_2 2 6
20 mm FONT
INTERCHARACTER INTER-LINE
6" 7x5_1 1 3
9" 12x8_2 2 6
12" 15x10_2 3 8
18" 23x15_3 4 12
FIXED LOCATION, VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGN
SERIES
NUMBER
PIXEL
ROWS
PIXEL
COLUMNS PIXEL
SPACING (MM) LED
COLOR
VF-2020-96x288-20-RGB
MODEL # GUIDE
PRODUCT SELECTION VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VM-1020 VS-5220 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Arterial Roads Freeways Tunnels Bridges
REAR ACCESS DMS
VANGUARD VF-2120
FEATURES
REAR ACCESS
Rear catwalk with quick-access doors allows for easier maintenance and minimizes lane closures
EASE OF MAINTENANCE
Sliding doors allow instant access to components and freedom of movement
RANGE OF SIZES
See page 11 for a listing of standard configuration options and find the model that fits your project needs
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
NTCIP 1203 v03, NEMA TS-4, AASHTO, UL, ANSI/AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code, FCC, NEC PRODUCT SELECTION VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VM-1020 VS-5220 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS
VF-2120
REAR ACCESS
FULL-MATRIX DMS - MASKED FACE
30 DEGREE VIEWING CONE FIXED LOCATION, VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGN SERIES
NUMBER
PIXEL
ROWS
PIXEL
COLUMNS PIXEL
SPACING (MM) LED
COLOR
VF-2120-36x125-46-RGB
MODEL NUMBER
APPROX. CABINET
DIMENSIONS1
FEET / INCHES
(HxWxD)
LINES/CHAR.
PER LINE
12" HIGH
LINES/CHAR.
PER LINE
18" HIGH
WEIGHT
POUNDS
AMPS PER
LEG3
(A)
TYPICAL
POWER
USAGE
WATTS4 (A)
VF-2120-27x60-46-A 6'0" x 12'9" x 1'4" 3/10 2/6 1,165 25 378 VF-2120-27x75-46-A 6'0" x 15'0" x 1'4" 3/12 2/8 1,415 26 480 VF-2120-27x90-46-A 6'0" x 17'2" x 1'4" 3/15 2/10 1,665 27 511 VF-2120-27x105-46-A 6'0" x 19'4" x 1'4" 3/17 2/11 1,910 28 613 VF-2120-27x110-46-A 6'0" x 20'1" x 1'4" 3/18 2/12 2,000 29 624 VF-2120-27x120-46-A 6'0" x 21'6" x 1'4" 3/20 2/13 2,160 30 645 VF-2120-27x125-46-A 6'0" x 22'3" x 1'4" 3/21 2/14 2,250 30 725 VF-2120-36x60-46-A 7'3" x 12'9" x 1'4" 4/10 2/6 1,430 27 420 VF-2120-36x75-46-A 7'3" x 15'0" x 1'4" 4/12 2/8 1,735 28 532 VF-2120-36x90-46-A 7'3" x 17'2" x 1'4" 4/15 2/10 2,045 30 575 VF-2120-36x105-46-A 7'3" x 19'4" x 1'4" 4/17 2/11 2,355 26 768 VF-2120-36x110-46-A 7'3" x 20'1" x 1'4" 4/18 2/12 2,465 27 789 VF-2120-36x120-46-A 7'3" x 21'6" x 1'4" 4/20 2/13 2,665 27 810 VF-2120-36x125-46-A 7'3" x 22'3" x 1'4" 4/21 2/14 2,775 28 894 VF-2120-27x60-66-A 7'11" x 17'1" x 1'4" - 3/10 1,400 30 515 VF-2120-27x75-66-A 7'11" x 20'3" x 1'4" - 3/12 1,700 28 714 VF-2120-27x90-66-A 7'11" x 23'6" x 1'4" - 3/15 2,000 28 833 VF-2120-27x105-66-A 7'11" x 26'9" x 1'4" - 3/17 2,300 30 951 VF-2120-27x110-66-A 7'11" x 27'10" x 1'4" - 3/18 2,405 30 968 VF-2120-27x120-66-A 7'11" x 30'0" x 1'4" - 3/20 2,600 30 1,070 VF-2120-27x125-66-A 7'11" x 31'1" x 1'4" - 3/21 2,705 30 1,086 NOTES
1. Display cabinet depth dimensions include zee-extrusion mounting brackets on the rear of the cabinet. Contact Daktronics for specific mounting details.
2. Many other font sizes are available. Contact Daktronics for details about other fonts.
3. Amps Per Leg numbers are based on a maximum load of typical DMS, including a fully loaded 15A convenience outlet. Maximum current is a per leg value for 120/240 3W+G system and will vary with auxiliary options installed in the DMS. Contact Daktronics for more information.
4. Typical power includes a partially illuminated LED sign (15% of the pixels at full amber intensity and 38% of the pixels at 100% intensity), the sign controller and ventilation system.
5. Sign front face paint color is semi-gloss black. Other sides are mill finish aluminum.
6. Consistent with Daktronics continuous improvement program, all product features are subject to change without notice. 66 mm FONT
INTERCHARACTER INTER-LINE
18" 7x5_1 1 3
46 mm FONT
INTERCHARACTER INTER-LINE
12" 7x5_1 1 3
18" 12x8_2 1 5
MODEL # GUIDE
PRODUCT SELECTION VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VM-1020 VS-5220 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Managed
Lanes Arterial Roads Tunnels Bridges Toll Facilities
MASKED FRONT ACCESS DMS
VANGUARD VF-2420
FEATURES
FRONT ACCESS
Smaller cabinet surface area contributes to weather/wind resistance; vertically-hinged, no-lift doors swing open to the left for easy access and lock open for personnel safety
EASE OF MAINTENANCE
The side mount makes maintenance easier and minimizes lane closures
RANGE OF SIZES
See pages 15-19 for available matrix sizes and find the model that fits your project needs
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
NTCIP 1203 v03, NEMA TS-4, AASHTO, UL, ANSI/AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code, FCC, NEC PRODUCT SELECTION VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VM-1020 VS-5220 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS
VF-2420
FRONT ACCESS
FULL-MATRIX DMS - MASKED FACE
30 DEGREE VIEWING CONE FIXED LOCATION, VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGN SERIES
NUMBER
PIXEL
ROWS
PIXEL
COLUMNS PIXEL
SPACING (MM) LED
COLOR
VF-2420-96x288-20-RGB
MODEL NUMBER
APPROX. CABINET
DIMENSIONS1
FEET / INCHES
(HxWxD)
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
6" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
9" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
12" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
18" HIGH
WEIGHT
POUNDS
AMPS PER
LEG3
TYPICAL
POWER
USAGE
WATTS4
VF-2420-48x96-20-RGB 4'7" x 7'10" x 1'2" 5/16 3/9 2/7 1/5 420 17 529 VF-2420-48x128-20-RGB 4'7" x 10'0" x 1'2" 5/21 3/12 2/9 1/6 530 18 683 VF-2420-48x144-20-RGB 4'7" x 11'1" x 1'2" 5/24 3/14 2/11 1/7 590 18 740 VF-2420-48x160-20-RGB 4'7" x 12'2" x 1'2" 5/26 3/16 2/12 1/8 650 19 837 VF-2420-48x176-20-RGB 4'7" x 13'3" x 1'2" 5/29 3/17 2/13 1/9 710 19 894 VF-2420-48x192-20-RGB 4'7" x 14'4" x 1'2" 5/32 3/19 2/15 1/10 770 19 950 VF-2420-48x208-20-RGB 4'7" x 15'5" x 1'2" 5/34 3/20 2/16 1/11 830 20 1,047 VF-2420-48x224-20-RGB 4'7" x 16'6" x 1'2" 5/37 3/22 2/17 1/12 880 20 1,104 VF-2420-48x240-20-RGB 4'7" x 17'7" x 1'2" 5/40 3/24 2/18 1/12 940 20 1,163 VF-2420-48x256-20-RGB 4'7" x 18'8" x 1'2" 5/42 3/25 2/19 1/13 1,000 20 1,302 VF-2420-48x272-20-RGB 4'7" x 19'9" x 1'2" 5/45 3/27 2/21 1/14 1,060 21 1,358 VF-2420-48x288-20-RGB 4'7" x 20'10" x 1'2" 5/48 3/28 2/22 1/15 1,120 21 1,415 VF-2420-48x304-20-RGB 4'7" x 21'11" x 1'2" 5/50 3/30 2/23 1/16 1,180 21 1,512 VF-2420-48x320-20-RGB 4'7" x 23'0" x 1'2" 5/53 3/32 2/24 1/17 1,230 22 1,569 VF-2420-48x336-20-RGB 4'7" x 24'1" x 1'2" 5/56 3/33 2/25 1/17 1,290 22 1,626 VF-2420-48x352-20-RGB 4'7" x 25'2" x 1'2" 5/58 3/35 2/27 1/18 1,350 22 1,724 VF-2420-48x368-20-RGB 4'7" x 26'3" x 1'2" 5/61 3/36 2/28 1/19 1,410 23 1,784 VF-2420-48x384-20-RGB 4'7" x 27'4" x 1'2" 5/64 3/38 2/29 1/20 1,470 23 1,844 VF-2420-48x400-20-RGB 4'7" x 28'5" x 1'2" 5/66 3/40 2/30 1/21 1,530 23 1,944 VF-2420-48x416-20-RGB 4'7" x 29'6" x 1'2" 5/69 3/41 2/32 1/22 1,580 24 2,004 VF-2420-48x432-20-RGB 4'7" x 30'7" x 1'2" 5/72 3/43 2/33 1/22 1,640 24 2,064 VF-2420-64x96-20-RGB 5'8" x 7'10" x 1'2" 6/16 3/9 3/7 2/5 490 15 687 VF-2420-64x128-20-RGB 5'8" x 10'0" x 1'2" 6/21 3/12 3/9 2/6 620 15 864 VF-2420-64x144-20-RGB 5'8" x 11'1" x 1'2" 6/24 3/14 3/11 2/7 690 15 976 VF-2420-64x160-20-RGB 5'8" x 12'2" x 1'2" 6/26 3/16 3/12 2/8 760 15 1,041 VF-2420-64x176-20-RGB 5'8" x 13'3" x 1'2" 6/29 3/17 3/13 2/9 830 15 1,154 VF-2420-64x192-20-RGB 5'8" x 14'4" x 1'2" 6/32 3/19 3/15 2/10 900 17 1,310 VF-2420-64x208-20-RGB 5'8" x 15'5" x 1'2" 6/34 3/20 3/16 2/11 950 18 1,374 VF-2420-64x224-20-RGB 5'8" x 16'6" x 1'2" 6/37 3/22 3/17 2/12 1,030 20 1,486 VF-2420-64x240-20-RGB 5'8" x 17'7" x 1'2" 6/40 3/24 3/18 2/12 1,100 21 1,599 VF-2420-64x256-20-RGB 5'8" x 18'8" x 1'2" 6/42 3/25 3/19 2/13 1,170 22 1,663 VF-2420-64x272-20-RGB 5'8" x 19'9" x 1'2" 6/45 3/27 3/21 2/14 1,240 24 1,779 VF-2420-64x288-20-RGB 5'8" x 20'10" x 1'2" 6/48 3/28 3/22 2/15 1,300 25 1,896 VF-2420-64x304-20-RGB 5'8" x 21'11" x 1'2" 6/50 3/30 3/23 2/16 1,370 26 1,965 VF-2420-64x320-20-RGB 5'8" x 23'0" x 1'2" 6/53 3/32 3/24 2/17 1,440 28 2,081 VF-2420-64x336-20-RGB 5'8" x 24'1" x 1'2" 6/56 3/33 3/25 2/17 1,510 29 2,198 VF-2420-64x352-20-RGB 5'8" x 25'2" x 1'2" 6/58 3/35 3/27 2/18 1,580 30 2,266 VF-2420-64x368-20-RGB 5'8" x 26'3" x 1'2" 6/61 3/36 3/28 2/19 1,640 32 2,404 VF-2420-64x384-20-RGB 5'8" x 27'4" x 1'2" 6/64 3/38 3/29 2/20 1,710 34 2,521 VF-2420-64x400-20-RGB 5'8" x 28'5" x 1'2" 6/66 3/40 3/30 2/21 1,780 35 2,589 VF-2420-64x416-20-RGB 5'8" x 29'6" x 1'2" 6/69 3/41 3/32 2/22 1,850 36 2,706 VF-2420-64x432-20-RGB 5'8" x 30'7" x 1'2" 6/72 3/43 3/33 2/22 1,920 38 2,823 MODEL # GUIDE PRODUCT SELECTION VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VM-1020 VS-5220 15 TABLE OF CONTENTS
MODEL NUMBER
APPROX. CABINET
DIMENSIONS1
FEET / INCHES
(HxWxD)
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
6" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
9" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
12" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
18" HIGH
WEIGHT
POUNDS
AMPS PER
LEG3
TYPICAL
POWER
USAGE
WATTS4
VF-2420-80x64-20-RGB 6'9" x 5'8" x 1'2" 8/10 4/6 3/5 2/3 410 15 501 VF-2420-80x80-20-RGB 6'9" x 6'9" x 1'2" 8/13 4/8 3/6 2/4 480 15 599 VF-2420-80x96-20-RGB 6'9" x 7'10" x 1'2" 8/16 4/9 3/7 2/5 560 15 697 VF-2420-80x128-20-RGB 6'9" x 10'0" x 1'2" 8/21 4/12 3/9 2/6 750 15 893 VF-2420-80x144-20-RGB 6'9" x 11'1" x 1'2" 8/24 4/14 3/11 2/7 790 15 993 VF-2420-80x160-20-RGB 6'9" x 12'2" x 1'2" 8/26 4/16 3/12 2/8 870 16 1,133 VF-2420-80x176-20-RGB 6'9" x 13'3' x 1'2" 8/29 4/17 3/13 2/9 950 17 1,231 VF-2420-80x192-20-RGB 6'9" x 14'4" x 1'2" 8/32 4/19 3/15 2/10 1,030 19 1,329 VF-2420-80x208-20-RGB 6'9" x 15'5" x 1'2" 8/34 4/20 3/16 2/11 1,100 20 1,427 VF-2420-80x224-20-RGB 6'9" x 16'6" x 1'2" 8/37 4/22 3/17 2/12 1,180 22 1,530 VF-2420-80x240-20-RGB 6'9" x 17'7" x 1'2" 8/40 4/24 3/18 2/12 1,260 23 1,634 VF-2420-80x256-20-RGB 6'9" x 18'8" x 1'2" 8/42 4/25 3/19 2/13 1,340 25 1,737 VF-2420-80x272-20-RGB 6'9" x 19'9" x 1'2" 8/45 4/27 3/21 2/14 1,410 22 1,400 VF-2420-80x288-20-RGB 6'9" x 20'10" x 1'2" 8/48 4/28 3/22 2/15 1,490 28 1,944 VF-2420-80x304-20-RGB 6'9" x 21'11" x 1'2" 8/50 4/30 3/23 2/16 1,570 30 2,068 VF-2420-80x320-20-RGB 6'9" x 23'0" x 1'2" 8/53 4/32 3/24 2/17 1,650 31 2,171 VF-2420-80x336-20-RGB 6'9" x 24'1" x 1'2" 8/56 4/33 3/25 2/17 1,720 33 2,275 VF-2420-80x352-20-RGB 6'9" x 25'2" x 1'2" 8/58 4/35 3/27 2/18 1,800 34 2,378 VF-2420-80x368-20-RGB 6'9" x 26'3" x 1'2" 8/61 4/36 3/28 2/19 1,880 36 2,481 VF-2420-80x384-20-RGB 6'9" x 27'4" x 1'2" 8/64 4/38 3/29 2/20 1,960 37 2,584 VF-2420-80x400-20-RGB 6'9" x 28'5" x 1'2" 8/66 4/40 3/30 2/21 2,030 39 2,688 VF-2420-80x416-20-RGB 6'9" x 29'6" x 1'2" 8/69 4/41 3/32 2/22 2,110 40 2,791 VF-2420-80x432-20-RGB 6'9" x 30'7" x 1'2" 8/72 4/43 3/33 2/22 2,190 31 2,937 VF-2420-96x96-20-RGB 7'10" x 7'10" x 1'2" 9/16 5/9 4/7 3/5 630 15 766 VF-2420-96x128-20-RGB 7'10" x 10'0" x 1'2" 9/21 5/12 4/9 3/6 810 15 1,029 VF-2420-96x144-20-RGB 7'10" x 11'1" x 1'2" 9/24 5/14 4/11 3/7 890 16 1,139 VF-2420-96x160-20-RGB 7'10" x 12'2" x 1'2" 9/26 5/16 4/12 3/8 980 18 1,249 VF-2420-96x176-20-RGB 7'10" x 13'3' x 1'2" 9/29 5/17 4/13 3/9 1,070 20 1,360 VF-2420-96x192-20-RGB 7'10" x 14'4" x 1'2" 9/32 5/19 4/15 3/10 1,160 22 1,476 VF-2420-96x208-20-RGB 7'10" x 15'5" x 1'2" 9/34 5/20 4/16 3/11 1,240 23 1,592 VF-2420-96x224-20-RGB 7'10" x 16'6" x 1'2" 9/37 5/22 4/17 3/12 1,330 25 1,708 VF-2420-96x240-20-RGB 7'10" x 17'7" x 1'2" 9/40 5/24 4/18 3/12 1,420 27 1,824 VF-2420-96x256-20-RGB 7'10" x 18'8" x 1'2" 9/42 5/25 4/19 3/13 1,500 29 1,961 VF-2420-96x272-20-RGB 7'10" x 19'9" x 1'2" 9/45 5/27 4/21 3/14 1,590 30 2,077 VF-2420-96x288-20-RGB 7'10" x 20'10" x 1'2" 9/48 5/28 4/22 3/15 1,680 32 2,193 VF-2420-96x304-20-RGB 7'10" x 21'11" x 1'2" 9/50 5/30 4/23 3/16 1,770 34 2,308 VF-2420-96x320-20-RGB 7'10" x 23'0" x 1'2" 9/53 5/32 4/24 3/17 1,850 36 2,424 VF-2420-96x336-20-RGB 7'10" x 24'1" x 1'2" 9/56 5/33 4/25 3/17 1,940 37 2,540 VF-2420-96x352-20-RGB 7'10" x 25'2" x 1'2" 9/58 5/35 4/27 3/18 2,030 39 2,656 VF-2420-96x368-20-RGB 7'10" x 26'3" x 1'2" 9/61 5/36 4/28 3/19 2,110 34 2,829 VF-2420-96x384-20-RGB 7'10" x 27'4" x 1'2" 9/64 5/38 4/29 3/20 2,200 34 2,939 VF-2420-96x400-20-RGB 7'10" x 28'5" x 1'2" 9/66 5/40 4/30 3/21 2,290 35 3,048 VF-2420-96x416-20-RGB 7'10" x 29'6" x 1'2" 9/69 5/41 4/32 3/22 2,380 39 3,177 VF-2420-96x432-20-RGB 7'10" x 30'7" x 1'2" 9/72 5/43 4/33 3/22 2,460 40 3,286 VF-2420
FRONT ACCESS
FULL-MATRIX DMS - MASKED FACE
30 DEGREE VIEWING CONE FIXED LOCATION, VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGN SERIES
NUMBER
PIXEL
ROWS
PIXEL
COLUMNS PIXEL
SPACING (MM) LED
COLOR
VF-2420-96x288-20-RGB
MODEL # GUIDE
PRODUCT SELECTION VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VM-1020 VS-5220 16 TABLE OF CONTENTS
VF-2420
FRONT ACCESS
FULL-MATRIX DMS - MASKED FACE
30 DEGREE VIEWING CONE FIXED LOCATION, VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGN SERIES
NUMBER
PIXEL
ROWS
PIXEL
COLUMNS PIXEL
SPACING (MM) LED
COLOR
VF-2420-54x120-34-RGB
MODEL NUMBER
APPROX. CABINET
DIMENSIONS1
FEET / INCHES
(HxWxD)
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
9" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
12" HIGH
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
18" HIGH
WEIGHT
POUNDS
AMPS PER
LEG3
(RGB)
TYPICAL
POWER
USAGE
WATTS4 (RGB)
AMPS PER
LEG3
(A)
TYPICAL
POWER
USAGE
WATTS4 (A)
VF-2420-27x60-34-A or RGB 4'0" x 7'6" x 1'2" 3/10 2/7 1/5 380 15 329 15 266 VF-2420-27x75-34-A or RGB 4'0" x 9'2" x 1'2" 3/12 2/9 1/6 470 15 404 15 325 VF-2420-27x90-34-A or RGB 4'0" x 10'9" x 1'2" 3/15 2/11 1/7 550 15 439 15 345 VF-2420-27x105-34-A or RGB 4'0" x 12'5" x 1'2" 3/17 2/13 1/8 630 15 514 15 404 VF-2420-27x120-34-A or RGB 4'0" x 14'0" x 1'2" 3/20 2/15 1/10 710 15 549 15 423 VF-2420-36x60-34-A or RGB 4'11" x 7'6" x 1'2" 4/10 3/7 2/5 450 15 375 15 292 VF-2420-36x75-34-A or RGB 4'11" x 9'2" x 1'2" 4/12 3/9 2/6 540 15 462 15 358 VF-2420-36x90-34-A or RGB 4'11" x 10'9" x 1'2" 4/15 3/11 2/7 640 15 509 15 383 VF-2420-36x105-34-A or RGB 4'11" x 12'5" x 1'2" 4/17 3/13 2/8 730 15 595 15 449 VF-2420-36x120-34-A or RGB 4'11" x 14'0" x 1'2" 4/20 3/15 2/10 830 15 642 15 475 VF-2420-36x135-34-A or RGB 4'11" x 15'8" x 1'2" 4/22 3/16 2/11 945 15 594 15 456 VF-2420-36x150-A or RGB 4'11" x 17'3" x 1'2" 4/25 3/19 2/13 1020 15 498 15 500 VF-2420-45x60-34-A or RGB 5'11" x 7'6" x 1'2" 5/10 3/7 2/5 510 15 422 15 318 VF-2420-45x75-34-A or RGB 5'11" x 9'2" x 1'2" 5/12 3/9 2/6 620 15 520 15 390 VF-2420-45x90-34-A or RGB 5'11" x 10'9" x 1'2" 5/15 3/11 2/7 730 15 579 15 422 VF-2420-45x105-34-A or RGB 5'11" x 12'5" x 1'2" 5/17 3/13 2/8 840 15 677 15 494 VF-2420-45x120-34-A or RGB 5'11" x 14'0" x 1'2" 5/20 3/15 2/10 940 15 735 15 527 VF-2420-45x135-34-A or RGB 5'11" x 15'8" x 1'2" 5/22 3/16 2/11 1100 15 571 21 517 VF-2420-54x60-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 7'6" x 1'2" 5/10 4/7 3/5 580 15 469 15 343 VF-2420-54x75-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 9'2" x 1'2" 5/12 4/9 3/6 700 15 579 15 422 VF-2420-54x90-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 10'9" x 1'2" 5/15 4/11 3/7 820 15 648 15 461 VF-2420-54x105-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 12'5" x 1'2" 5/17 4/13 3/8 940 15 758 15 539 VF-2420-54x120-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 14'0" x 1'2" 5/20 4/15 3/10 1,060 15 873 15 622 VF-2420-54x150-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 17'3" x 1'2" 5/25 4/19 3/12 1,335 17 1,025 16 758 VF-2420-54x180-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 20'6" x 1'2" 5/30 4/22 3/15 1,600 20 1,241 19 857 VF-2420-54x210-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 23'9" x 1'2" 5/35 4/26 3/17 1,865 24 1,392 22 1,000 VF-2420-54x225-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 25'4" x 1'2" 5/37 4/28 3/18 2,025 31 1,328 31 695 VF-2420-54x240-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 27'0" x 1'2" 5/40 4/30 3/20 2,135 27 1,599 26 1,165 VF-2420-54x255-34-A or RGB 6'11" x 28'8" x 1'2" 5/42 4/32 3/21 2,265 29 1,713 27 1,245 NOTES
1. Display cabinet depth dimensions include zee-extrusion mounting brackets on the rear of the cabinet. Contact Daktronics for specific mounting details.
2. Many other font sizes are available. Contact Daktronics for details about other fonts.
3. Amps Per Leg numbers are based on a maximum load of typical DMS, including a fully loaded 15A convenience outlet. Maximum current is a per leg value for 120/240 3W+G system and will vary with auxiliary options installed in the DMS. Contact Daktronics for more information.
4. Typical power includes a partially illuminated LED sign (15% of the pixels at full amber intensity and 38% of the pixels at full color intensity), the sign controller and ventilation system.
5. Sign front face paint color is semi-gloss black. Other sides are mill finish aluminum.
6. Consistent with Daktronics continuous improvement program, all product features are subject to change without notice. 34 mm FONT
INTERCHARACTER INTER-LINE
9" 7x5_1 1 3
12" 9x6_2 2 4
18" 14x10_2 2 6
20 mm FONT
INTERCHARACTER INTER-LINE
6" 7x5_1 1 3
9" 12x8_2 2 6
12" 15x10_2 3 8
18" 23x15_3 4 12
MODEL # GUIDE
PRODUCT SELECTION VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VM-1020 VS-5220 17 TABLE OF CONTENTS
VF-2420
FRONT ACCESS
FULL-MATRIX DMS - MASKED FACE
30 DEGREE VIEWING CONE FIXED LOCATION, VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGN SERIES
NUMBER
PIXEL
ROWS
PIXEL
COLUMNS PIXEL
SPACING (MM) LED
COLOR
VF-2420-45x125-46-RGB
MODEL NUMBER
APPROX. CABINET
DIMENSIONS1
FEET / INCHES
(HxWxD)
LINES/CHAR.
PER LINE
12" HIGH
LINES/CHAR.
PER LINE
18" HIGH
WEIGHT
POUNDS
AMPS PER
LEG3
(A)
TYPICAL
POWER
USAGE
WATTS4 (A)
VF-2420-18x60-46-A 4'0" x 10'1" x 1'2" 2/10 1/6 490 15 314 VF-2420-18x75-46-A 4'0" x 12'4" x 1'2" 2/12 1/8 600 15 335 VF-2420-18x90-46-A 4'0" x 14'6" x 1'2" 2/15 1/10 700 15 396 VF-2420-18x105-46-A 4'0" x 16'8" x 1'2" 2/17 1/11 810 15 457 VF-2420-18x110-46-A 4'0" x 17'5" x 1'2" 2/18 1/12 840 15 464 VF-2420-18x120-46-A 4'0" x 18'10" x 1'2" 2/20 1/13 920 15 479 VF-2420-18x125-46-A 4'0" x 19'7" x 1'2" 2/21 1/14 950 15 486 VF-2420-27x60-46-A 5'4" x 10'1" x 1'2" 3/10 2/6 600 15 356 VF-2420-27x75-46-A 5'4" x 12'4" x 1'2" 3/12 2/8 730 15 388 VF-2420-27x90-46-A 5'4" x 14'6" x 1'2" 3/15 2/10 860 15 460 VF-2420-27x105-46-A 5'4" x 16'8" x 1'2" 3/17 2/11 990 15 503 VF-2420-27x110-46-A 5'4" x 17'5" x 1'2" 3/18 2/12 1,030 15 542 VF-2420-27x120-46-A 5'4" x 18'10" x 1'2" 3/20 2/13 1,120 15 563 VF-2420-27x125-46-A 5'4" x 19'7" x 1'2" 3/21 2/14 1,160 15 574 VF-2420-36x60-46-A 6'7" x 10'2" x 1'2" 3/10 2/6 710 15 398 VF-2420-36x75-46-A 6'7" x 12'4" x 1'2" 3/12 2/8 870 15 441 VF-2420-36x90-46-A 6'7" x 14'6" x 1'2" 3/15 2/10 1,020 15 523 VF-2420-36x105-46-A 6'7" x 16'8" x 1'2" 3/17 2/11 1,170 15 650 VF-2420-36x110-46-A 6'7" x 17'5" x 1'2" 3/18 2/12 1,220 15 664 VF-2420-36x120-46-A 6'7" x 18'10" x 1'2" 3/20 2/13 1,330 15 692 VF-2420-36x125-46-A 6'7" x 19'7" x 1'2" 3/21 2/14 1,380 15 706 VF-2420-45x60-46-A 7'11" x 10'2" x 1'2" 4/10 3/6 820 15 441 VF-2420-45x75-46-A 7'11" x 12'4" x 1'2" 4/12 3/8 1,000 15 494 VF-2420-45x90-46-A 7'11" x 14'6" x 1'2" 4/15 3/10 1,180 15 631 VF-2420-45x105-46-A 7'11" x 16'8" x 1'2" 4/17 3/11 1,350 16 724 VF-2420-45x110-46-A 7'11" x 17'5" x 1'2" 4/18 3/12 1,410 17 742 VF-2420-45x120-46-A 7'11" x 18'10" x 1'2" 4/20 3/13 1,530 18 777 VF-2420-45x125-46-A 7'11" x 19'7" x 1'2" 4/21 3/14 1,590 19 795 46 mm FONT
INTERCHARACTER INTER-LINE
12" 7x5_1 1 3
18" 11x7_2 1 5
MODEL # GUIDE
PRODUCT SELECTION VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VM-1020 VS-5220 18 TABLE OF CONTENTS
VF-2420
FRONT ACCESS
FULL-MATRIX DMS - MASKED FACE
30 DEGREE VIEWING CONE FIXED LOCATION, VARIABLE MESSAGE SIGN SERIES
NUMBER
PIXEL
ROWS
PIXEL
COLUMNS PIXEL
SPACING (MM) LED
COLOR
VF-2420-27x125-66-RGB
MODEL NUMBER
APPROX. CABINET
DIMENSIONS1
FEET / INCHES
(HxWxD)
LINES/
CHAR.
PER LINE
18" HIGH
WEIGHT
POUNDS
AMPS PER
LEG3
(A)
TYPICAL
POWER
USAGE
WATTS4 (A)
VF-2420-18x60-66-A 5'11" x 15'0" x 1'2" 2/10 910 15 387 VF-2420-18x75-66-A 5'11" x 18'3" x 1'2" 2/12 1,110 15 456 VF-2420-18x90-66-A 5'11" x 21'6" x 1'2" 2/15 1,320 15 526 VF-2420-18x105-66-A 5'11" x 24'9" x 1'2" 2/17 1,520 15 595 VF-2420-18x110-66-A 5'11" x 25'10" x 1'2" 2/18 1,590 15 688 VF-2420-18x120-66-A 5'11" x 28'0" x 1'2" 2/20 1,720 15 709 VF-2420-18x125-66-A 5'11" x 29'1" x 1'2" 2/21 1,790 16 759 VF-2420-27x60-66-A 7'11" x 15'0" x 1'2" 3/10 1,150 15 446 VF-2420-27x75-66-A 7'11" x 18'3" x 1'2" 3/12 1,400 15 574 VF-2420-27x90-66-A 7'11" x 21'6" x 1'2" 3/15 1,660 16 658 VF-2420-27x105-66-A 7'11" x 24'9" x 1'2" 3/17 1,910 18 743 VF-2420-27x110-66-A 7'11" x 25'10" x 1'2" 3/18 2,000 19 797 VF-2420-27x120-66-A 7'11" x 28'0" x 1'2" 3/20 2,170 21 827 VF-2420-27x125-66-A 7'11" x 29'1" x 1'2" 3/21 2,250 22 882 NOTES
1. Display cabinet depth measurement includes zee-mounting brackets on the rear of the cabinet. Contact Daktronics for more information.
2. Many other font sizes are available. Contact Daktronics for more information.
3. This calculation is based on the maximum load of a typical DMS, including a fully-loaded 15A convenience outlet. This value is measured for a 120/240 3W+G system and it will vary with auxiliary options installed in the DMS. Contact Daktronics for more information.
4. Typical power includes a partially-illuminated LED sign (15% of the pixels at full amber intensity and 38% of the pixels at full color intensity), the sign controller and ventilation system.
5. Sign front face paint color is semi-gloss black. Other sides are mill finish aluminum.
6. With the continuous improvement of all Daktronics products, the features and measurements on this page are subject to change without notice. 66 mm FONT
INTERCHARACTER INTER-LINE
18" 7x5_1 1 3
MODEL # GUIDE
PRODUCT SELECTION VF-2020 VF-2120 VX-242X VF-2420 VS6 VM-1020 VS-5220 19 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Dimensions:
3.4" H x 8.75" W x 12" D
(88 mm x 222 mm x 305 mm)
Weight:
11 lbs (5 kg)
VFC SIGN CONTROLLER
Daktronics offers the most powerful and easy-to-use DMS controllers in the industry. Compliant with NTCIP 1203 v03, the Vanguard VFC is a reliable, feature-rich, high-performance controller unit which sets the standard for quality, features and maintainability. This state-of-the-art DMS controller simplifies system installation and operation.
KEY FEATURES AND BENEFITS:
› Interactive, menu-driven front panel with keypad. Backlit full-color LCD and status indicators are easy to read and use › Integrated surge protection for communication signals and power prevents damage to communication ports › Real-time monitoring of display and all electronic subsystems allows immediate reaction to sign issues › Redundant fiber-optic signal path provides reliability and eliminates electromagnetic interference › Multiple sign control for up to 8 DMS adds flexibility when cabinet space is at a premium › NEMA TS-4-compliant and tested to withstand the harshest environmental conditions › Compliant with NTCIP 1203 v03 for simple integration with any DMS system › Mounts side-by-side in standard 19-inch equipment cabinet rack (2RU) › Integrated Ethernet and serial ports simplify integration Power:
120/240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz,
65 W max.
Operating Temperatures:
-34° F to +165° F
(-37° C to +74° C)
Dimensions:
6.75" H x 8.7" W x 3.125" D
(171 mm x 221 mm x 79 mm)
Weight:
3.5 lbs (1.6 kg)
KEY FEATURES AND BENEFITS:
› Increases safety and reduces maintenance time by reducing trips between the ground and the sign › Controls, configures or monitors the DMS from both the sign and on the ground › Compact size that can be located in pole-mounted cabinet › No field laptop needed
AUXILIARY CONTROL PANEL
The Vanguard DMS Auxiliary Control Panel complements the VFC DMS controller by providing a secondary control interface panel at the DMS site, emulating all functionality of the VFC and reducing the number of trips between the main controller in the ground cabinet and the sign.
Power:
120/240 VAC or 24 VDC
Operating Temperatures:
-34° F to +165° F
(-37° C to +74° C)
VANGUARD DMS CONTROL
29 TABLE OF CONTENTS
DAKTRONICS TRANSPORTATION ONLINE
Visit daktronics.com/transportation to find more information about our products and applications.
We’ve assembled material to help you understand our products and DMS technology in general, including:
› The DMS 101 section with basic information and tips regarding DMS technology › An extensive photo gallery of ITS projects
› Usage examples for many ITS applications
For more information, call 800-833-3157 or email [email protected].
VANGUARD V4 CONTROL SOFTWARE
Vanguard Version 4 offers the most robust Dynamic Message Sign (DMS) control software. Vanguard v4 is available in two versions:
Standard for field technicians and Professional for traffic management centers.
KEY FEATURES AND BENEFITS:
› Complete message creation, playback tools, pixel-level diagnostics › Universal NTCIP v01, v02 and v03 support to control compliant DMS › Trusted as a state-wide DMS system management tool
› Intuitive interface
Vanguard v4 Standard
Component-Level
Diagnostics
Vanguard v4 Standard Pixel Test
Vanguard v4 Professional
Vanguard v4 Professional Content Studio List View
› Standard: offers test patterns, editing tools and full diagnostics › Professional: provides client-server architecture, advanced Content Studio (fonts and pre-designed MUTCD graphics) › Security: user profiles with passwords, real-time display status › Daktronics provides instant Internet updates, allows precautionary measures 30 TABLE OF CONTENTS
VANGUARD® v4 CONTROL SOFTWARE
STANDARD AND PROFESSIONAL
ABSOLUTE CONTROL
Vanguard® Version 4 Central Control Software continues Daktronics tradition of releasing robust Dynamic Message Sign (DMS) software since 1988. In addition to its enhanced feature set, Vanguard v4 is available in two versions: Standard, for field technicians; and Professional, for traffic management centers.
VANGUARD SOFTWARE AT A GLANCE:
• Complete message creation and playback tools
• Full subsystem and pixel-level diagnostics
• Intuitive, organized interface
• Full NTCIP v1 and v2 support universally controls compliant DMS • Already trusted and used as a statewide DMS management tool
COMPREHENSIVE NTCIP
MESSAGING AND DIAGNOSTICS
Vanguard® v4 Control Software brings ease of use to the next level with a complete NTCIP feature set and powerful interface.
FLEXIBLE
Splitting the package into Standard and Professional versions allows suitable functionality for your investment. Standard, built for in-field maintenance and troubleshooting, offers test patterns, quick display editing tools and full diagnostics.
Professional expands the toolset to provide client-server architecture, remote diagnostics/notifications, an advanced Content Studio, and much more. The Vanguard v4 Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) also includes all the means necessary to integrate with custom systems.
NTCIP COMPLIANT
Daktronics has had representation in the NTCIP Working Group since the standard’s inception in 1998. Through installing and communicating with thousands of NTCIPcompliant DMS, Daktronics has gained the necessary experience to make NTCIP integration simple. Vanguard v4 will universally interface with all NTCIP-compliant DMS. And, with improvements in NTCIP 1203 v2, controlling and diagnosing DMS has never been easier.
ORGANIZED
Developed with usability in mind, an intuitive graphical interface guides new users with little training, yet provides in-depth functionality for experts. After a display’s parameters are created, clicking each DMS opens powerful message creation, diagnostic and scheduling tools. More complex features can be made simple— facilitated by step-by-step wizards.
SECURE
Security is a crucial factor in DMS software. User profiles with passwords, real-time display status, encrypted communications between server and clients and more ensures your display network is being run properly at all times. Daktronics readily provides maintenance updates, which allows implementation of precautionary measures and maximizes functionality.
Laptop Vanguard DMS Equipment
Cabinet
VANGUARD V4 STANDARD
SYSTEM RISER
VANGUARD v4 STANDARD
CONTROL SYSTEM FEATURES
Install Vanguard Standard on laptops to bring powerful diagnostics, testing, and message creation to the field. Vanguard Standard is designed to complement the skills of technicians as they visit DMS for routine and critical maintenance.
DISPLAY CONTROL
• Controls any NTCIP-compliant DMS
- Any sized character, line or full-matrix DMS
- Variable speed limit signs and Vanguard VM-1020 DMS
- Portable NTCIP message displays
MESSAGING
• Create quick, professional messages with the WYSIWYG editor • Manage each display’s font database
• Create flashing messages and enable beacons
• Change the DMS brightness level manually or automatically • Preview messages
DIAGNOSTICS
• Locate pixel failures instantly with an in-software visual representation test • View status, errors and problem codes of all DMS subsystems • Verify and troubleshoot malfunctions at the pixel level • Initiate pre-programmed pixel test patterns and diagnostics tests • Monitor environmental status using all DMS sensors
SECURITY
• Real-time verification of “on” pixels
• Restricts access to functional areas of Vanguard software with user names/passwords • Built in security levels for easy setup
SUPPORT
• Search help database to quickly find software answers • Daktronics Transportation Help Desk – tel 800-833-3157 Short Error Status View
Pixel Test View
Standard Message Creation
Laptop Vanguard DMS Equipment
Cabinet
Vanguard® Server
Vanguard®
Client
Vanguard®
Client
Third Party
Software
(using SDK) Equipment
Cabinet
Equipment
Cabinet
Equipment
Cabinet
Vanguard DMS Vanguard DMS Vanguard DMS
VANGUARD v4 PROFESSIONAL
SYSTEM RISER
DISPLAY CONTROL
• View, group and monitor multiple DMS in real time
• Controls any NTCIP-compliant DMS
- Any sized character, line or full-matrix DMS
- Variable speed limit signs and Vanguard VM-1020 DMS
- Portable NTCIP message displays
• Seamless network management with list view or map view • Pre-schedule scenarios manage entire events with a few clicks of the mouse
MESSAGING
• Daktronics Content Studio allows advanced message creation:
- Full suite of amber, full-color and graphic message creation tools - Message changing depending on data such as time,
temperature and traffic speed
- Move text and images on the editing area with graphic editing tools
- Adjust message duration with priority settings
• Vanguard Schedule Studio lets you build and save to-the-minute schedules with organized calendar views and recurrence options • Generate graphics such as clip art, shapes and free form creations – packs of graphics and MUTCD symbols are included, but it’s simple to make your own
• Configure flash rates, scrolling, beacons, templates and fonts to provide optimal DMS legibility
• Spell check
• Message preview
COMMUNICATIONS
• Run nearly unlimited signs at once from traffic management centers with client-server architecture
• Supports Ethernet and serial (COM Port) connections
• Supports modem pools
DIAGNOSTICS
• Locate pixel failures instantly with an in-software visual representation test
• View status, errors and problem codes of all DMS subsystems • Verify and troubleshoot malfunctions at the pixel level • Initiate pre-programmed pixel test patterns and diagnostics tests • Monitor environmental status using all DMS sensors
• NTCIP conformance parameters for each DMS
SECURITY
• Real-time verification of “on” pixels
• Restrict access to functional areas of Vanguard software with user names/passwords
• Manage VFC-3000 LCD display password remotely
• Built-in security levels for easy setup
• Banned words list
SUPPORT
• Search help database to quickly find software answers • Daktronics Transportation Help Desk – tel 800-833-3157 Professional Content Studio Schedule Studio Display Monitor VANGUARD v4 PROFESSIONAL CONTROL SYSTEM FEATURES
Vanguard Professional enacts powerful control over large DMS networks from traffic management centers. Professional includes all the monitoring, message creation and diagnostics tools necessary to maximize the functionality of state-of-the-art NTCIP DMS.
DETAILS
VANGUARD v4 SDK
The Vanguard v4 Software Developers Kit (SDK) gives developers access to the full capabilities of the Vanguard software, including full configuration, messaging, diagnostics and display operations. The software included provides a user interface to configure the displays within the server. The server handles all communications to displays, meaning the clients simply have to specify what operations to perform. Contact Daktronics and request the Vanguard Software Developers Kit document for more information.
NTCIP DMS 1203 VERSION 2
What’s new about v2? First, it adds standard objects supporting graphics, colors (up to 16 million), three levels of detailed diagnostics and enhanced message capabilities.
Next, it includes improved documentation (such as flowcharts), further avoiding multiple interpretations of the standard between products developed by different manufacturers.
NTCIP DMS 1203 v2 is backwards compatible with version 1. The Vanguard v4 software will be compatible with these new options, which means it’s now that much easier to get the most out of Vanguard products used in conjunction with NTCIP-compliant software.
LICENSING
Vanguard v4 Standard and Professional are activated by a required license file. Vanguard Standard is licensed per PC installed, and Vanguard Professional is licensed per server.
Licenses provide one free year of software maintenance, including upgrades and bug fixes. Additional yearly licenses and maintenance contracts are purchased after they expire.
MINIMUM RECOMMENDED
500 MHz 1.5 GHz or higher
512 MB RAM 1 GB RAM or more
1.2 GB HD space 2 GB HD space or more
Keyboard/Mouse Keyboard/Mouse
CDROM for installation CDROM for installation
1024 x 768 high color 32-bit display 1280 x 1024 high color 32-bit display
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Supporting Operating Systems Windows XP w/SP3, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008
Required Software .NET 3.5
SQL 2005 Express
IE 6
VANGUARD v4 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD PROFESSIONAL
Basic Message Creation X X
Controls any NTCIP-Compliant DMS X X
Supports any Matrix Size X X
Generate Flashing Messages X X
Ethernet and Serial Support X X
Uses Username/password Security X X
Searchable Help Database X X
Daktronics Transportation Help Desk Phone Support X X
Enhanced Message Creation through Content Studio X
Scenario Scheduling X
Full-color Message Creation X
Graphics Design X
Spell Check X
Prohibited Word List X
Client-Server Architecture X
Event Logging X
Email Alerts X
SUITE COMPARISON
117 Prince Drive PO Box 5120 Brookings, SD 57006-5120
tel 888-325-8726 605-692-0200 fax 605-697-4700
www.daktronics.com e-mail [email protected] Vanguard® is a registered trademark of Daktronics
Copyright © 2013 Daktronics DD1768635 Rev 04 052013
www.mccain-inc.com
®
Cabinets
Controllers
Signals
Signs
Software
Specialty
Overview
Benefi ts Product Description
McCain’s Changeable Message Signs (CMS) provide advisory information to en-route motorists, such as Amber Alerts, accidents, events, construction, estimated travel times, and road closures. Manufactured to McCain’s high quality standards, these durable signs make a functional and aesthetically pleasing addition to any roadway. Designed to meet Caltrans specifi cations and available in a variety of sizes to meet your needs, CMS signs can help reduce traffi c delays by keeping motorists informed of road conditions and closures so they may alter their routes accordingly. • Meets all Caltrans TEES Chapter 8 Specifi cations
• Modules are fully interchangeable without switch or
jumper settings facilitating quick and effi cient service or repair
• Solid, external matrix module covers (1 hole for each cluster) reduce glare and provide increased message
contrast and visibility
• Standard assemblies assure interchangeability of
components
• Advanced LED pixel matrix module design
• Three Caltrans confi gurations available (500, 510, and 520) to meet your needs
McCain Changeable Message Signs, approved by Caltrans
and meeting all Caltrans Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifi cations (TEES) Chapter 8 requirements, are controlled by Sign View software from Caltrans and available in three sizes to meet your needs.
The signs are modular in design with interchangeable
subassemblies. The weather resistant LED pixel matrix modules are externally mounted on a rigid lattice and can be removed with the use of only a screwdriver. The CMS 500 uses a unique size matrix module, while the CMS 510 and CMS 520 share a smaller module. All modules are interchangeable (within the two size constraints) without the need to set switches or install jumpers, facilitating quick and effi cient services and repairs.
The signs use ultrabright amber LED’s to ensure motorist visibility under all environmental conditions.
Changeable Message
Signs (CMS)
Caltrans Models
500, 510, 520
CMS 500
CMS 520
© 2008 McCain Inc. Updated 10/23/08. McCain reserves the right to change product specifi cations without notice.
For the most up-to-date information, please contact McCain.
To learn more about
McCain’s Integrated Traffi c
Solutions, please contact
[email protected] or
call (760) 727-8100
2365 OAK RIDGE WAY // VISTA, CALIFORNIA 92081 // USA // WWW.MCCAIN-INC.COM ® Dimensions rounded to the nearest 0.1”
CMS 500
CMS 520 CMS 510
Assemblies
• CMS Interface Panel (CIP)
• Power Distribution Assembly No. 4 (PDA4) with 206 power supply
• Isolation Module (ISO)
• Pixel Driver Assembly (PXDA) (5)
• Pixel Driver Modules (PDM) (number varies by model)
• Pixel Matrix Modules (PMM)
Standard Features
• LED’s mounted on circuit boards (LED pixel type 2)
• Operates with a 170E controller, CIA and PDA-3
• Z-bar mounting brackets on rear
• All exterior seams continuous welded
• Operates with Sign View software
available from Caltrans
• Can withstand temperatures ranging from -37° C to 74° C and humidity from 0 to 95% (non-condensing)
General Specifi cations
CMS 500 CMS 510 CMS 520
Dimensions1: 306” L x 81” H x 16” D 230” L x 54” H x 16” D 94” L x 54” H x 24” D Housing: Material: 5052-H32 aluminum, 0.125” thick; Finish: PMMs - black powder coat, sign weldment/housing - latex paint Access: Doors: Front (1), side (1); right or left Front (2); right or left Rear (2); center Display Technology: LED, T-1 3/4, AllnGaP, amber, ultra-bright, 591 nm peak λ, 2θ½ = 30° Display Type: Caltrans CMS LED pixel type 2 (LED’s mounted on module PCB’s) Module Quantity: 60, 5 rows x 12 columns 30, 5 rows x 6 columns Module Dimensions: 22.0” L x 13.7” H x 1.7” D 13.9” L x 8.6” H x 1.9” D Module Operating Voltage: 18 VAC to 28 VAC
Module Current & Power: 2.35 A, 56 W 1.70 A, 40 W
Pixel Arrangement: 40 pixels each, 8 wide x 5 high
Pixel Pitch: 2.75” C-to-C 1.75” C-to-C
Pixel Diameter, # LED’s: 1.5” diameter, 16 LED’s 1.1” diameter, 8 LED’s Pixel Quantity: 2400 pixels , 25 rows x 96 columns 1200 pix’s, 25 rows x 48 col’s Power: 120/240 VAC, single phase input, 5 KVA minimum rating; > 0.95 power factor Ventilation: Thermostatically controlled 106 CFM fan, louvered air intake, pleated fi lter 1 Dimensions rounded to the nearest inch
Changeable Message Signs
www.q-free.com | [email protected]
BENEFITS
• Advance mobility today and pave the way to the future • Manage your entire traffic network from a real-time map • Track device status and graphically follow the network path from the devices back to servers
• Visualize real-time graphical data as well as usage
charts with the ability to perform trend analysis
• Retain and display a history of system events that can be used to monitor operations and/or troubleshoot
• Easily expand and maintain devices with in-app licensing • Integrate with third parties via dedicated API engine using GraphQL
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SOLUTIONS
KINETIC™ SIGNALS
CENTRALIZED TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Kinetic™ Signals is an evolution and advancement of Q-Free’s celebrated Intelight MAXVIEW advanced traffic management system (ATMS) that monitors and controls traffic signal and ITS operations in real time.
The modern interface turns rookies into power users in no time and allows experienced users to quickly leverage the power of more advanced features.
A comprehensive intersection editor provides a holistic view of operations by mapping things such as lane maneuvers and vehicle or multimodal detectors in addition to signal heads and controllers. The same map can easily be replicated for alternate applications like adaptive signal control or connected vehicles, boosting efficiency and saving time.
Underscoring Q-Free’s commitment to open, collaborative systems, Kinetic Signals strictly adheres to NTCIP protocols.
By empowering users to add any NTCIP-compliant controller, the system reduces the need to manage legacy and new central systems during integration. In addition, Q-Free’s data sharing API comes standard.
As part of Q-Free’s Kinetic Mobility platform (see more on back), Kinetic Signals is built on a modern tech stack developed and used by tech giants providing a scalable solution for optimal performance today and into the future.
WEB-BASED,
THIN CLIENT
PLATFORM
REAL-TIME DATA
AND USAGE
REPORTING
Product specifications may change at any time without notice and may not be available in all markets.
Copyright © 2021 Q-Free. All rights reserved. Revised 08 Apr 2021. www.q-free.com | [email protected]
ADVANCED FEATURES
ATMS FUNCTIONALITY
• All devices in one tree with view filters
• Single Sign On and federated authentication - Keycloak • Configurable maps; no external programs necessary
• Expanded status displays and event monitoring
• Supports spanning across multiple browser windows
• Selectable multi-menus view for easy editing
• System-wide enhanced filtering options
• Real-time split monitoring in coordination and free
• Real-time analysis tools and events monitoring
DESIGN
• Complete local geometry design
• Customizable signal indications
• Corridor design
• Multimodal support
• ATSPM configurations supported
INTERSECTION CONTROL
• Scheduler based command/control
• Timeline views - day/month/year
• Manual control
• Actions sets
• Applied commands status
DATABASE EDITOR & MANAGEMENT
• Live front panel editor with tracking
• History of changes with ability to rollback
• Comparison and cloning
• Draft database and approved databases
• Storage for ancillary signal files
KINETIC™ MOBILITY
Kinetic Mobility enables agencies to collaborate on common mobility goals across local, intercity, and regional applications.
Breaking down traditional traffic management silos, the platform offers a single, user-configurable interface to easily monitor and operate all aspects of intelligent transportation systems including traffic signals, events, signs, video, and more. • Provides a single, off-the-shelf solution
• Unifies signal and freeway management
• Creates a truly open traffic ecosystem
REPORTING
• High-resolution data collection and reporting
• Built-in ATSPM reporting capabilities
• Interactive Time Space Diagrams with offset editing
• Customized reporting using device event details,
communications logs, and external reports
• Full support of NTCIP compliant alarms
• Alarm delivery supported via toast notifications, audio alerts, emails, and texts per user configurations
KINETIC™ SIGNALS PRODUCT SHEET
Web user interface
ATSPM reports
Time space diagram
Central Transportation Management System
ATMS.now
Central Management System
522 Gillingham | Sugar Land | Texas | 77478
For more information, call 844-664-7783 or visit www.trafficware.com. © 2016 Trafficware Group, Inc. ATMSnow-10132016
ATMS.now
ATMS.now builds upon the legacy of Trafficware’s flagship central transportation management platform and delivers a powerful tool for monitoring and controlling an agency’s traffic control and ITS infrastructure. ATMS.now provides a modern graphical user interface (GUI), intuitive controls and new feature sets that maximize agency productivity and resources. Like previous versions of ATMS.now, this newest installment implements standards such as NTCIP and NEMA and is designed to specifications published by FHWA, ITE, IMSA, Caltrans and other industry leaders. ATMS.now provides a level of integration with other manufacturers and devices that is unparalleled and offers unmatched flexibility in order for the agency to maximize and leverage current infrastructure investments.
While ATMS.now interoperates with
other manufacturers, there are numerous
advantages to operate the system with
other Trafficware products and leveraging
Trafficware’s vertical depth of ITS products.
All Trafficware systems ship fully integrated
and tested - both hardware and software.
This ensures that Trafficware products can be deployed quickly with minimal integration costs.
Trafficware is the only company in the industry that provides such a broad spectrum of ITS products with seamless integration.
ATMS.now is a modular central transportation management platform that serves as the foundation of an effective ITS solution for cities, counties, and states.
What is ATMS.now?
Field Proven
Trafficware has over three decades of experience designing, engineering, and manufacturing the industry’s most durable and reliable traffic control hardware. The company is also well known for the development of the industry’s most stable central transportation management software, which has been implemented in over 200 separate systems since 1994. When deploying such a fundamental element of an agency’s ITS strategy, it is important to partner with a company that has field-proven systems that stand up to the rigors and mission critical demands of a transportation management system.
“ATMS.now is another example of Trafficware investing in product development to provide the most cutting edge offerings
to their customers.” – Greg Heldreth,
City of Victorville, CA Traffic Engineering
Specialist
ATMS.now
ATMS.now provides a global command post, providing
real time data across the agency for manual and/or
autonomous action.
Platform for the 21st Century
ATMS.now supports initiatives proposed in MAP-21 that promote the need for performance management on ITS projects. ATMS.now is designed to allow the user to quickly generate real time and historical measures of effectiveness
(MOEs). Tools within ATMS.now such as level-ofservice (LOS) reports, assist the agency, and provide invaluable performance data to decision-makers.
ATMS.now Advantages
Key Features in ATMS.now
Modern Interface – Trafficware has created a modern, intuitive interface for our customers. ATMS.now is based on Microsoft standards and is immediately familiar to new users. ATMS.now comes standard with several configuration templates, but also has an array of customization options for power users.
ATMS.now comes standard with “ribbon”
controls featuring intuitive icons for all system
commands and functions.
Time-Space Diagrams – The new ATMS.now time-space diagram has the same look and feel as the time-space diagram within Trafficware’s flagship simulation software, Synchro™ and has been a trusted tool for traffic engineers throughout the world for nearly two decades. The new ATMS.now time-space diagram allows the user to plot real time signal controller data by selecting a group of intersections in order to optimize traffic signal coordination.
Map View – ATMS.now features the Map View as the default status view. The Map View graphically illustrates system status, activity, devices and performance. The Map View not only indicates traffic signal status, but also shows congestion levels (MOEs), live camera feeds, dynamic message signs (DMS), roadway closures and more.
The Map View features Bing™ Maps and allows the user to view system status on roadway or aerial backgrounds.
Trafficware’s ATMS.now provides a global command post for an agency’s transportation network, allowing for integration with various traffic and ITS technologies in order to optimize traffic flow and support motorist safety. ATMS.now integrates an agency’s traffic signal network into a single repository allowing for a 360-degree view of real time and historical traffic operational data. ATMS. now features include:
• Continuous real time scanning. ATMS.now can manage a multitude of events autonomously, improving reach across the enterprise and facilitating a quicker response time. For example, the system constantly monitors itself and can automatically direct cameras to preset positions or execute a series of triggers that execute actions at various locations within the traffic signal system, such as pattern changes or preemption.
• Integration with other ITS manufacturers and devices, such as closed-circuit television (CCTV) cameras and dynamic message signs (DMS).
• Integration with third-party applications such as Microsoft SQL. This allows for expansive logging of system data and the ability to quickly and easily query ATMS.now for desired system data.
• Integration with Crystal Reports. This common reporting tool allows the agency to create custom reports that provide rich system data and performance measures. • Integration with Trafficware’s Synchro™ Suite. This allows the user to easily import/export settings between ATMS.now and Synchro™ Suite.
Signal Controller Scans – The updated Signal
Controller Scan improves upon Trafficware’s
pioneering concept from previous versions
of ATMS.now. The new Signal Controller Scan
provides an intuitive interface and modern
graphics that illustrate real time signal status. The
Signal Controller Scan is designed to be a “headsup-display” for all traffic signal activity.
The right central management
system vendor requires more
than just the right feature sets.
ATMS functionality and performance is a primary
consideration for product selection. However, a
successful long-term deployment also has to consider
ease of implementation and system support over the
life of the product. Trafficware has a seasoned staff
of Field Application Engineers, with a proven track record of smooth ATMS deployments of all sizes, mixed communication environments, and across all leading hardware manufacturers.
The “turn-on” isn’t the end, but instead the mid-point of a successful ATMS deployment. The deployment should also include essentials like a formal and flexible training curriculum, maintenance programs, on-the-ground field support, and a structured trouble ticket response and escalation protocol. Trafficware offers the total solution, including a feature-rich central management platform, experienced
systems integration, and continued support,
ensuring a successful deployment over the
life of the system.
The “turn-on” isn’t the end, but instead the mid-point of a successful ATMS deployment.
Ensuring a Successful Deployment
ATMS.now is a full featured stand-alone central management system. However, it is also a flexible software platform that supports additional functionality such as Adaptive Signal Control, Fleet Management, Transit Signal Priority and Emergency Priority Response. Each module provides powerful tools and capabilities, but also leverages tools within the ATMS.now platform.
ATMS.now, a Powerful Platform
ABOUT TRAFFICWARE
Trafficware specializes in researching, designing, and developing electronic equipment and enterprise software designed to enhance the transportation industry. Our industry expertise comes from:
1. Hands on experience attained while solving traffic management challenges across the country since 1979.
2. Our in-house team including: professional traffic engineers, hardware and software design and development staff, manufacturing personnel, and customer service/field application engineers.
3. Regular dialogue with our customers to address their real-world operational issues and future traffic management requirements.
Trafficware manufactures a full line of traffic equipment in its 90,000 square-foot technology center located in Sugar Land, Texas. In over three decades of manufacturing in the USA, our products have earned a reputation for unmatched quality and reliability.
Trafficware leads the industry in preand post-deployment training with Trafficware University – a knowledge
center that has trained thousands of
people around the world with both
online and classroom instruction.
www.mccain-inc.com
®
Cabinets
Controllers
Signals
Signs
Software
Specialty
Overview
Benefits Product Description
Transparity® Traffic Management System (TMS) enables transportation professionals to proactively manage traffic flow and promote mobility through real-time traffic data collection and management tools. Built around user input and decades of industry knowledge and expertise, the modern architecture of Transparity TMS is designed to meet the demands of today’s transportation network. With a simple, yet powerful means of collecting and displaying information for all system components, and access to data anytime, anywhere; Transparity TMS will take your traffic operations to new heights. • Monitor system-wide traffic conditions and devices
• Command innovative control strategies
• Analyze performance and trends
• Enable proactive management
• Centralize documentation and inventory control
• Ensure system integrity through data validation
• Boost accountability through user security, controller and activity logs
• Empower users with data, accessible via webenabled devices • Connect communities and jurisdictions
Transparity TMS provides dependable monitoring and control of signalized intersections in small and large environments.
Intuitive and user-friendly, Transparity TMS is easy to learn, use, and customize; allowing it to quickly be implemented and mastered.
The newest release of Transparity TMS offers users 24/7 access to real-time system data from any web-enabled device;
opening the door to cloud-based hosting and integration with other jurisdictions and community outreach programs.
Designed in compliance with NTCIP standards and featuring built-in support for select legacy firmware, Transparity TMS offers agencies a viable and cost-effective migration path to modern technology. Plus, its dynamic platform is capable of adapting with your needs as they evolve.
Best of all, the robust data collection and control strategies help reduce congestion and harmful emissions in accordance with requirements for federal and state funding initiatives.
Transparity® TMS
Traffic Management System
© 2015 McCain Inc. Updated 06/19/2015. McCain reserves the right to change product specifications without notice.
For the most up-to-date information, please contact McCain.
To learn more about
McCain’s Integrated Traffic
Solutions, please contact
[email protected] or
call (760) 727-8100
2365 OAK RIDGE WAY // VISTA, CALIFORNIA 92081 // USA // WWW.MCCAIN-INC.COM ® Action
Action
Action
Action
Action
Action
DevID OperMode Pattern Name IP Address
Action
254 Action
1 1
254
254
0 254
2 2
-
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
Free
Coordinated
Coordinated
Free
Free
Unknown
Free
Coordinated
Coordinated
O ine
2070-5th&Main
ATC eX-Grand
ATC eX-Broadway
NEMA-2070
NEMA-ATC
MC-2070-First
MC-170
2070ATC
2070ATC
NEMA
172.20.7.16
172.20.7.22
172.20.7.20
10.6.1.102
10.6.1.103
10.3.1.104
172.20.7.15
192.168.10.2
192.168.10.3
192.168.10.4
Action
Action
Devices Tasks Admin
Action
Action
Action
Action
Action
Action
Dev Oper
Id Mode Pattern Name
Action
Action
Action
Action
254
1 1
254
254
0 254
2 2
-
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
Free
Coordinated
Coordinated
Free
Free
Unknown
Free
Coordinated
Coordinated
O ine
OmniUDP
ATC eX
ATC eX
NEMA
NEMA
MC-2070
MC-170
2070ATC
2070ATC
NEMA
Action
Action
System Functionality
Monitor System-Wide Traffic & Devices
• Survey traffic conditions remotely
• Monitor system-wide device status in real-time
• Log detailed intersection operations
• Receive instant notifications of device or traffic
performance issues
• Record user activity and controller access
Analyze Traffic Trends
• Measure performance for individual intersections and
coordinated systems
• Generate reports on current or historic trends, and
performance measures
• Analyze vehicular, pedestrian, EV preemption, and transit signal priority data
Implement Control Strategies
• Command controller TOD operations
• Modify phase sequence and pattern in response to
specific traffic conditions
• Reduce congestion and increase efficiency
Manage Assets, Tasks & Users
• Schedule controller operations, device log retrieval, and event notification from one central scheduler
• Consolidate system-wide information in central database • Track assets and inventory
• Enforce system security through unique user permissions • Reduce inefficiencies and issues related to
mismanagement of controller timing
• Verify and validate timing parameters
Connect Users, Agencies & Devices
• Access real-time data on smart phones, tablets, and other web-enabled devices
• Support inter-jurisdictional data exchange and control strategies
• Integrate NTCIP-compliant devices
Customer Support
McCain’s ITS Solutions group provides support from
system selection through integration, ensuring end-to-end functionality.
Ongoing support is available with online user groups and trainings. Comprehensive software maintenance plans
offer feature upgrades, technical support, and quarterly maintenance, including back-ups and updates.
Transparity® TMS
Transparity TMS is a powerful
combination of standard-compliant
technology, advanced algorithms,
and tried-and-true methodology.
Standard Compliance
Developed based on the latest national protocols to ensure the system will evolve with your needs over time. Adheres to NTCIP 1201, NTCIP 1202, and underlying base standards.
Device Compatibility
Compatible with 170, 2070, and NEMA traffic controllers running NTCIP-compliant local control software and select 170 and 2070 traffic controller programs. Permits integration with IP-enabled devices such as CCTV cameras, battery
backup systems (BBS), EV preemption devices, and traffic signal monitors (CMU/MMU).
System Architecture
Windows-based application using client-server architecture, .NET framework, and MS SQL Server 2008 database.
Using the latest in web services, Transparity TMS opens the door for interoperability with web and mobile clients.
Providing the foundation for efficient and reliable center-tocenter data exchange and secure methods for exposing the operational status of traffic systems to external networks.
TransSuite Traffic Control System
TransSuite®
Traffic Control System
TransSuite® Traffic Control System (TCS) is TransCore’s industry-leading signal system designed to meet
a wide range of signal system needs.
TransSuite TCS is scalable from a standalone signal system of 50 or more intersections to systems of more than 1,000 intersections with available fully-integrated ITS support for video control, dynamic message sign (DMS) management, incident management, and freeway traffic management. Our newest release offers a fully PC-based hardware architecture and a full Windows®
graphical user interface along with TransCore’s best-in-class graphical display tools.
The TransSuite Family
TransSuite TCS is part of our family of transportation management software products. TransSuite’s user interface is consistent and intuitive across the entire product family. The Windows-based interface will be familiar even to novice users because the interface employs Windows® standards for drag and drop controls, ToolTip information, and context-sensitive device menus. Each workstation can access all system functions with customized security levels for each user.
TransSuite TCS offers an extremely flexible user interface that displays real-time graphical information for all system components. The interface also integrates with the control interfaces to facilitate system navigation and management.
The interface includes a GIS-based dynamic map interface with full ESRI support. The interface also includes a schematic graphics display tool that allows customized displays of your data on a backdrop of compatible image files including maps, schematics, CAD drawings, and aerial photos.
TransSuite TCS is a feature-rich
traffic signal management system.
Features include the following:
u Support for multiple controllers
u Fully compliant NTCIP
communications
u Support for advanced local
controller features
u Multiple control modes
including traffic responsive
u Real-time communications
and error checking
u IP communications support
including wireless
u Advanced controller
database management tools
with efficient parameter
upload/download access
u Relational database for
easy data import/export
u Flexible, full-featured
event scheduler
u Highly configurable,
searchable event log
TCS Features
transcore.com
Traffic Management Solutions
Electronic Vehicle
Registration
Homeland
Security
Rail/Intermodal Trucking &
Logistics
Toll
Solutions
Airport
Solutions
Parking
Solutions
u Accommodates up to 2,000
intersection controllers and 2,000
system detectors
u Remote control capability
u Performs traffic signal
controller error processing
u Generates reports
u Allows multiple users to
concurrently access and
interact with the system
u Operates 24-hours a day
without operator supervision
or interaction
TransSuite Traffic Control System
transcore.com
For more information:
Call 770.246.6202 or email [email protected]
©2014 TransCore L.P. All rights reserved. TRANSCORE and TRANSSUITE are registered trademarks, and are used under license. All other trademarks listed are the property of their respective owners. Contents subject to change. Printed in the U.S.A.
TC-8/14
Standards Based
TransSuite TCS leads the industry in the
implementation of ITS standards including
NTCIP communications. TransSuite is also fully
integrated with industry standards for interface,
network, database, and real-time controls. TransSuite’s emphasis on standards enables our customers to maximize compatibility with their existing workstation and server components.
Multiple Controllers Integrated
Additional TCS Features
Type 179 Controllers
Software
BI Tran 233
Protocol
AB34I8E
NEMA TS/1 Controllers
Software
Traconex TMP
Traconex MOC
Traconex CJ-32
JHK RCU
SONEX RCU
Protocol
S2K
S2K
S2K
JHK RCU
S2K Hybrid
Sonex RCU
NEMA TS/2 Controllers
Software
Econolite ASC/2
& ASC/2S
Econolite ASC/3
Econolite ASC/2
Peek 3000/3000E
ATC-1000
Eagle M50/M52
Protocol
NTCIP
NTCIP
AB3418
NTCIP
NTCIP
Type 170 Controllers
Software
LACO IVe
Wapiti W4LRT
Wapiti W4IKS
Wapiti W9FT
Wapiti W4LRT+
Wapiti W4HC11
BI Tran 222C
BI Tran 222CIC
BI Tran 222WP
McCain 233
Protocol
AB3418E
W4LRT S2K
W4IKS S2K
W9FT S2K
W4LRT+ S2K
W4HC11 S2K
222C S2K
222CIC S2K
222WP S2K
AB3418E
Software
US Traffic ATC
Econolite 2070
ASC/2 & ASC/3
Eagle SEPAC
Siemens Nextphase
Fourth Dimension D4
NWS Voyage
Protocol
NTCIP
NTCIP
NTCIP
NTCIP
NTCIP
AB3418E
Type 2070 &
ATC Controllers
At A Glance
▷ NEW Database Editor
▷ Performance
◉ Faster dialog loading times
◉ Better processing and response
times
◉ Quicker report generation
▷ Support of newer technologies
(Windows 10, touch features, and
more)
▷ Improved User Interface
About Centracs
Transportation agencies, now more than ever, are looking for more efficient and cost effective solutions to manage traffic. Econolite offers Centracs 2.0 Advanced Transportation Management System (ATMS) as a valuable component of
an effective ITS solution to easily address current and future traffic management challenges. Centracs 2.0 provides an integrated platform for traffic signal control, ITS field device monitoring and control, information management, graphical data display, advanced traffic algorithms, and much more.
Centracs 2.0 is a flexible, user friendly and cost-effective system, enabling agencies to realize significant mobility benefits from its ATMS investment. The flexible and scalable Centracs 2.0 design also provides agencies with feature-rich options that best meet evolving transportation agency needs. ▷ ▷ The flexible and scalable Centracs 2.0 design also provides agencies with feature-rich options that best meet evolving transportation agency needs.
Graphical User Interface and “Containers”
Modern Graphical User Interface (GUI) design is an integral part of Centracs 2.0. The intuitive GUI provides a short system learning curve, helping new users to immediately become productive while allowing experienced users to leverage the full power of Centracs 2.0’s advanced features. Centracs 2.0 offers an extensive and flexible suite of tools, encouraging users to establish individual workflows and environments for increased efficiency.
User versatility is made possible by the Centracs 2.0 user interface, which utilizes powerful “Container” technology.
Containers assist the user in managing the various maps, status, and control screens by enabling the user to drag-anddrop open windows into containers.
Interactive GIS Based Maps
The modern GIS map technology and rendering tools
behind Centracs 2.0 map interfaces make the map a truly convenient tool for managing and monitoring field devices.
Simple mouse gestures are used to pan and zoom, while the Centracs 2.0 Container technology allows users to customize, display and store multiple maps. Agencies can select from a variety of commercial or government GIS data sources
including their own GIS databases. The local intersection map editor in Centracs 2.0 is easy to use allowing users to add fully functioning intersection displays in a matter of minutes.
Centracs 2.0 takes care of the positioning and sizing of contained windows, leaving the user free to focus on more important tasks. When a user exits Centracs 2.0, the entire layout is remembered and then restored on the next login.
Additionally, all system configuration actions are performed through the GUI - no need to edit configuration text files or registry entries.
Scalable Architecture
Centracs 2.0 implements a distributed layer architecture providing scalability and expandability. The “Core” or
application server manages the system scheduler, traffic control algorithms, field device time management, alert generation, and more. Communication or “Comm Servers”
perform the communications to field devices. The entire system can reside on a single computer or it can be spread across multiple computers. This allows Centracs 2.0 to
efficiently manage a small agency’s needs on a single,
inexpensive computer, or to scale up for a large agency needing to manage thousands of devices by distributing the processing across multiple computers.
Econolite ATMS Systems & Modules
Powerful Traffic Management Tools
The true value of a modern ATMS system depends on the
tools provided to monitor and manage the system. Centracs
2.0 offers a wide range of reports and real-time monitors for nearly every aspect of the system. Real-time detector monitors, Time-Space and split monitors, coordination, Traffic Responsive, communication status, system performance monitors, alert monitors and detailed reports allow the various users of the system to track those aspects of the system that are most important. A real-time text-mode remote front panel for ASC/3 and Cobalt controllers allow Centracs 2.0 users to interface with controllers as if they were standing at the intersection. The signal database editor for Cobalt and ASC/3 controllers offers advanced features such as timing templates, spreadsheet style editing features and version management. Whether the user is a Traffic Engineer, a TMC manager, a System Administrator, or a signal shop manager, Centracs 2.0 provides the most effective tools for the job.
Communications and Device Support
Robust, dependable communication to field devices is key to a successful ATMS system and is a critical component of Centracs 2.0. Most communications media is supported, including fiber optics, twisted-pair, leased lines, and wireless.
Protocol support includes: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, RS232 serial, ACT, PMPP, STMP, and SNMP. Traffic signal device support includes: Econolite’s NTCIP-based Cobalt, ASC/2, ASC/2S, and ASC/3 (1000, 2100, or Rack Mount) NEMA TS1/TS2
controllers, 2070 (L or LN) controllers running ATC/2070, ASC/3 2070, or Oasis firmware, or controllers running EPAC version 4.01D,170-type controllers running certain versions of Wapiti W4IKS firmware, and NTCIP 1202 compliant
controllers.
Centracs Maintenance Management System
(MMS) (optional)
Centracs 2.0 MMS is a simple to use GIS-based asset
management and maintenance system. It allows ITS and
signal maintenance organizations to track assets in realtime through the products’ entire life cycle. Offering both workstation and mobile device interfaces, it supports
preventative maintenance planning and execution along with trouble ticket dispatch and work-order scheduling. Centracs
2.0 MMS is available as an optional module to Centracs 2.0, or as a stand-alone system.
Centracs DCMS (Data Collection Management
System) (optional)
Centracs 2.0 DCMS turns new or existing detection systems into virtual count stations that gather and distribute traffic data without interruption, providing the accurate information needed for faster incident response, real-time changes to traffic signal timing,
or to anticipate special event traffic conditions.
Centracs Adaptive Module (optional)
Centracs 2.0 Adaptive is an arterial-based adaptive control module. Centracs 2.0 Adaptive uses the Centracs 2.0
native interface, simplifying the creation and management of adaptive intersection groups or sections. As a bonus, while the Centracs 2.0 Adaptive algorithms adjust splits and offsets, cycle length adjustments can be achieved by coupling our adaptive software with Centracs 2.0 Traffic Responsive techniques. Working directly with Econolite’s ASC/3 controller software and avoiding adding undesirable hardware at the cabinet, Centracs 2.0 also allows the
creation of multiple groups that can easily be managed
using the Centracs 2.0 Time-of-Day scheduler. The power of Centracs 2.0 Adaptive provides a cost effective means of achieving real and measurable improvements in traffic flows without the cost of adding new servers, hardware, and by using existing controller coordination plans and existing communications channels.
Centracs Datasheet
3360 E La Palma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92806 ∙ 714-630-3700 ∙ [email protected] ∙ www.econolite.com © 2017 Econolite Control Products, Inc. All rights reserved. Econolite Control Products, Inc. is an Econolite Group, Inc. company, and reserves the right to change or update these specifications at any time without prior notification.
Econolite ATMS Systems & Modules
383070114-5
Advanced Measures of Effectiveness (MOE)
Module (optional)
The Centracs 2.0 MOE module was developed in
conjunction with Purdue University. These reports use high density detector data collected 10 times per second from ASC/3 and Cobalt controllers to offer users a unique set of tools for understanding the factors influencing coordination and the effectiveness of timing at the intersection.
Dynamic Message Sign (DMS) Management
(optional)
The Centracs 2.0 DMS module provides users the direct and instantaneous control to update and display valuable traveler information messages. By providing timely traffic condition or incident messages, Centracs 2.0 DMS can help provide congestion mitigation and increase roadway safety.
Server-to-Server Module (optional)
The Centracs 2.0 Server-to-Server module provides a
unique interface allowing agencies to achieve unparalleled benefits through cooperative operations and system
management. Adjoining Centracs 2.0 - managed cities
can seamlessly share data and manage arterial traffic
across agency boundaries providing true Center-to-Center communications. Centracs 2.0 Server-to-Server also allows agencies to participate in cross-jurisdictional management and monitoring of neighboring agency intersections.
CCTV (optional)
Close Circuit Television (CCTV) cameras have proven
a valuable tool for many agencies. Econolite offers
the Centracs Advanced CCTV module as an optional
component of the Centracs ATMS. This module is an
enterprise-class IP video surveillance solution that provides seamless management of digital video across IP networks.
Centracs Optional Modules
▷ Centracs MMS
▷ Centracs DCMS
▷ Centracs Travel Time
▷ Centracs Adaptive
▷ Centracs MOE
▷ Centracs DMS
▷ Centracs Server-to-Server
▷ Centracs CCTV
Centracs Datasheet
SmartSensor HD
1 SmartSensor HD
The SmartSensor™ HD delivers consistently accurate data for traffic monitoring systems, even in slow or congested traffic. Operating at five times the bandwidth of the original SmartSensor, the HD also has five times the resolution, a detection range of 250 feet and the ability to simultaneously detect up to 22 lanes of traffic.
Features
˿ Detects up to 22 lanes of traffic
˿ Reports the speed, length and classification of individual vehicles ˿ Works over barriers, guardrails, medians and gores
˿ Accurately detects lane-changing
vehicles
˿ Patented Digital Wave Radar II™ technology
˿ Patented auto-configuration process
˿ Easy to install and operate
˿ Remote accessible for easy management
˿ Flash upgradeable
˿ Integrates with Wavetronix Click
products
˿ Requires no tweaking or tuning
˿ All-weather, all-condition performance
˿ No performance variance due to temperature
˿ Flash memory protects data storage
˿ Automated manufacturing process
WX-500-0280
9 - 50 ft.
(See
mounting
guidelines)
6 ft.
min. ROADWAY
PLAN VIEW
250 ft.
max.
2 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
Technical Specifications
Measured Quantities
˿ Per-lane interval data: volume, average speed, occupancy, classification counts, 85th percentile speed, average headway, average gap, speed bin counts, direction counts
˿ Classification bins: 8
˿ Interval speed bins: 15
˿ Per-vehicle data: speed, length, class, lane assignment, range ˿ Presence data in 22 lanes
Detectable Area
˿ Number of lanes: up to 22
˿ Detection range: 6 to 250 ft. (1.8 m to 76.2 m)
˿ Any lane spacing is supported
˿ Detection over barriers is supported
Performance
˿ Per-direction volume accuracy:
̀ Typical: 98%–99%
̀ Minimum: 95%
˿ Per-lane volume accuracy:
̀ Typical: 98%–99%
̀ Minimum: 90%
˿ Minimum separation between two vehicles: 5.5 ft. (1.67 m) ˿ Per-direction average speed accuracy: ±3 mph (5 kph)
˿ Per-lane average speed accuracy: ±3 mph (5 kph)
˿ Percentage of vehicles generating per-vehicle-speed measurements:
̀ Typical: 98%
̀ Minimum: 95%
˿ Per-vehicle speed measurement accuracy: ±3mph (5 kph) for 90% of measurements
˿ Method of speed measurement: dual radar speed trap
˿ Per-direction occupancy accuracy: ±10%
˿ Per-lane occupancy accuracy: ±20%
˿ Classification accuracy:
̀ Typical: 90%
̀ Minimum: 80%
Performance Maintenance
˿ No cleaning or adjustment necessary
˿ No battery replacement necessary
˿ No recalibration necessary
˿ Mean time between failures: 10 years (estimated based on manufacturing techniques)
Physical Properties
˿ Weight: 4.2 lbs. (1.9 kg)
˿ Physical dimensions: 13.2 in. × 10.6 in. × 3.3 in. (33.5 cm x 26.9 cm x 8.4 cm)
˿ Resistant to corrosion, fungus, moisture deterioration, and ultraviolet rays
˿ Enclosure: Lexan polycarbonate
˿ Outdoor weatherable: UL 746C, IP66 rated
˿ Watertight by NEMA 250 standard
˿ NEMA 250 compliant for:
̀ External icing (clause 5.6)
̀ Hose down (clause 5.7)
̀ 4X corrosion protection (clause 5.10)
̀ Gasket (clause 5.14)
˿ Withstands 5-ft. (1.5-m) drop
˿ Connector: MIL-DTL-26482
Ordering Information
SmartSensor HD
101-0415
Retrofitted SmartSensor HD
101-0416
SmartSensor HD with rotating backplate
101-0403
ACCESSORIES
CLK-201/202 – Click 201/202 power supply
CLK-200 – Click 200 surge protector
CLK-112/114 – Click 112/114 rack cards
SS-706-xxx/707 – SmartSensor 8-conductor
cable
SS-611 – SmartSensor mount
Wavetronix
78 East 1700 South
Provo, UT 84606
801.734.7200
[email protected]
www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
3 Power
˿ Power consumption: 7.6 W
˿ Supply voltage: 10–28 VDC
Communication Ports
˿ Com ports:
̀ Full-duplex RS-232 with RTS/CTS
̀ Half-duplex RS-485
˿ Firmware upgradability over any com port
˿ User configurable:
̀ Baud rate
̀ Response delay
̀ Data push
̀ RS-232 flow control
˿ Supported baud rates: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bps
Data Protocols
˿ Protocol support for interval, event, presence
˿ Data protocol document available free of charge
˿ Interval data for each lane:
̀ Sensor ID
̀ Timestamp
̀ Volume
̀ Average speed
̀ Occupancy
̀ Classification counts
̀ Speed bin counts
̀ Direction counts
̀ Average headway
̀ Average gap
̀ 85th percentile speed
˿ Event data for each detection:
̀ Sensor ID
̀ Timestamp
̀ Lane assignment
̀ Speed
̀ Length
̀ Class
̀ Range
˿ Presence data for each lane:
̀ Sensor ID
̀ Per-lane presence
Data Buffering
˿ At least 9,000 intervals stored internally
˿ Intervals timestamped using real-time clock
Radar Design
˿ Operating frequency: 24.0–24.25 GHz (K-band)
˿ Dual-radar
˿ No manual tuning to circuitry
˿ Transmits modulated signals generated digitally
˿ No temperature-based compensation necessary
˿ Bandwidth stable within 1%
˿ Printed circuit board antennas
˿ Antenna vertical 6 dB beam width (two-way pattern): 65° ˿ Antenna horizontal 6 dB beam width (two-way pattern): 6° ˿ Antenna two-way sidelobes: -40 dB
˿ Transmit bandwidth: 245 MHz *
˿ Un-windowed resolution: 2 ft. (0.6 m)
˿ RF channels: 4
˿ EIRP: 18.1 dB
˿ Antenna gain: 14 dB
Configuration
˿ Auto-configuration of lanes/detection zones:
̀ Internal to the sensor
̀ Uses positions of the vehicles
̀ Based on probability density function estimation
˿ Manual configuration supported
˿ Lane boundary increment: 1 ft. (0.3 m)
˿ Graphical user interface with traffic pattern display ˿ Pointing assistant for horizontal alignment
˿ Windows Mobile–compatible software
˿ Supported operating systems:
̀ Windows Vista
̀ Windows 7
̀ Windows 8
̀ Windows 10
˿ Software-supported functionality:
̀ Auto-find baud rate
̀ Auto-find serial port
̀ TCP/IP connectivity
̀ Sensor configuration back-up and restore
̀ Virtual sensor connections
Operating Conditions
˿ Accurate performance in:
̀ Rain up to 2 in. (5.08 cm) per hour
̀ Freezing rain
̀ Snow
̀ Wind
̀ Dust
* Limited operating frequency and bandwidth available in some areas. 4 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
Support
˿ Training and tech support available from Wavetronix
˿ Wavetronix training includes:
̀ Installation and configuration instruction to ensure accurate performance ̀ Classroom and in-field instruction
̀ Knowledgeable trainers
̀ Use of presentation materials
̀ Virtual configuration using computer playback
̀ Instruction in use of computer and other necessary equipment ˿ Wavetronix tech support includes:
̀ Technical representatives available for installation and configuration
̀ Ongoing troubleshooting and maintenance support
Documentation
˿ Comprehensive user guide
˿ Installer quick-reference guide
˿ User quick-reference guide
˿ Documentation available upon request:
̀ Volume accuracy
̀ Speed accuracy
̀ Occupancy accuracy
̀ Classification accuracy
̀ Auto-configuration performance
̀ FCC certification
̀ CE certification
̀ NEMA TS 2-2003 third-party test data
̀ NEMA 250 third-party test data
Warranty
˿ Two-year warranty against material and workmanship defect (see SmartSensor Warranty datasheet for complete details) ̀ Fog
̀ Changing temperature
̀ Changing lighting (even direct light on sensor at dawn and dusk)
˿ Ambient operating temperature: -40°F to 165°F (-40°C to 74°C) ˿ Humidity: up to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Testing
˿ Tested under FCC CFR 47, part 15, section 15.249
˿ FCC certification on product label
˿ FCC regulation–compliant for life of the sensor
˿ Tested under NEMA TS 2-2003
̀ Shock pulses of 10 g, 11 ms half sine wave
̀ Vibration of 0.5 g up to 30 Hz
̀ 300 V positive/negative pulses
̀ Stored at -49ºF (-45ºC) for 24 hours
̀ Stored at 185ºF (85ºC) for 24 hours
̀ Operation at -29.2ºF (-34ºC) and 10.8 VDC
̀ Operation at -29.2ºF (-34ºC) and 26.5 VDC
̀ Operation at 165.2ºF (74ºC) and 26.5 VDC
̀ Operation at 165.2ºF (74ºC) and 10.8 VDC
Manufacturing
˿ Manufactured in the USA
˿ Surface mount assembly
˿ IPC-A-610C Class 2–compliant
˿ Operational testing:
̀ Sub-assembly test
̀ 48-hour unit level burn-in
̀ Final unit test
˿ Unit test results available
The advertised detection accuracy of the company’s sensors is based on both external and internal testing, as outlined in each product’s specification document.
Although our sensors are very accurate by industry standards, like all other sensor manufacturers we cannot guarantee perfection or assure that no errors will ever occur in any particular applications of our technology. Therefore, beyond the express Limited Warranty that accompanies each sensor sold by the company, we offer no additional representations, warranties, guarantees or remedies to our customers. It is recommended that purchasers and integrators evaluate the accuracy of each sensor to determine the acceptable margin of error for each application within their particular system(s).
SmartSensor HD
5 SmartSensor HD Bid Specification
1.0 General. This item shall govern the purchase of aboveground radar vehicle sensing devices (RVSD) equivalent to the Wavetronix SmartSensor™ HD.
An RVSD detects vehicles by transmitting electromagnetic radar signals through the air. The signals bounce off vehicles in their paths and part of the signal is returned to the RVSD. The returned signals are then processed to determine traffic parameters.
RVSDs are not affected by normal weather and environmental conditions such as rain, wind, snow, dust, etc. They also do not require cleaning and can maintain performance over a wide range of ambient temperatures.
RVSDs provide a non-intrusive means of detecting traffic because they can be installed at the side of a roadway. This property not only makes them safer to install but also more cost effective than sensors that require roadway modifications or placement.
2.0 Measured Quantities. The RVSD shall provide volume, average speed, occupancy, classification counts, 85th percentile speed, average headway, average gap, speed bin counts and direction counts for user-configurable time intervals for up to 22 lanes of traffic.
The RVSD shall provide up to eight length-based classification bins.
The RVSD shall provide up to 15 speed bins.
The RVSD shall provide speed, length, class, lane assignment, and range data for each vehicle detection.
The RVSD shall provide presence data for up to 22 lanes of traffic.
3.0 Detectable Area.
3.1 Maximum Lanes. The RVSD shall be able to detect and report information from up to 22 lanes.
3.2 Detection Range. The RVSD shall be able to detect and report information in lanes with boundaries as close as 6 ft. (1.8 m) from the base of the pole on which the RVSD is mounted.
The RVSD shall be able to detect and report information in lanes located with the far boundary at 250 ft. (76.2 m) from the base of the pole on which the RVSD is mounted.
The RVSD shall be able to simultaneously detect and report information from a lane located at the minimum offset and from a lane located at the maximum range.
3.3 Lane Size and Spacing. The RVSD shall allow any spacing of traffic lanes positioned from the minimum offset to the maximum range. Gore and unequally sized or spaced lanes shall be handled so that detections from the lanes meet all performance specifications.
Not all roadways have lanes that lie on evenly spaced intervals. Some roadways have gore, odd-sized medians and unequal lane sizes. An RVSD should be able to handle all these cases.
3.4 Barrier Performance. The RVSD shall detect vehicles with the specified accuracy in lanes that are adjacent to a barrier when 50% of a sedan is visible over the barrier from the point of view of the RVSD.
4.0 Performance.
4.1 Volume Accuracy. The volume data shall be within 5% of truth for a direction of travel during nominal conditions. Individual lane volume data shall be within 10% of truth during nominal conditions. The percentage of missed detection and the percentage of false detections for each lane shall not exceed 15% during nominal conditions. Nominal conditions exist when true occupancy is less than 30%, without merging traffic; when average speeds are greater than 10 mph (16 kph) in 6 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
every lane; when there is less than 20% truck traffic per lane; and when at least 50 cars per lane are counted in the interval.
The RVSD shall detect a minimum separation of 5.5 ft. (1.67 m) between two vehicles depending on vehicle speed and range.
4.2 Speed Accuracy. Average speed data shall be accurate to within 2 mph (3 kph) for any direction of travel when there are more than five cars per lane in an interval. Average speed data for any individual lane shall be accurate to within 2 mph (3 kph) when there are more than five cars per lane in an interval.
The RVSD shall provide per-vehicle speed measurements on 95% of vehicles that are not occluded by other vehicles or by barriers. The RVSD shall provide per-vehicle speed measurements in which 90% of the measurements are within 3 mph (5 kph).
The RVSD shall measure speed using a dual-radar speed trap that calculates the time delay between two different radar beams.
The dual-radar time delay method of calculating speed produces accurate per-vehicle speeds which enable accurate length measurements, classification, 85th percentile speed measurements and responsive average speed measurements. In contrast, algorithms that derive the speed from presence measurements or vehicle durations have been shown to produce significant biases in the speed measurements especially during congestion.
4.3 Occupancy Accuracy. Occupancy data shall be within 10% of truth for any direction of travel on a roadway during nominal conditions. For example, if the true occupancy in a lane is 20%, then the measured occupancy shall be between 18% and 22%. Individual lane occupancy shall be within 20% during nominal conditions. Nominal conditions exist when true occupancy is less than 30%, without merging traffic; when average speeds are greater than 10 mph (16 kph) in every lane; when there is less than 20% truck traffic per lane; and when at least 50 cars per lane are counted in the interval.
4.4 Classification Accuracy. The RVSD shall correctly determine classification for 80% of detected vehicles when the classification bins are at least 10 ft. (3 m) wide and occupancy of all lanes is below 30%.
5.0 Performance Maintenance. The RVSD shall not require cleaning or adjustment to maintain performance.
The RVSD shall not rely on battery backup to store configuration information, thus eliminating any need for battery replacement.
Once the RVSD is calibrated, it shall not require recalibration to maintain performance unless the roadway configuration changes.
The RVSD shall be manufactured using techniques that will yeild a mean time between failures of 10 years.
6.0 Physical Properties. The RVSD shall not exceed 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) in weight.
The RVSD shall not exceed 14 in. by 12 in. by 4 in. (35.6 cm x 30.5 cm x 10.2 cm) in its physical dimensions.
All external parts of the RVSD shall be ultraviolet-resistant, corrosion-resistant, and protected from fungus growth and moisture deterioration.
6.1 Enclosure. The RVSD shall be enclosed in a Lexan polycarbonate.
The enclosure shall be classified “f1” outdoor weatherability in accordance with UL 746C and shall be IP66 rated.
The RVSD shall be classified as watertight according to the NEMA 250 standard.
The RVSD enclosure shall conform to test criteria set forth in the NEMA 250 standard for type 4X enclosures. Test results shall be provided for each of the following type 4X criteria:
• External icing (NEMA 250 clause 5.6)
• Hose-down (NEMA 250 clause 5.7)
SmartSensor HD
7 • 4X corrosion protection (NEMA 250 clause 5.10)
• Gasket (NEMA 250 clause 5.14)
The RVSD shall be able to withstand a drop of up to 5 ft. (1.5 m) without compromising its functional and structural integrity.
The RVSD enclosure shall include a connector that meets the MIL-DTL-26482 specification. The MIL-DTL-26482 connector shall provide contacts for all data and power connections.
7.0 Power. The RVSD shall consume less than 8.5 W.
The RVSD shall operate with a DC input between 10 VDC and 28 VDC.
8.0 Communication Ports. The RVSD shall have an RS-485 port and an RS-232 port, and both ports shall communicate independently and simultaneously.
The two simultaneous ports are necessary whenever simultaneous access to the RVSD is needed or redundancy is required. For example, two ports are needed if event data and interval data must be collected at the same time. For an example of redundancy, the RS-232 port and RS-485 port could each be connected to separate communications device to provide a backup means of communication in case a device fails.
The RS-232 port shall be full-duplex and shall support true RTS/ CTS hardware handshaking for interfacing with various communication devices.
The RVSD shall support the upload of new firmware into the RVSD’s non-volatile memory over either communication port.
The RVSD shall support the user configuration of the following:
• Baud rate
• Response delay
• Data push
• RS-232 flow control (RTS/CTS or none)
The communication ports shall support all of the following baud rates: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bps.
9.0 Data Protocols. The RVSD shall support three different data protocols for all lanes being monitored: interval (bin) data, event (per vehicle) data, and real-time true presence data.
The RVSD manufacturer shall provide the data protocol document free of charge.
The interval (bin) data packet protocol shall support:
• Sensor ID
• A timestamp that records the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second of the end of time interval • Total volumes of more than 65536
• Average speed values in either mph or kph
• Occupancy in 0.1% increments
• Volume in up to eight length-based user-defined vehicle classification bins • Volume in up to 15 user-defined speed bins (bin by speed) • Volume for both directions of traffic (bin by direction) • Average headway in seconds
• Average gap in seconds
• 85th percentile speed in either mph or kph
The event (per vehicle) data packet protocol shall support:
• Sensor ID
8 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
• A timestamp that records the year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond of the time the vehicle left the detection zone • Lane assignment
• Speed values in either mph or kph
• Vehicle length
• Classification using up to eight user-defined classes • Range
The real-time true presence data packet protocol shall support:
• Sensor ID
• True presence information for each lane being monitored
10.0 Data Buffering. The RVSD shall store, in non-volatile memory, at least 9,000 interval data packets with the maximum number of lanes and approaches configured and all interval fields enabled.
The RVSD shall timestamp interval data using a real-time clock that maintains accurate time even when power is disconnected from the sensor for extended periods of time.
11.0 Radar Design. The RVSD shall employ a dual radar design that includes two receive channels.
In order to achieve accurate per vehicle speed measurements, two radar channels are necessary so that a speed trap–type speed measurement can be made.
11.1 Frequency Stability. The circuitry shall be void of any manual tuning elements that could lead to human error and degraded performance over time.
All transmit modulated signals shall be generated by means of digital circuitry, such as a direct digital synthesizer, that is referenced to a frequency source that is at least 50 parts per million (ppm) stable over the specified temperature range, and ages less than 6 ppm per year. Any upconversion of a digitally generated modulated signal shall preserve the phase stability and frequency stability inherent in the digitally generated signal.
This specification ensures that, during operation, the RVSD strictly conforms to FCC requirements and that the radar signal quality is maintained for precise algorithmic quality. Analog and microwave components within an RVSD have characteristics that change with temperature variations and age. If the output transmit signal is not referenced to a stable frequency source, then the RVSD is likely to experience unacceptable frequency variations which may cause it to transmit out of its FCC allocated band and thus will be non-compliant with FCC regulations.
The RVSD shall not rely on temperature compensation circuitry to maintain transmit frequency stability.
Temperature-based compensation techniques have been shown to be insufficient to ensure transmit frequency stability. One reason this type of technique is not sufficient is that it does not compensate for frequency variations due to component aging.
The bandwidth of the transmit signal of the RVSD shall not vary by more than 1% under all specified operating conditions and over the expected life of the RVSD.
The bandwidth of an RVSD directly affects the measured range of a vehicle. A change in bandwidth causes a direct error in the measured range, i.e., a 5% change in bandwidth would cause a range error of 10 ft. (3 m) for a vehicle at 200 ft. (61 m). If the bandwidth changes by more than 1% due to seasonal temperature variations and component aging, then the RVSD will need to be frequently reconfigured to maintain the specified accuracy.
11.2 Antenna Design. The RVSD antennas shall be designed on printed circuit boards.
Printed circuit board antennas eliminate the need for RF connectors and cabling that result in decreased reliability. Printed circuit antennas are less prone to physical damage due to their extremely low mass.
SmartSensor HD
9 The vertical beam width of the RVSD at the 6 dB points of the two-way pattern shall be 65 degrees or greater.
This enables the RVSD to provide simultaneous detection from a lane located at the minimum offset and a lane located at the maximum range. The vertical beam width of an RVSD determines the field of view in which it can detect traffic. If the field of view is smaller than the distance between the minimum offset and the farthest range, then the RVSD will be unable to detect vehicles over the entire range. A vertical beam width of less than 65 degrees will not allow an RVSD, mounted at a typical height of 17 ft. (5.2 m), to simultaneously detect and report information when the lanes are positioned from the minimum offset of 6 ft. (1.8 m) to the maximum range of 250 ft. (76.2 m).
The horizontal beam width of the RVSD at the 6 dB points of the two-way pattern shall be 6 degrees or less.
A narrow horizontal beam width allows the RVSD to resolve vehicles at the farthest ranges. If the horizontal beam width is too large, a trailing vehicle may be merged with the vehicle in front.
The sidelobes in the RVSD two-way antenna pattern shall be -40 dB or less.
Low sidelobes ensure that the performance from the antenna beam widths is fully achieved.
11.3 Resolution. The RVSD shall transmit a signal with a bandwidth of at least 240 MHz.
The bandwidth of the transmit signal translates directly into radar resolution, which contributes directly to detection performance.
For example, an RVSD that transmits at a low bandwidth will have low radar resolution, which could cause it to count a single vehicle as two vehicles in adjacent lanes. As another example of the adverse effects of low radar resolution, the response from a barrier or other radar target in the roadway may spill over into the lanes of travel and desensitize the radar. In order to achieve the specified detection accuracy in a variety of conditions, the unwindowed radar resolution cannot be larger than 2 ft. (0.6 m) at the half-power level, which requires a bandwidth of 240 MHz. The high radar resolution reduces the problem of vehicle responses getting drowned out by brighter vehicles in adjacent lanes and improves performance for moving and stopped vehicles near barriers.
11.4 RF Channels. The RVSD shall provide at least 4 RF channels so that multiple units can be mounted in the same vicinity without causing interference between them.
12.0 Configuration.
12.1 Auto-configuration. The RVSD shall have a method for automatically defining traffic lanes or detection zones without requiring user intervention. This auto-configuration process shall execute on a processor internal to the RVSD and shall not require an external PC or other processor.
The auto-configuration process shall automatically define traffic lanes or detection zones by detecting the relative position of vehicles within the RVSD’s field of view.
The RVSD shall include a transceiver capable of detecting multiple vehicles present within its field of view. The RVSD shall also include a processor or computer with executable instructions that estimates the position of each of the vehicles, records the position of the vehicles, generates a probability density function estimation from each position of the vehicles, and defines traffic lanes from that probability density function estimation. The probability density function estimation represents the probability that a vehicle will be located at any range.
The RVSD auto-configuration process shall define all lanes within the detectable area of the RVSD, up to the maximum number of lanes, during free-flow conditions; when at least 50% of a sedan is visible above any barriers; when at least 10 cars pass in each lane during configuration time; and there are less than 10% lane-changing vehicles.
12.2 Manual Configuration. The auto-configuration method shall not prohibit the ability of the user to manually adjust the RVSD configuration.
The RVSD shall support the configuring of lanes or detection zones in 1-ft. (0.3-m) increments. 10 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
When lanes have variable widths or have variable spacing (e.g. gore between lanes), precise resolution is necessary.
12.3 Windows®–based Software. The RVSD shall include graphical user interface software that displays all configured lanes and the current traffic pattern using a graphical traffic history representing at least the last 1.5 seconds of detected traffic. This graphical traffic history shall also allow the option of displaying the measured speed or length of a detected vehicle.
A visual representation of traffic patterns allows an installer to quickly associate specific detections with corresponding vehicles, and it facilitates verification of RVSD performance.
The graphical interface shall operate on Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8.1, and Windows 10 in the .NET framework.
The software shall support the following functionality:
• Automatically find the correct baud rate
• Automatically find the correct serial communication port • Operate over a TCP/IP connection
• Give the operator the ability to save/back up the RVSD configuration to a file or load/restore the RVSD configuration from a file • Provide a virtual connection option so that the software can be used without connecting to an actual sensor
13.0 Operating Conditions. The RVSD shall maintain accurate performance in all weather conditions, including rain, freezing rain, snow, wind, dust, fog and changes in temperature and light, including direct light on sensor at dawn and dusk.
RVSD operation shall continue in rain up to 2 in. (5.08 cm) per hour.
The RVSD shall be capable of continuous operation over an ambient temperature range of -40°F to 165.2°F (-40°C to 74°C).
The RVSD shall be capable of continuous operation over a relative humidity range of 5% to 95% (non-condensing).
14.0 Testing.
14.1 FCC. Each RVSD shall be certified by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) under CFR 47, Part 15, section 15.249 as an intentional radiator.
The FCC certification shall be displayed on an external label on each RVSD according to the rules set forth by the FCC.
The RVSD shall comply with FCC regulations under all specified operating conditions and over the expected life of the RVSD.
14.2 NEMA TS 2-2003 Testing. The RVSD shall comply with the applicable standards stated in the NEMA TS 2-2003 Standard. Third-party test results shall be made available for each of the following tests:
• Shock pulses of 10 g, 11 ms half sine wave
• Vibration of 0.5 g up to 30 Hz
• 300 V positive/negative pulses applied at one pulse per second at minimum and maximum DC supply voltage • Cold temperature storage at -49°F (-45°C) for 24 hours • High temperature storage at 185°F (85°C) for 24 hours • Low temp, low DC supply voltage at -29.2°F (-34°C) and 10.8 VDC • Low temp, high DC supply voltage at -29.2°F (-34°C) and 26.5 VDC • High temp, high DC supply voltage at 165.2°F (74°C) and 26.5 VDC • High temp, low DC supply voltage at 165.2°F (74°C) and 10.8 VDC
15.0 Manufacturing. The RVSD shall be manufactured and assembled in the USA.
SmartSensor HD
11 The internal electronics of the RVSD shall utilize automation for surface mount assembly, and shall comply with the requirements set forth in IPC-A-610C Class 2, Acceptability of Electronic Assemblies.
The RVSD shall undergo a rigorous sequence of operational testing to ensure product functionality and reliability. Testing shall include the following:
• Functionality testing of all internal sub-assemblies
• Unit level burn-in testing of 48 hours’ duration or greater • Final unit functionality testing prior to shipment
Test results and all associated data for the above testing shall be provided for each purchased RVSD by serial number, upon request.
16.0 Support. The RVSD manufacturer shall provide both training and technical support services.
16.1 Training. The manufacturer-provided training shall be sufficient to fully train installers and operators in the installation, configuration, and use of the RVSD to ensure accurate RVSD performance.
The manufacturer-provided training shall consist of comprehensive classroom labs and hands-on, in-the-field, installation and configuration training.
Classroom lab training shall involve presentations outlining and defining the RVSD, its functions, and the procedures for proper operation. These presentations shall be followed by hands-on labs in which trainees shall practice using the equipment to calibrate and configure a virtual RVSD. To facilitate the classroom presentation and hands-on labs, the manufacturer-provided training shall include the following items:
• Knowledgeable trainer or trainers thoroughly familiar with the RVSD and its processes • Presentation materials, including visual aids, printed manuals and other handout materials for each student • Computer files, including video and raw data, to facilitate the virtual configuration of the RVSD • Laptop computers with the necessary software, and all necessary cables, connectors, etc. • All other equipment necessary to facilitate the virtual configuration of the RVSD Field training shall provide each trainee with the hands-on opportunity to install and configure the RVSD at roadside.
Training shall be such that each trainee will mount and align the RVSD correctly.
16.2 Technical Assistance. Manufacturer-provided technical support shall be available according to contractual agreements, and a technical representative shall be available to assist with the physical installation, alignment, and auto-configuration of each supplied RVSD. Technical support shall be provided thereafter to assist with troubleshooting, maintenance, or replacement of RVSDs should such services be required.
17.0 Documentation. RVSD documentation shall include a comprehensive user guide as well as an installer quick-reference guide and a user quick-reference guide.
The RVSD manufacturer shall supply the following documentation and test results at the time of the bid submittal:
• Volume accuracy data, including performance analyses for:
• Free-flowing traffic
• Traffic with a lane roughly 8 ft. (2.4 m) beyond a 4-ft. (1.2 m) concrete barrier • 6-ft. (1.8-m) and 240-ft. (73.2-m) lateral offset (simultaneous) • Speed accuracy test data for both per-vehicle and average speed • Occupancy accuracy test data
• Vehicle classification test data
• Auto-configuration documentation
• FCC CFR 47 certification
• CE certification
12 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
• NEMA 250 standard for Type 4X Enclosure third-party test data • NEMA TS 2-2003 standard third-party test data
18.0 Warranty. The RVSD shall be warranted free from material and workmanship defects for a period of two years from date of shipment.
The advertised detection accuracy of the company’s sensors is based on both external and internal testing, as outlined in each product’s specification document. Although our sensors are very accurate by industry standards, like all other sensor manufacturers we cannot guarantee perfection or assure that no errors will ever occur in any particular applications of our technology. Therefore, beyond the express Limited Warranty that accompanies each sensor sold by the company, we offer no additional representations, warranties, guarantees or remedies to our customers. It is recommended that purchasers and integrators evaluate the accuracy of each sensor to determine the acceptable margin of error for each application within their particular system(s).
SmartSensor HD
13 SmartSensor HD Installation Specification
1.0 General. This item shall govern the installation of an aboveground radar vehicle sensing device (RVSD) equivalent to the Wavetronix SmartSensor™ HD.
RVSDs can provide accurate, consistent and reliable data provided they are installed properly. The requirements in this specification are intended to ensure proper RVSD installation.
2.0 Mounting and Installation.
2.1 Mounting Assembly. The RVSD shall be mounted directly onto a mounting assembly fastened to a pole or other solid structure.
The RVSD mounting assembly shall provide the necessary degrees of rotation to ensure proper installation.
The RVSD mounting assembly shall be constructed of weather-resistant materials and shall be able to support a 20-lb. (9.1-kg) load.
2.2 Mounting Location. The RVSD shall be mounted at a height that is within the manufacturer’s recommended mounting heights.
The RVSD shall be mounted at an offset from the first lane that is consistent with the RVSD’s minimum offset.
The RVSD shall be mounted so that the farthest lane to be monitored is within the maximum range of the RVSD.
The RVSD shall be mounted with its cable connector down and shall be tilted so that the RVSD is aimed at the center of the lanes to be monitored. Typically, the RVSD is tilted off of vertical by 10–20 degrees.
The RVSD shall be aligned so that the horizontal angle is perpendicular to the flow of traffic. The RVSD alignment tool shall be used to verify pointing accuracy.
Two RVSD units shall not be mounted so that they are pointed directly at each other.
A distance of 40 ft. (12.2 m) or more, along the direction of the roadway, shall separate the RVSDs if they are located on opposing sides of a roadway, and the RVSDs shall be configured to operate on different RF channels.
RVSDs that are mounted within 20 ft. (6.1 m) of each other shall be configured to operate on different RF channels regardless of the pointing direction of the RVSDs.
When possible, the pole selected for the RVSD shall be where there is no guardrail or other type of barrier between the pole and the first lane of traffic.
If mounting to an overhead structure like a sign bridge or a truss, the RVSD shall use an extension arm to provide at least 3 feet of lateral separation from the structure. The RVSD shall not be installed in tunnels.
It is recommended that the manufacturer be consulted to verify final RVSD placement if the RVSD is to be mounted near large planar surfaces (sound barrier, building, parked vehicles, etc.) that run parallel to the monitored roadway.
2.3 Cabling. The cable end connector shall meet the MILC-26482 specification and shall be designed to interface with the appropriate MIL-C-26482 connector. The connector backshell shall be an environmentally sealed shell that offers excellent immersion capability. All conductors that interface with the connector shall be encased in a single jacket, and the outer diameter of this jacket shall be within the backshell’s cable O.D. range to ensure proper sealing. The backshell shall have a strain relief with enough strength to support the cable slack under extreme weather conditions. Recommended connectors are Cannon’s KPT series, and recommended backshells are Glenair Series 37 cable sealing backshells. 14 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
The cable shall be the Orion Wire Combo-2206-2002-PVCGY or an equivalent cable that conforms to the following specifications:
• The RS-485 conductors shall be a twisted pair.
• The RS-232 and RS-485 conductors shall have nominal capacitance conductor to conductor of less than 45 pF/ft at 1 kHz.
• The RS-232 and RS-485 conductors shall have nominal conductor DC resistance of less than 16.5 ohms/1000 ft. (304.8 m) at 68°F (20°C).
• The power conductors shall be one twisted pair with nominal conductor DC resistance of less than 11.5 ohms/1000 ft. (304.8 m) at 68°F (20°C).
• Each wire bundle or the entire cable shall be shielded with an aluminum/mylar shield with a drain wire.
The cable shall have a single continuous run with no splices.
The cable shall be terminated only on the two farthest ends of the cable.
The cable length shall not exceed the following limits for the operational baud rate of RS-485 communications:
Baud Rate Cable Length
115.2 Kbps 300 ft. (91.4 m)
57.6 Kbps 600 ft. (182.9 m)
38.4 Kbps 800 ft. (243.8 m)
19.2 Kbps 1000 ft. (304.8 m)
9.6 Kbps 2000 ft. (609.6 m)
NOTE: These represent maximum data rates. The data rate used should be the minimum data rate required for operation.
If communication is conducted over the RS-232 bus, then the RS-232 driver must be able to source and sink ±7 mA or more.
The cable length shall not exceed the following limits for the operational baud rate of RS-232 communications:
Baud Rate Cable Length
115.2 Kbps 40 ft. (12.2 m)
57.6 Kbps 60 ft. (18.3 m)
38.4 Kbps 100 ft. (30.5 m)
19.2 Kbps 140 ft. (42.7 m)
9.6 Kbps 200 ft. (61 m)
NOTE: These represent maximum data rates. The data rate used should be the minimum data rate required for operation.
If 12 VDC is being supplied for the RVSD then the cable length shall not exceed 110 ft. (33.5 m).
If 24 VDC is being supplied for the RVSD then the cable length shall not exceed 600 ft. (182.9 m).
If a cable length of 600 ft. (182.9 m) to 2000 ft. (609.6 m) is required, the power cable shall be an ANIXTER 2A-1402 or equivalent cable that meets the following requirements:
• 10 AWG conductor size/gauge
• Two conductor count
• Stranded cable type
• Bare copper material
• 600 V range
• 194°F (90°C) temperature rating
• PVC/nylon insulation material
• PVC—polyvinyl chloride jacketing material
• 25 A per conductor
SmartSensor HD
15 Both communication and power conductors can be bundled together in the same cable as long as the above-mentioned conditions are met.
2.4 Lightning Surge Protection. The RVSD shall be installed using lightning surge protection on all communication and power lines. The surge protection devices shall meet or exceed the EN 61000-4-5 Class 4 specifications. The lightning surge protection unit shall be the Wavetronix Click 200 or equivalent. The lightning surge protection unit supplied shall be physically compatible with the cable provided.
2.5 Power Supply. The RVSD shall be installed using the Click 201, Click 202 or an equivalent AC to DC power converter that meets the following specifications:
The power converter shall be power rated at 15 W or greater at 77°F (25°C) and 10 W or greater at 165.2°F (74°C).
The power converter shall operate in the temperature range of to -29.2°F to 165.2°F (-34°C to 74°C).
The power converter shall operate in the humidity range of 5% to 95% at 77°F (25°C) non-condensing.
The power converter shall accept an input voltage of 85 to 264 VAC or 120 to 370 VDC.
The power converter shall operate at an input frequency of 47 Hz to 63 Hz.
The power converter shall produce an output voltage of 24 VDC ±4%.
The power converter shall have a hold-up time of greater than 20 ms at 120 VAC.
The power converter shall withstand a voltage across its input and output of 3 kV. The power converter shall withstand a voltage across its input and ground of 1.5 kV.
The power converter shall conform to safety standards UL 60950-1 and EN 60950-1 and be certified and tested to meet the limited power source requirement according to clause 2.5. Its output current shall be limited to a maximum current of 4A both under normal and single fault condition; with double/reinforced insulation between its input and output circuits.
The power converter shall conform to EMC standards EN 55022 Class B and EN 61000-3-2, 3.
In brown-out conditions (i.e. < 85 VAC input), the output voltage of the power converter shall be less than 1 VDC.
2.6 Input File Cards. If input file cards are used in the detection system, then the Click 112, Click 114 or an equivalent that meets the following specifications shall be used.
The input file cards shall be compatible with 170, 2070, NEMA TS 1, and NEMA TS 2 style input racks.
The input file card shall translate data packets from the RVSD into contact closure outputs.
The input file card shall support dual loop (speed trap) emulation, as well as the following modes of operation:
• Pulse (a single 125 ms output pulse for each vehicle) • Presence (an output pulse corresponding to the duration of each vehicle in the detection zone) • Actuation (true presence output in real time)
• Single loop speed (duration of the pulse is inversely proportional to the speed of the vehicle) The input file card shall receive data packets over an RS-485 bus at any of the following baud rates: 9600, 19200, 38400 and 57600 bps.
The input file card shall autobaud and auto-detect an RVSD over wired and wireless communication channels that have a maximum latency of 500 ms.
16 www.wavetronix.com
SmartSensor HD
The input file card shall comply with the NEMA TS 2-1998 Traffic Controller Assemblies with NTCIP Requirements (Section 2.8 specification).
2.7 Signaling Delay. For even detection applications, the RVSD mounting location, communication and contact closure options shall be selected to accommodate the total signaling delay.
The total signaling delay from the front of the vehicle shall be the sensor delay + communications delay + contact closure delay.
The sensor delay shall equal 1 second + actual vehicle length in feet divided by actual vehicle speed in fps.
The communication delay shall equal 10/8 * 34 bytes divided by the baud rate in bps.
The contact closure delay for a Click 512 shall be zero.
The contact closure delay for a Click 112/114 shall equal the detected duration + the effective virtual loop length in feet divided by the detected vehicle speed in fps.
Encompass® 4 Reader
Features
Ideal for parking, security access,
electronic vehicle registration, and
traffic management
Multiprotocol
Fixed mount, integrated package
with waterproof enclosure
Reads Super eGo® (SeGo), eGo, ATA/
AAR, and/or IAG tags
915 MHz RF band operation in North
America
Half-frame, full-frame (ATA), and
Wiegand capability
Internal and external antenna
models
Real-time clock
Tag read buffering
Programmable RF output power
Quick, simple installation
TransCore's Encompass® 4 is a family of fully integrated, self-contained 915 MHz wireless radio frequency identification (RFID) readers that are specifically targeted at high performance applications in parking, security access, electronic vehicle registration (EVR) and traffic management. Each Encompass 4 reader includes a radio frequency (RF) module, digital signal processor (DSP), power supply, antenna (unless external antenna option is selected), input/output interfaces, and RS–232 or RS–422 serial communications interface.
The Encompass 4 family includes models capable of reading any two of the following standard protocols:
Super eGo
eGo (ISO 18000 6B)
American Trucking Associations (ATA)
Association of American Railroads (AAR)
Interagency Group (IAG)
Additionally, for compatibility with existing security systems, Encompass 4 can read half-frame and full-frame ATA tags and Wiegand formatted tags and identification cards.
All Encompass 4 readers provide unparalleled flexibility by offering a real-time clock; expanded tag read buffering; programmable RF power; 250 KHz programmable frequency steps; system integrity checking; and programmable group select.
Encompass 4 readers are quickly and easily installed, tested, and maintained by TransCore trained, authorized personnel. The Encompass 4’s command set is compatible with TransCore’s SmartPass® and Encompass 2 readers.
For more information:
Call 800.923.4824 (Sales Support) 505.856.8007 (Technical Support) © 2009-2016 TransCore, LP. All rights reserved. TRANSCORE, EGO, and ENCOMPASS are registered trademarks and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Contents subject to change. Printed in the U.S.A.
Encompass® 4 Reader
412074-009 - 06/16
RF CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Range
865 to 870 MHz capable
902 to 928 MHz capable
911.75 to 919.75 MHz FCC-authorized in United States
Internal Antenna Gain
9.5 dBi
RF Control
By sense input or host command
Polarization
Linear, horizontal
Range
Read performance varies depending on tag and reader
configuration and environment. Using the eGo or eGo
Plus Windshield Sticker Tags, typical read range should be 12 to 17 ft (3.7 to 5.2 m).
Consult the Encompass® 4 Reader System Guide for
tag and reader selection.
I/O CONTROL
Input: two independent dry contact closures for sense
circuits
Output: two independent Form-C contacts
RS–232 with Wiegand or RS–422 with Wiegand-compatible host interface
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Input Power
16 to 20V AC, 47 to 63 Hz, or 16 to 28V DC
RF Output Power
2 W maximum to 200 mW minimum, selectable in 1dB
steps
LICENSING
Equipment License
The user is required to obtain a Part 90 site license
from the FCC to operate the unit in the United States.
Access the FCC Web site at www.wireless.fcc.gov/uls
for more information.
FCC ID: FIH05531
Industry Canada ID: 1584A-05531
Users in all countries should check with the appropriate local authorities for licensing requirements.
COMPLIANCE
RF Interference
Units have been tested and are verified to Part 15 of
the FCC rules for a Class A digital device.
Safety
Encompass 4 readers comply with the requirements of
Underwriters Laboratories UL–1950, Standard for
Safety of Information Technology Equipment.
PHYSICAL
Dimensions
Size: 15.5 x 15.5 x 3.25 in. (39.4 x 39.4 x 8.25 cm)
Weight: 9.5 lb (4.3 kg)
Mounting Location
Pole or wall mount
Indoor or outdoor
Enclosure
The system is environmentally sealed in a tamperproof, polycarbonate housing.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating Air Temperature
-40°F to +131°F (-40°C to +55°C)
Humidity
100% condensing
Vibration
0.5 Grms, 10 to 500 Hz
OPTIONS
Cable Accessory Kits
Cable Accessory Kits allow flexibility in installing the Encompass 4. Include the part number when ordering.
Part number 58-1620-001: connector with 5 ft (1.5 m)
cable
Part number 58-1620-002: connector with 20 ft (6.1
m) cable
Wall Mount Bracket
Allows adjustment in all planes when used to install
the Encompass 4 on a flat surface. Include the part
number 54-1620-001 when ordering.
Transformer
A Class C transformer (part number 76-1620-005) is
available to allow 110V AC to 18V AC conversion.
Include the part number when ordering.
Training
Installation, operation, and maintenance training for
TransCore authorized dealers is available through
TransCore. For details, contact TransCore.
DOCUMENTATION
Encompass® 4 Reader Quick Start Guide
Encompass® 4 Reader System Guide
December 2024
Appendix D:
Centralized/Arterial/Parking/Lighting/TMC
ITS Technologies Product Sheets
www.q-free.com | [email protected]
BENEFITS
• Advance mobility today and pave the way to the future • Manage your entire traffic network from a real-time map • Track device status and graphically follow the network path from the devices back to servers
• Visualize real-time graphical data as well as usage
charts with the ability to perform trend analysis
• Retain and display a history of system events that can be used to monitor operations and/or troubleshoot
• Easily expand and maintain devices with in-app licensing • Integrate with third parties via dedicated API engine using GraphQL
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SOLUTIONS
KINETIC™ SIGNALS
CENTRALIZED TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Kinetic™ Signals is an evolution and advancement of Q-Free’s celebrated Intelight MAXVIEW advanced traffic management system (ATMS) that monitors and controls traffic signal and ITS operations in real time.
The modern interface turns rookies into power users in no time and allows experienced users to quickly leverage the power of more advanced features.
A comprehensive intersection editor provides a holistic view of operations by mapping things such as lane maneuvers and vehicle or multimodal detectors in addition to signal heads and controllers. The same map can easily be replicated for alternate applications like adaptive signal control or connected vehicles, boosting efficiency and saving time.
Underscoring Q-Free’s commitment to open, collaborative systems, Kinetic Signals strictly adheres to NTCIP protocols.
By empowering users to add any NTCIP-compliant controller, the system reduces the need to manage legacy and new central systems during integration. In addition, Q-Free’s data sharing API comes standard.
As part of Q-Free’s Kinetic Mobility platform (see more on back), Kinetic Signals is built on a modern tech stack developed and used by tech giants providing a scalable solution for optimal performance today and into the future.
WEB-BASED,
THIN CLIENT
PLATFORM
REAL-TIME DATA
AND USAGE
REPORTING
Product specifications may change at any time without notice and may not be available in all markets.
Copyright © 2021 Q-Free. All rights reserved. Revised 08 Apr 2021. www.q-free.com | [email protected]
ADVANCED FEATURES
ATMS FUNCTIONALITY
• All devices in one tree with view filters
• Single Sign On and federated authentication - Keycloak • Configurable maps; no external programs necessary
• Expanded status displays and event monitoring
• Supports spanning across multiple browser windows
• Selectable multi-menus view for easy editing
• System-wide enhanced filtering options
• Real-time split monitoring in coordination and free
• Real-time analysis tools and events monitoring
DESIGN
• Complete local geometry design
• Customizable signal indications
• Corridor design
• Multimodal support
• ATSPM configurations supported
INTERSECTION CONTROL
• Scheduler based command/control
• Timeline views - day/month/year
• Manual control
• Actions sets
• Applied commands status
DATABASE EDITOR & MANAGEMENT
• Live front panel editor with tracking
• History of changes with ability to rollback
• Comparison and cloning
• Draft database and approved databases
• Storage for ancillary signal files
KINETIC™ MOBILITY
Kinetic Mobility enables agencies to collaborate on common mobility goals across local, intercity, and regional applications.
Breaking down traditional traffic management silos, the platform offers a single, user-configurable interface to easily monitor and operate all aspects of intelligent transportation systems including traffic signals, events, signs, video, and more. • Provides a single, off-the-shelf solution
• Unifies signal and freeway management
• Creates a truly open traffic ecosystem
REPORTING
• High-resolution data collection and reporting
• Built-in ATSPM reporting capabilities
• Interactive Time Space Diagrams with offset editing
• Customized reporting using device event details,
communications logs, and external reports
• Full support of NTCIP compliant alarms
• Alarm delivery supported via toast notifications, audio alerts, emails, and texts per user configurations
KINETIC™ SIGNALS PRODUCT SHEET
Web user interface
ATSPM reports
Time space diagram
SynchroGreen® Module
Real-Time Adaptive Traffic Control
SynchroGreen®
Adaptive Traffic Control
ATMS.now Central Management System
522 Gillingham | Sugar Land | Texas | 77478
For more information, call 844-664-7783 or visit www.trafficware.com. © 2016 Trafficware Group, Inc. SynchroGreen-10132016
SynchroGreen optimizes signal timing for the mainline, side streets, and pedestrians through real-time adaptive traffic control. This field-proven solution is designed to reduce motorist travel time, delays, and stops.
SynchroGreen maximizes the use of available roadway capacity, while also decreasing fuel consumption and emissions.
What is SynchroGreen?
SynchroGreen optimizes for balanced
service, maximum progression, and critical
movements.
SynchroGreen was designed from the ground up by Trafficware and Naztec, two companies with decades of experience in the traffic industry. Trafficware’s Synchro Studio software is used by tens of thousands of traffic engineers around the globe to simulate and optimize traffic. The Naztec ATMS.now central management software is utilized by hundreds of cities across the country to manage and control thousands of intersections. Together, this depth of experience provides a reliable and effective foundation to understand the complexity of optimizing traffic signal operations.
SynchroGreen takes a holistic approach when optimizing traffic signals by considering sidestreet and pedestrian traffic, in addition to mainline traffic. SynchroGreen will allocate time to each vehicle and pedestrian phase in real time, without any additional modules.
Finally, as the only true NTCIP-compliant, real-time adaptive traffic control system, SynchroGreen provides peace of mind.
How is SynchroGreen different?
Installs in traffic controllers,
not beside them.
SynchroGreen has demonstrated...
Up to
70% Reduction in
Intersection Delay
Reduction in
Total System Delay
Reduction in
Arterial Delay
Reduction in
Arterial Travel Time
Up to
60%
Up to
80%
Up to
70%
*Results will vary by application
REAL-TIME ADAPTIVE
TRAFFIC CONTROL
1. Adjusts traffic signal timing plans
in real time based on
current traffic characteristics
2. Optimizes signal timing for normal
traffic flow or uncharacteristic
surges due to accidents, road
closures, or special events
INTEGRATES WITH
SYNCHRO & SIMTRAFFIC
1. Models adaptive traffic control and
provides simulation capabilities
2. Calibrates adaptive settings using
actual field data
3. Allows users to preview expected
results before implementation
1. Designed for easy startup and
reliability
2. Accessible from a web-based
interface or Windows application
3. Returns traffic controllers to
normal time-of-day operation if
the system is shut down
SMART SYSTEM AND
EASY SETUP
It’s not just about the greenband.
SynchroGreen considers side
streets and pedestrians too.
How does SynchroGreen work?
SynchroGreen is the only
solution that analyzes the entire
system.
SynchroGreen optimizes signal timings based on demand. If more vehicles demand service for a particular movement, then more time is allocated; if less time is required, less time is allocated.
Secondly, SynchroGreen promotes traffic signal coordination and synchronization. SynchroGreen reduces vehicle stops and travel time by analyzing when vehicles arrive at the intersection and increasing the probability that the traffic signals will be green when they arrive.
The SynchroGreen management information base resides
within the signal controller
The traffic signal controller remains in charge of the
intersection
The signal cabinet does not require proprietary hardware or rewiring
The agency can choose whether adaptive control is
provided from a central location or by using a closedloop system SynchroGreen is Available in Three Levels.
SynchroGreen Lean includes the Local Intersection Software and Central Server Software, and provides a web-based interface for monitoring and controlling the system. This option is an economical way for a city to experience the benefits of adaptive traffic control.
SynchroGreen Premium includes the Local Intersection Software and Enhanced Central Server Software, and operates up to 150 intersections. It provides agencies with the ability to analyze real-time system performance, create detailed reports, log system calculations, and much more. This solution is designed to be easily integrated as part of federally funded adaptive traffic control projects.
SynchroGreen Enterprise integrates directly with your ATMS.now central management system and also qualifies for federal funding. It allows agencies to operate up to 150 adaptive intersections and 9,999 total intersections.
Premium Enterprise
SynchroGreen Adaptive Algorithm
SynchroGreen Local Intersection Software
SynchroGreen Web Interface
Enhanced User Interface
Adaptive System Performance Monitoring
Real-time and Historical Adaptive System Reports
Support up to 150 Intersections
1-Year Support and Upgrades
ABOUT TRAFFICWARE
Trafficware specializes in researching, designing, and developing electronic equipment and enterprise software designed to enhance the transportation industry. Our industry expertise comes from:
1. Hands on experience attained while solving traffic management challenges across the country since 1979.
2. Our in-house team including: professional traffic engineers, hardware and software design and development staff, manufacturing personnel, and customer service/field application engineers.
3. Regular dialogue with our customers to address their real-world operational issues and future traffic management requirements.
Trafficware manufactures a full line of traffic equipment in its 90,000 square-foot technology center located in Sugar Land, Texas. In over three decades of manufacturing in the USA, our products have earned a reputation for unmatched quality and reliability. www.mccain-inc.com
®
Cabinets
Controllers
Signals
Signs
Software
Specialty
Overview
Benefits Product Description
McCain’s Transparity® Adaptive autonomously generates optimal signal timing parameters across an arterial network by adjusting cycle lengths, phases, and offsets based on prevailing traffic. As there is no “one size fits all” solution to improve traffic flow, Transparity Adaptive provides a suite of synchronization strategies to improve operations and mobility. Whether implementing optimized coordination parameters, invoking peer-to-peer synchronization, or triggering historically effective timing plans for peak periods, McCain’s assortment of adaptive technologies are effective for the unique roadways within your agency. • Improve arterial performance by adjusting to realtime traffic demand • Reduce stops, delays, and travel time
• Boost intersection efficiency and mobility
• Minimize congestion and idle-time emissions
• Reduce signal timing engineering efforts and
prolong timing effectiveness
• Program and maintain with ease
• Connected vehicle ready
McCain’s Transparity Adaptive, a component of Transparity TMS and Omni eX® intersection control software, utilizes real-time traffic information to optimize signal timing and ultimately reduce congestion and/or side street delay along coordinated roadways.
As each roadway presents unique challenges and
characteristics, Transparity Adaptive offers customizable adaptive strategies that can be used alone or in conjunction with one another for improved traffic flow.
Synchronization strategies include discrete activation criteria, multiple modes of operation and progression tactics, and weighting factors that empower users to assign preference to all considerations.
Track, analyze, and validate traffic flow improvements with internal reporting metrics.
Transparity® Adaptive
© 2016 McCain Inc. Updated 08/24/2016. McCain reserves the right to change product specifications without notice.
For the most up-to-date information, please contact McCain.
To learn more about
McCain’s Integrated Traffic
Solutions, please contact
[email protected] or
call (760) 727-8100
2365 OAK RIDGE WAY // VISTA, CALIFORNIA 92081 // USA // WWW.MCCAIN-INC.COM ® Adaptive Display Screenshot
Time Space Diagram
How it Works
Analyze Real-Time Traffic Conditions
Collect data from existing detection technology to identify demand trends including:
• Signal phase demand
• Arterial volume
• Directional volume
• Link speed
Calculate Optimal Signal Timing
Determine new signal timing parameters along the corridor to meet changing demand. Impacted factors include:
• Fluid cycle length according to arterial volume
• Equitable distribution of phase splits
• Optimization of offsets with weighting factors for preferential, semipreferential, and balanced direction of travel Measure Performance
Validate and verify the effectiveness of adaptive operations by viewing real-time records of:
• Split utilization and phase demand
• Phase reason for termination
• Cycle length requests and changes
• Detector volume and occupancy reports
Enhance performance reporting with McCain high-resolution data reporting, that also provides:
• Arrivals on green versus red (approach volume)
• Green red occupancy ratio (Purdue phase termination)
• Platoon ratio / arrival type
• Phase wait time
System Specifications
System Requirements
• Transparity TMS (see separate brochure)
• McCain Omni eX® controller software (see separate brochure) Detection Requirements
• Stop-bar detection (minimum requirement)
• Advanced detection (ideal – not required)
• Mid-block system detection (ideal – not required)
Compatibility
• All industry standard detection types
• ATC 2070 or NEMA controllers
• All cabinet types including, but not limited to, Caltrans 332, NEMA TS 1 and TS 2, ITS, and ATC cabinets
• Ethernet, serial, or wireless communication
Transparity® Adaptive
Trusted Transportation Solutions
The integration of KLD’s Adaptive Control Decision
Support System (ACDSS™) into TransCore’s stateof-the-art TransSuite® traffic management software provides an adaptive control strategy that can be
used as part of a larger, area-wide traffic signal
control system. Traffic engineers can now conduct
real-time analysis and change signal patterns at the
touch of a button, helping to alleviate congestion
before it worsens.
NTCIP Compatible
Designed to work with NTCIP-compatible controllers
and detection equipment placed at strategic
locations, ADCSS reduces investment needed for
additional infrastructure, training and maintenance.
ACDSS features real-time optimization technology for
both over- and under- saturated traffic, just-in-time
(JIT) microscopic traffic simulation, operator-in-theloop, and autonomous signal operations.
Optimization Repository
ACDSS features a signal optimization repository,
enabling several algorithms, from delay minimization
and diamond interchange control to queue
management, to be incorporated as switchable
plug-ins. This concept enables regional multiobjective, multi-regime adaptive control not available from others. ACDSS also provides the flexibility to
incorporate any state-of-the-art algorithm developed
from existing and future ITS technologies as, needed.
Web Service-Based
Communication Channels
Integral to the ACDSS development is the simple
object access protocol (SOAP) web service-based
communication channels for retrieving traffic data,
transmitting optimized signal plans in real time, and
interfacing with the control infrastructure.
Database and Reporting
ACDSS features a hybrid database management
structure. Short-term data is cached in memory for
computational efficiency and all data is permanently
archived, including detector data, controller status
and operational logs. This provides the capability to
use archived data for online data fusion in the case
of sparse detectorization, as well as offline analysis
and reporting.
ACDSS
Adaptive Control
Decision Support System
Intelligent Control for Smarter Signals
ACDSS
Adaptive Control
Decision Support System
Arterial Applications
ACDSS optimizes arterial signals by adjusting cycle,
offsets and splits asynchronously. The system
assesses traffic conditions as frequently as multiple
times within a cycle to decide the best signal timing
parameters at the next local zeros. This enables a
faster-than-a-cycle responsiveness without the need
of extensive second-by-second data and control. If a
change of offsets or cycle length is found beneficial,
the new parameters are sent to controllers and
implemented at the next cycle. This is followed
by a pattern-hold period, where only the splits are
continuously adjusted.
Urban Adaptive Control &
Congestion Management
To preserve capacity and improve mobility in
congested urban networks, ACDSS combines realtime demand regulating signal plans with dynamic queue management at critical intersections. Signal
timing plans are selected in real time according
to the prevalent congestion levels to better utilize
storage space and redistribute traffic. This works
in concert with balancing queue storage ratios at
critical intersections to symmetrically alleviate urban congestion.
Operation
Designed as a centralized software paradigm,
ACDSS supports both autonomous operation without
operator interactions and operator-in-the-loop
validation. When it comes to tactical control decisions such as shifting strategies from achieving smooth
flow to congestion management, the operator can
approve or reject system-recommended plans or
strategies. The operator-in-the-loop helps achieve
robust and reliable signal operations for eventful
situations, training and confidence building.
ACDSS Operator-in-Loop Graphic Interface
Just-In-Time Simulation
ACDSS supports integrated real-time simulation for
online performance evaluation. It provides flexible
interfaces to existing commercial traffic simulators
such as Aimsun or VISSIM. With JIT simulation, an
operator can launch multiple instances of traffic
simulation “just in time” to compare scenarios and
choose the best available signal timing alternatives.
These alternatives include:
1) signal timing plan with
optimized cycles, offsets and
splits; 2) signal timing plan with
unchanged cycle but optimized
offset and split, and 3) signal
timing plan with optimized splits
only. The operator decides on
the best alternative (operatorin-the-loop mode) based on the real-time simulations, or the
system automatically selects
one based on its internal rules
(self-running mode).
The TransSuite
Family
TransSuite is a family of
transportation management
software products. TransSuite’s
user interface is consistent
and intuitive across the entire
product family. The Windowsbased interface will be familiar to novice users because the
interface employs Windows®
standards for drag and drop,
ToolTip information, and
context-sensitive device
menus. Each workstation can
access all system functions with
customized security levels for
each user. The TransSuite family
includes modules for event management, ramp
metering, dynamic message sign control, traveler
information, transit priority, and RWIS data collection.
ACDSS System Architecture
ACDSS system architecture features a generic web service interface, hybrid real-time data management, and a unique optimization algorithm repository.
Just-in-time simulation compares alternatives
in real-time.
ACDSS
Adaptive Control
Decision Support System
For more information:
Call
770.246.6202
Email
[email protected]
linkedin.com/company/transcorelp
transcore.com
Trusted Transportation Solutions
© 2015 TransCore L.P. All rights reserved. TRANSCORE and TRANSSUITE are registered trademarks, and are used under license. All other trademarks listed are the property of their respective owners. Contents subject to change. Printed in the U.S.A.
Follow Us
▷ “I was able to deploy Centracs
Adaptive using mostly existing
detection equipment. Since
adaptive signal control is
integrated with Centracs, I can
upload and download, or key in
controller configuration changes,
and the adaptive system stays
automatically synchronized.”
◉ John Thai, Principal Traffic
Engineer for City of Anaheim
About Centracs Adaptive
Centracs Adaptive captures the benefits behind the
development of the original ACS Lite – the original adaptive control software designed to adapt signal timing plans to accommodate traffic flow changes. Econolite incorporates unique improvements to ACS Lite into Centracs Adaptive.
Integrated in Econolite’s Centracs ATMS, centralized
Advanced Transportation Management System, Centracs
Adaptive is designed for transportation agencies seeking to significantly improve traffic mobility over pre-programmed signal timing plans. Centracs Adaptive is a true Adaptive Signal Control software that actively reallocates and adapts signal timing as necessary to improve traffic flow, including unpredictable or unexpected traffic conditions. Centracs Adaptive is one of the most cost effective Adaptive Signal Control systems available.
• Eases traffic congestion – reduces stops, delays and travel times • Reduces vehicle emissions and production of greenhouse gases • Often leverages existing detection to a large extent
• Requires no calibration/tuning
▷ ▷ Centracs Adaptive is designed for transportation agencies seeking to significantly improve traffic mobility over pre-programmed signal timing plans. 3360 E La Palma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92806 ∙ 714-630-3700 ∙ [email protected] ∙ www.econolite.com © 2017 Econolite Control Products, Inc. All rights reserved. Econolite Control Products, Inc. is an Econolite Group, Inc. company, and reserves the right to change or update these specifications at any time without prior notification.
Econolite ATMS Systems & Modules
383090916-5
A Mounting Problem
The impact of traffic delays and congestion are
far reaching. While the causes can vary, many
of the consequences are universal: increases
in citizen complaints, driver frustration, fuel
consumption, and production of greenhouse
gases and pollution; with correlating decreases
in safety, mobility, and quality of life. National
surveys (National League of Cities, Pew
Research Center) have found that over the
course of the last decade, traffic congestion has
risen to a top-ranked concern for communities
across the nation, second only to job availability.
According to the Federal Highway Administration
(FHWA), outdated conventional traffic signal
timing represents 10 percent of all traffic delay
and congestion on major routes. Compounded
by unpredicted traffic volume increases,
special events, traffic accidents, and roadway
construction, the increase in traffic congestion
can be paralyzing to mobility. The 2011 Annual
Urban Mobility Report found, in 2010, traffic
congestion costs about $115 billion in wasted
time and fuel. This also directly impacts
transportation agencies, requiring extra resources
to continually address driver complaints,
compiling traffic data, analyzing the data, and
adjusting individual signal timing manually. To
make matters worse, projections indicate that
traffic congestion will continue to worsen.
What Can Be Done?
In simplest terms, ‘improve traffic flow.’ Adaptive
Signal Control, combined with a highly functional
signal timing system, is specifically designed
to improve traffic flow. Adaptive Signal Control
continuously adjusts and distributes green time
to enhance traffic movements, and as a result,
improves travel time reliability, reduces traffic
congestion levels, and accommodates variable/
unpredictable traffic demands. Moreover,
Centracs Graphical User
Interface (GUI)
◉ Centracs Adaptive is easy to configure
through the Centracs GUI. There is
minimal data entry because much of the
configuration data is uploaded directly
from the local controllers. After uploading
the configuration data, the user configures
links, detector configurations, and tuning
parameters through the GUI. After the
configuration is completed Centracs
Adaptive control is managed through the
Centracs scheduler, providing maximum
control over when Centracs Adaptive
is operational. As the system runs, the
Centracs database is continually updated
to provide status reports, allowing users to
track the changes that Centracs Adaptive
makes to the splits and offsets. In addition,
Centracs archives adaptive adjustments, and
controller and detector status data to a file
for future analysis. Centracs Adaptive and
its user interfaces are natively implemented
in Centracs. This allows any user with the
Centracs client software to securely access
Centracs Adaptive tools and reports locally
and remotely via the Internet over a VPN
connection.
Cobalt ATC Datasheet
Adaptive Signal Control extends the effectiveness
of signal timing strategies.
Field evaluations of the adaptive technology (now
integrated in Centracs) have shown average
improvements aggregated over all measured time
periods and over each arterial direction to yield:
11% less travel time*
27% reduction in delays*
28% reduction in stops*
8% reduction in vehicle emissions*
17% reduction in side street queue delays*
* Steve Shelby, PhD. - Centracs Adaptive - Simulation and Real-World Results, presented at Transportation Research Board, January 2012
1 Overview of the Kadence
Real‐Time Adaptive Control
System
FHWA SBIR DTRT57‐10‐C‐10044
Douglas Gettman, Ph.D., Kimley-Horn & Associates
Contact: 520-977-5753
[email protected]
March 2012
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
2 March 2012
Contents
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 3 Integration of the Kadence Adaptive System with KITS ............................................................... 4 Adaptive Algorithms ....................................................................................................................... 7 Cycle Tuning ............................................................................................................................... 7 Offset Tuning ............................................................................................................................ 10 Captured flow ............................................................................................................................ 14 Distributed Offset Adjustment .............................................................................................. 14 Including Safety in the Assessment of Offset Performance ................................................. 14 Split Tuning .............................................................................................................................. 16 Split Constraints .................................................................................................................... 16 Calculation of Duration Constraints ..................................................................................... 16 Estimating Phase Utilization ................................................................................................. 18 Estimation of Split Utilization .............................................................................................. 20 Balancing Utilization Levels ................................................................................................. 21 Incorporating Safety Assessment in the Optimization of Splits ........................................... 22 Phase Sequence Changes .......................................................................................................... 24 Protected / Permitted Left-Turn Mode Changes (future) .......................................................... 25 Kadence Adaptive Control System Summary .............................................................................. 25 Future Directions .......................................................................................................................... 29 Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
3 March 2012
Overview
The Kadence (from the English noun cadence meaning balanced, rhythmic flow) adaptive control system was developed as a SBIR in a joint venture with Kimley-Horn & Associates (headquarters in Raleigh, NC with 56 offices nationwide) and Sabra-Wang & Associates (headquarters in Baltimore, MD with several offices in the Baltimore-Washington region). The development and software integration staff was done by the KITS arterial and freeway management systems team. The system optimizes traffic signal timing to balance performance benefits for safety and efficiency. The system is not intended to replace or obviate the need for sound traffic engineering but rather supplement the traffic engineer’s toolbox with another tool that can handle fluctuations in demand and short and long-term changes in land use and traffic patterns.
Kadence is comprised of four principle algorithms for tuning signal splits, offsets, cycle time, and phase sequence. Switching between protected, protected-permitted, and permitted-only left turns (supported by appropriate field infrastructure) is planned for implementation in 2013. A safety performance function is also included that allows the real-time system to predict the changes in traffic conflict rates when adjusting signal timing parameters. First, the system considers efficiency as the primary objective in each optimization algorithm and then checks if the safety performance is also improved. When both safety and efficiency are improved, these new signal timing settings are sent to the field controllers. If efficiency is improved but safety is predicted to be degraded, no new parameters are downloaded to the field. Due to the experimental nature of the safety prediction function, this feature can be disabled to provide the system greater flexibility to make efficiency improvements.
The Kadence system builds upon the operation of the ACSLITE concept developed between 2002-2007 for FHWA by Dr.s Gettman (currently with KHA), Shelby (currently with Econolite), and Head (currently with University of Arizona). In the ACSLITE approach, new signal timing parameters are downloaded to field controllers every 3-4 cycles. The field controller then begins operating in an actuated-coordinated or actuated-free mode with these new settings. Based on past experience with adaptive systems that override the controller’s timings every second (RHODES, OPAC, SCOOT, SCATS, and InSync), this methodology of downloading new timings is more reliable, safer, and less error prone. In addition, the approach of ACSLITE is proven to require minimal capital investment, infrastructure, detectors, configuration, and calibration. The system operation has been validated in over 10 deployments nationwide to produce improvements to travel time and system delay over actuated-coordinated operation with TOD plans.
In addition to the implementation of three optimization algorithms (cycle tuning, cycle selection, and phase sequence selection), several other key enhancements have been implemented. The system requires three cycles of good observations of phase timing and detector data before making decisions but now checks every 30 seconds to identify if that requirement is satisfied.
This vastly improves the responsiveness of the system versus the fixed-horizon scheme (5 minutes, 10 minutes) implemented in the baseline ACSLITE system. The offset tuning algorithm has also been enhanced to search offsets in a range instead of only considering fixed changes (+5, 0, -5). By selecting larger search bounds (say, +/-20s), Kadence can quickly find the correct offset solution when the current solution is particularly poor. Kadence has been integrated with VISSIM using Virtual D4 controller firmware. This provides rapid prototyping Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
4 March 2012
and testing of any real-world situation with accurate controller parameters and real-world operation.
Integration of the Kadence Adaptive System with KITS
License Fee and Integration Expenses
The Kadence adaptive control system is integrated as a component of the KHA KITS arterial and freeway management system. This component is available to KITS clients for a one-time license fee, integration costs with the agency’s field controllers, configuration and training. The license fee will allow the agency to use the adaptive control module on any or all of the intersections throughout the system. As with traditional actuated-coordinated systems, we recommend the configuration of groups of signals that are managed with adaptive control as a system. These adaptive groups are notionally one-to-one with “sections” in KITS. A maximum of 32 signals are allowed in each adaptive group. A stand-alone mode is also supported so that the Kadence can be deployed as a “master” controller without the rest of the KITS signal management system software, if desired.
Second-by-Second Polling
The ACSLITE adaptive control approach requires the use of NTCIP or AB3418E National standards communications for phase timing and detector data. This makes the system portable with essentially any field controller from any vendor including ASC/3, McCain 233, SEPAC, LACO4, TSCP, D4, City of LA, and NextPhase. To provide the most flexible support for “any” controller type, Kadence aggregates the MOE data using second-by-second polling of phase timing and detector data from intersections. The original ACSLITE system and approaches used by other vendors require the phase timing and detector data to be aggregated on the local controller which requires a firmware update. Kadence does not require these firmware changes.
In addition, this requirement for second-by-second polling of detector data requires high speed (i.e. IP) and high-reliability communications to any field controllers that are put under adaptive control. Based on the recent successes we have had in converting copper serial multi-drop lines to VDSL (IP), the cost of communications upgrades is relatively low.
Field Detector Requirements
Detection requirements for the adaptive system are as follows:
Stop-bar detection for all phases that are adaptively controlled. These detectors can be any length. Lane-by-lane detection (i.e. separate lead-in cables from the field loops to the cabinet) is strongly preferred, but not required. Any detection technology (video, loops, magnetometer) is supported. Any phase can be designated to be excluded from optimization, if desired, or if the phase is anticipated to be run in recall because of lack of detection).
Advance detection for all coordinated phases. These loops or zones should be relatively short (i.e. 6x6 zones or loops in each lane). Lane-by-lane detection (i.e. separate lead-in cables from the field loops to the cabinet) is strongly preferred, but not required. Any detection technology (video, loops, magnetometer, radar) is supported. Exit detection is supported, as is mid-block detection.
5 Kadence
The syste
“master”
associate
runs on Win
em can be de
controller u
ed temperatu
ndows PC pl
eployed as p
using a fieldure –tolerant
Figure.
latform and
part of KITS
-hardened PC
peripherals.
Basic Cont
Over
requires no
or as a stand
C with solid
troller Conf
rview of Kadenc
additional fi
d-alone man
-state HD an
figuration S
ce Adaptive Co
Ma
ield hardwar
nagement pla
nd fanless pr
Setup
ntrol System
arch 2012
re in the cabi
atform like a
rocessor and
inet.
a
6 Figure. Example display for Cycle, sp
Over
lit, offset, a
view of Kadenc
nd sequen
e Adaptive Co
Ma
ce tuning pe
ntrol System
arch 2012
erformance
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
7 March 2012
Adaptive Algorithms
Kadence builds additional functionality on top of the base ACSLITE system. The ACSLITE optimization system was developed by Dr.s Gettman (currently with KHA), Shelby (currently with Econolite), and Head (currently with University of Arizona) for FHWA from 2002-2007.
Field trials and deployment of the ACSLITE sites was completed in 2006. All field deployments resulted in improvements to system delay and arterial travel time. ACSLITE was developed to address many of the shortcomings of the ACS algorithms (RHODES, OPAC) developed by FHWA in the mid 1990s. ACSLITE and Kadence are thus based on a simple traffic model that has few tunable parameters and requires minimal calibration. ACSLITE originally consisted of only split and offset tuning methods. Kadence includes additional algorithms for cycle selection, cycle tuning, and phase sequence selection. In all of the descriptions below, we discuss the methodology including the consideration of improved safety performance. This trade-off check can be disabled to increase the system’s ability to maximize efficiency improvements.
Cycle Tuning
Cycle time is selected on a section- or arterial-wide basis to facilitate progression and to provide adequate capacity to operate all of the signals under capacity. Most often, cycle times in adaptive control systems are chosen according to a heuristic rule or, in the case of real-time second-by-second systems, the concept of cycle time is transient – the cycle length can change in each iteration as the system operates more like “free” than in coordination. For example, SCATS uses a heuristic that might be termed the “90% rule”. The SCATS cycle for a section is ratcheted up or down based on keeping the most saturated intersection in the section just at 90% degree of saturation (DoS). This is a reasonable strategy to follow and guarantees that the cycle selected will not artificially cause congestion in certain approaches. In a simplistic fashion, if the cycle time is increased by X seconds, then every phase on the controller gets a proportion of the additional time. For example if 4 seconds are added to the cycle time and there are four phases per ring, one additional second is provided for each phase split.
This strategy will tend towards longer cycles during peak periods as traffic demand builds, which is appropriate, although there is recent research indicating that when the conditions are extremely oversaturated, shorter cycles will provide more efficient throughput. Kadence is being designed to take advantage of the improvements identified by Gettman in NCHRP 03-90, operation of traffic signal systems in oversaturated conditions. This will improve the capability of Kadence to provide sound decisions during incident response conditions, such as heavy diversion of flows from a freeway to a parallel arterial or frontage road system.
The Kadence approach extends from this “critical intersection” algorithm providing a small improvement to this heuristic to consider some k highest saturation levels (or a determination of critical approaches or phases, such as the principal progression phases on an arterial) throughout the network and only increase the cycle time when a minimum number of those critical links are above the specified level of phase utilization. Similarly, decreasing the system cycle when all approaches are less than (say, 60% phase utilization) may not be desirable to maintain adequate progression. To combine the effects of both safety and efficiency, we include the evaluation of our safety performance function in the algorithm for adjusting the cycle time as shown in the following Figure.
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
8 March 2012
Figure. Flow chart of cycle time tuning algorithm
In this manner, Kadence considers the possible improvements to both safety and efficiency by first checking the efficiency metric for the cycle time – are all of the k highest saturation levels above or below 90%? If the answer is yes that there are at least k movements with saturation levels above 90%, we consider an increase to the cycle time. If this change results in improvement to the safety metric (i.e. reducing the total predicted conflicts), Kadence continues in this direction of search until one or more of the k highest saturation levels have fallen below 90% saturation (or whatever threshold is determined to be appropriate by the user). As stated earlier, the calculation of the safety effects can be disabled if desired to provide greater flexibility in improving efficiency.
9 Similarly
are more
level bel
true, we
next itera
Cycle Se
In additio
to jump t
conjuncti
algorithm
longer th
shift to th
cycle tun
seconds,
appropria
Figu
y in the oppo
e than k’ (wh
ow 70% (or
implement a
ation until th
election
on to cycle t
to a differen
ion with the
m can allow
han the existi
he beginning
ning algorith
the system
ately. This
ure. Concep
osite directio
here it could
r whatever th
a reduction t
here are no lo
tuning, we h
nt cycle time
cycle tunin
w the system
ing TOD sch
g or end of p
hm described
enables the
is illustrated
pt of implem
on of cycle c
d be true that
hreshold is d
to the cycle
onger k’ mov
have implem
e that is next
g method, o
m to jump to
hedule. Thi
peak periods
d previously
new cycle t
d in the follo
menting the
Over
change, we
t k is not the
determined t
time. The s
vements wit
mented an alg
t in the plan
or as a replac
o the next cy
is allows the
s. The same
is used but
time immed
owing Figure
next cycle t
rview of Kadenc
consider red
e same as k’
to be approp
system cycle
th saturation
gorithm whic
nned TOD sc
cement to th
ycle earlier
e system to a
e evaluation
rather than c
diately and r
e.
time earlier
ce Adaptive Co
Ma
ducing the cy
’) movement
priate by the
e time is red
level below
ch evaluates
chedule. Th
he cycle tuni
or stay in t
adapt quickl
approach fo
changing the
recalculates
or later tha
ntrol System
arch 2012
ycle time if
ts with satur
e user). If t
duced again i
w 70%.
s a quick dec
his can be us
ng method.
the current
ly to change
or the increm
e cycle just a
splits and o
an scheduled
there
ration
his is
in the
cision
sed in
This
cycle
s in a
mental
a few
ffsets
d
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
10 March 2012
Offset Tuning
Cycle time tuning affects all of the intersections in the network if they are all operating in a coordinated mode. Tuning offsets improves progression performance along primary routes for phases that are coordinated. Offset tuning algorithms are particularly straightforward. The proven and robust methodology used in ACSLITE is used in Kadence.
The concept of the data-driven offset adjustment algorithm is summarized in two simple statements: (1) use detectors several hundred feet upstream of the signal to construct cycle-based (“cyclic”) profiles of traffic flow arriving to the intersection, and (2) adjust the offset to maximize the number of vehicles arriving during the green phase. This concept is then expanded to consider and mitigate the effects of such modifications to the offset value for two-way traffic and the effects of changes at this intersection on adjacent intersections. Periodically, small, incremental adjustments are made to the offset to maximize the total proportion of cyclic flow arriving to a green light.
It is assumed that an initial solution (plan data – cycle, splits, and offset) has already been developed and that the original offset may be less than optimal. A user-configurable maximum deviation from the original setting (either an increase or decrease to the offset value) is defined for each offset to restrict the algorithm from drifting too far away from the original solution. The user can also specify that this value is unbounded, which allows the system to search for any offset.
The figure below illustrates the detector locations used for offset tuning. There is one detector station for each coordinated approach. Intersection 1 is referred to as the upstream intersection and intersection 2 is referred to as the downstream intersection. Traffic volume and occupancy is measured at some point between 1 and 2 by a detector in each lane. These detectors can be located where typical advanced detectors are located (200-300ft from the intersection). Placing detectors further upstream can improve the quality of the flow rate measurements, and reduces the possibility of vehicles queuing over the detectors when the light is red. It is also not necessary to have one detector per lane returned to the controller in a separate amplifier, but this practice will improve performance of the algorithm. Exit detection can also be used, if available.
11 Assumin
traffic vo
detector
patterns o
Plots of
cycle tim
the Figur
their corr
the maxi
indicate t
last few c
Secondar
flow on t
Figure. Ty
ng that the tr
olumes and
will measu
of flow are r
the flow pro
me of the con
re below. T
responding b
imum value
the same vo
cycles that tr
ry platoons
the cross stre
ypical flow p
raffic signals
turning prop
ure approxim
referred to as
ofile data (v
ntroller (tim
The magnitu
bars in each
observed in
olume or occ
raffic is arriv
and individu
eet phases.
profile detec
s at both int
portions are
mately simil
s cyclic flow
volume and
e is on the x
ude of the v
row of the c
n that row
cupancy valu
ving near the
ual vehicles
Over
ctor location
tersections a
reasonably
lar recurring
w profiles.
occupancy
x-axis; not d
volume and o
chart. The h
(equal heigh
ue). These p
e beginning
also show
rview of Kadenc
ns on coord
are using the
steady over
g patterns o
observation
direction from
occupancy i
height of the
hts in differ
profiles indic
of the local
up througho
ce Adaptive Co
Ma
dinated appr
e same cycle
r time, it is e
of flow eac
ns) as a func
m West to E
is indicated
bars in each
rent rows do
cate that it is
cycle time f
out the cycl
ntrol System
arch 2012
roaches
e length, and
expected tha
ch cycle. T
ction of the
East) as show
by the heig
h row is scale
o not necess
s typical ove
for this appr
e, due to tu
d that
at the
These
local
wn in
ght of
ed by
sarily
er the
roach.
urning
12 Fig
The figu
cycles at
gure. Exam
re below ill
an intersect
Figure.
mple of volum
ustrates an e
ion.
. Example o
me and occu
example of
of phase tim
Over
upancy data
phase timin
ming for eac
rview of Kadenc
a from a typ
ng history ob
ch of the last
ce Adaptive Co
Ma
pical advanc
bserved ove
t several cy
ntrol System
arch 2012
ce detector
er the last se
ycles
veral
13 The num
(green, y
shown b
recent da
Each cyc
non-sync
these pha
the sync
The cycl
for the f
associate
Note tha
coordinat
the prima
(coordina
correspon
progressi
time 0 (o
cases, th
termed “
tapering
(local tim
in at leas
Note that
flow prof
The flow
one-direc
occupanc
green of
mber and col
yellow, and r
elow the fir
ata at the top
cle begins at
c, actuated p
ases may be
phases (typi
ic flow profi
flow profile
ed (via user
at in the ca
ted phases o
ary progress
ated and n
nding appro
ion phase is
or 80). Eac
he controller
early return
percent-gree
me 50 second
t one cycle d
Figure.
t occupancy
files.
w profile sce
ctional trave
cy bars betw
the service p
lor of each c
red) displaye
rst row are
and progres
t the local ze
phases (typic
skipped in a
ically phases
files are then
detector. E
configuratio
ase of an
on the contro
ion moveme
non-coordina
oaches. The
green 100%
ch cycle one
returns to t
to green”).
en bars prior
ds). As show
during the la
Example
, rather than
enario shown
el. The arr
ween local c
phase.
column in th
ed by each r
actual data
ssing back in
ero time, wh
cally phases
any given cy
s 2 & 6) can
n averaged to
Each link, a
on) with a c
arterial, the
oller, but any
ent is a turni
ated) might
e figure bel
% of the time
e or more no
the coordina
Figure 6 il
r (to the left
wn, this prog
ast ~10 cycle
e of average
n volume, is
n above is a
riving plato
ycle time 40
Over
he timeline
ring at that t
recorded fro
n time as you
hich is label
other than 2
ycle. Thus, t
and does va
o generate a
and thus eac
correspondin
e progressio
y phase can b
ing flow. In
be config
low shows
e, starting at
on-sync pha
ated phase e
lustrates this
of) to the pro
gression pha
es.
e cyclic volu
the preferred
an example
ons are ind
0 and local
rview of Kadenc
corresponds
time in the c
om a field t
u go further
ed on the le
2 & 6) are v
the time at w
ary from cyc
single, repre
ch flow pro
ng phase at t
on phases g
be designate
n a grid netw
gured as pr
that during
t local time
ases typically
earlier than
s early retur
ogrammed s
ase started a
ume and occ
d detector m
of the perfo
dicated by t
cycle time 7
ce Adaptive Co
Ma
s to the activ
cycle. All s
test controll
down the di
eft. Note tha
variable, and
which the con
le to cycle.
esentative cy
file detector
the downstr
generally co
ed as the pro
work all majo
rogression p
a portion o
50 and endi
y gap out ea
is required
rn to green b
start of main
s early as lo
cupancy pro
measurement
ormance of a
the cluster
75 which co
ntrol System
arch 2012
ve phase int
subsequent c
er with the
isplay.
at the durati
d one or mo
ntroller retur
yclic flow pr
r on that lin
eam intersec
orrespond to
ogression ph
or through ph
phases for
of the cycle
ing at local
arly, and in
(and is typi
behavior wit
n street green
ocal cycle tim
ofiles
t used to gen
a good offse
of relatively
orresponds t
terval
cycles
most
on of
ore of
rns to
rofile
nk, is
ction.
o the
ase if
hases
their
e, the
cycle
such
ically
th the
n split
me 27
nerate
et for
y tall
to the
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
14 March 2012
Captured flow
The effectiveness of offset settings (or the relative difference between the settings) at upstream and downstream intersections is measured or quantified by calculating the % arrivals on green, or the “captured flow”. This performance measure is a surrogate for stops and delay.
Specifically, the captured or progressed flow is the amount of flow (in units of vehicle-seconds of occupancy) arriving to the stop-line at a given point in the cycle multiplied by the percent of time the progression phase is green at that time during the cycle. The algorithm evaluates different offsets by calculating the captured flow on each approach and selecting the offset that maximizes the total amount of captured flow.
Distributed Offset Adjustment
Kadence uses a distributed offset adjustment method. This approach makes offset adjustments for each controller independently but with consideration of the effects of each independent decision on adjacent signals. Each controller considers a range of offset settings: no change, adjust up to seconds earlier, or adjust up to seconds later. The adjustment maximum step size, , is a user-configurable value. If the value is set at 10, for example, Kadence will search offsets in each step in the range of (+10, +9, +8, +7, …., 0, -1, -2, -3,….., -10). The adjustment procedure estimates the amount of cyclic traffic flow progressed for inbound and outbound links of the controller for each of the adjustment options and chooses the option that maximizes the total progressed flow. As a reliability measure, there must be at least 3 cycles of vehicleoccupancy data for every flow profile detector at this intersection and adjacent intersections (as well as the corresponding phase timing status information) to execute the selection algorithm.
This provides a level of smoothing so that the changes are not frequently toggling between one offset and another. The ACSLITE project field tests determined that this methodology is effective at making adjustments to offsets to improve progression, while mitigating the effects of controller transition by only making small adjustments for each tuning. [2012 enhancement: if the difference between the evaluated offsets is not greater than small amount of improvement, say, 5%, the controller will remain at the current offset. This will reduce transition events that do not result in significant improvement to performance.] Including Safety in the Assessment of Offset Performance The approach to tuning offsets discussed above is augmented as with the other algorithms to consider both efficiency and safety. Similar to the approach for tuning the cycle time, the algorithm will use the safety performance function as the performance calculator. This approach is detailed in the flow chart below. As with other algorithms, the consideration of safety performance can be toggled on or off. In the Phase I research, offsets had the weakest correspondence to improvements or detriments in safety.
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
15 March 2012
Figure. Offset adjustment algorithm flow chart
As shown above the general approach is to identify the capture efficiency performance of options to move the offset forward or backward. If one or the other improves performance over the “no change” situation (note that it is not common or probable that both moves improve performance), we check the safety impact of the proposed change. If this change is deemed to both improve safety and efficiency, the algorithm will continue exploring this direction of change for additional improvements. If the change degrades safety, the algorithm will not adjust the offset.
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
16 March 2012
Split Tuning
The approach used to tune splits is driven by collecting the same data as used to tune offsets (phase timing information and second-by-second detector occupancy and volume), but collected from detectors at the stop bar of the intersection. The Kadence methodology is also derived from the algorithms developed in the ACSLITE project. In general, this approach to tuning split times is derived from the concepts used by SCATS and SCOOT which is to equalize the degree of saturation on all the phases at the intersection. In shorthand, this approach is termed “equisat”.
To be specific, the algorithm in Kadence minimizes the maximum degree of saturation on any phase, rather than driving all of the saturation levels to the same value. This algorithm also allows coordinated phases to have biased splits, so that progression is protected when the saturation level of the coordinated phase was lower than that of side-streets. Without such biasing, the performance is slanted towards providing adequate LOS on side streets, which neglects the throughput issues. The approach works by balancing a measure of degree of saturation that is termed “phase utilization”. The algorithm is described in more detail in the following sections. This section can be skipped for readers with limited time.
Split Constraints
There are constraints on split adjustments which can be defined using a phase-barrier diagram.
A typical phase-barrier sequence is illustrated, with barriers explicitly labeled below. b 1 2 A 3 4 b 5 6 7 8
Figure. Ring diagram with barriers (denoted bold vertical lines) explicitly labeled In discussing the split adjustment algorithms, it is necessary to refer to certain groups of phases.
The collection of phases on a particular ring, between two particular barriers is referred to as a ring group. There are four ring groups, (1, 2), (3, 4), (5, 6), and (7, 8).
A barrier group, is the collection of all phases (or all ring groups) between two particular barriers. In the example above, there are two barrier groups (1, 2, 5, 6) and (3, 4, 7, 8). The algorithm uses these groups to swap split time from one phase to another in order to determine the set of split adjustments that satisfy the cycle time.
It is necessary to first determine the legal range of adjustments for each split, before solving for the set of split values recommended for a given controller. This includes consideration of minimum times, maximum times and pedestrian crossing restrictions. These constraints are also important to calculate for each ring and barrier group. While this may seem trivial, it is important to accurately calculate these values before searching the optimization space as this significantly improves the calculation efficiency.
Calculation of Duration Constraints
1. Compute the minimum, current, and (initial) maximum split durations for each phase p, p P.
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
17 March 2012
a. Compute p p p p p p p s max{g , g , g g } y r min min max initial walk ped clear , for each phase p.
Note that the ASC MIB objects uploaded from each controller are in mixed precision (some in seconds, others in tenths of a second). These values are combined in tenths-of-a-second units, and the rounded up to the nearest second.
If phase p is omitted in the current pattern, then min
p s is set to zero.
b. The value cur
p s is an ASC MIB object uploaded directly from the controller for each pattern. If phase p is omitted in the current pattern, then cur p s is set to zero.
c. Initially set p p p p s g y r max max , where max gp is set depending on the maximum mode (max1, max2, or max inhibit) currently used by the controller. If max inhibit is the current mode, then max
p s is set to 255 seconds. If phase p is omitted
in the current pattern, then max
p s is set to zero. Note that max gp is specified in
seconds, whereas yellow and red intervals can be specified in tenths-of-a-second.
These values are combined in tenths-of-a-second precision and then rounded down to the nearest second such that max
p s is in seconds.
d. Ensure the current split is within the configured minimum and maximum constraints. If it is not true that min cur max
p p p s s s , then STOP; the configuration
data is invalid.
e. If the adjustment process is constrained such that only incremental adjustments from the current value are allowed, or a maximum cumulative deviation from an underlying “baseline” split value, then adjust the minimum and maximum constraints here. If the constraint on the cumulative deviation from the baseline split is not satisfied by the current split value, then STOP; this constraint is not currently achievable.
f. If there are no detectors associated with the current phase, then STOP; this is a configuration error.
2. For each group, compute the minimum, current, and (initial) maximum durations for each group g.
a. For each ring r, compute the minimum, current, and (initial) maximum ring-group duration for the ring-group in barrier group g on ring r as follows:
p Prg rg p d s
min min , p Prg rg p d s cur cur , and p Prg rg p d s max max . b. Now compute the barrier group durations as follows: min min dg maxrR drg , cur cur dg maxrR drg , max
: 0
max min max dg r R d drg rg . In general, there will always be at least one phase in each barrier group, hence there will be one ring r such that 0 max drg ; but if not, then set max dg = 0.
3. Calculate the revised maximum duration for each barrier group, its corresponding ringgroups, and the maximum phase splits of their corresponding phases. a. Calculate the revised maximum duration for group g, under the assumption that each other group must time at least its minimum duration, as follows:
g G g g
dg C dg :
max min .
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
18 March 2012
b. Revise the maximum duration for each ring-group on each ring r of the barrier group g, such that it is not greater than the maximum barrier group duration of group g, as follows: max max max min , drg dg drg . c. Ensure that the current ring-group duration (i.e., sum of splits) is not greater than the maximum ring-group duration possible with the cycle. If cur max drg drg , then STOP, there is a configuration problem.
d. Calculate the revised maximum splits for each phase p in the ring-groups from each ring r of the barrier group g, under the assumption that the maximum duration of the ring-group may not be exceeded and each other phase in the ringgroup must time at least its minimum duration. This is calculated as follows:
p P p p p rg p rg
s d s :
max max min . Ensure that the current split is not greater than the revised maximum split. If max
p
cur
p s s , then STOP, there is a configuration
problem.
Once the minimum and maximum phase split duration constraints have been determined using the preceding procedure, the multi-ring split adjustment algorithm may commence.
Estimating Phase Utilization
The split adjustment algorithm is based on the notion of balancing the utilization of all phases of a signal controller. Prior to discussing the algorithm itself, it is necessary to define:
What phase utilization is,
How it is measured, and
How it is estimated for split durations other than what is currently in use by the controller.
Phase utilization is the effectively utilized percentage of available split time. It is analogous to the degree of saturation concept, which is also referred to as the volume-to-capacity or V/C ratio. Utilization is used instead of degree of saturation since the degree of saturation is calculated using volume and capacity counts or rates. Utilization is calculated using ratios of used green time to available green time. The used green time comes from the occupancy of the detector.
The figure below illustrates a typical detector layout for measuring phase utilization with a detector placed at the stop bar for each lane. Each detector is associated with the phase that serves traffic flowing through its corresponding lane. Detector dimensions do not have to be the theoretically “best possible length”.
19 The meth
during gr
the ratio
Kadence
(i.e. com
occupanc
The exam
detector
in the co
amount o
to a prior
hodology m
reen. Dema
of demand t
Figure. M
polls contro
mbines sever
cy during gre
mple above
is occupied.
ontext of coo
of available
r phase gapp
Dete
Phas
Dete
Phas
Figure.
measures the
nd is measu
time to avail
Measuring ph
ollers for ph
ral consecu
een, green p
shows wher
For a fixed
ordinated, a
green time.
ping out early
ctor Presence
se Green Tim
ctor Presence
se Green Tim
A complete
demand for
red in terms
able green ti
hase utiliza
hase timing a
utive once-a
hase duratio
re ten secon
d-time contr
ctuated cont
In this case
y. In this ca
(a) Fixe
e
e
(b) Coo
e
e
2 sec
act
Over
e utilization
r a phase by
s of time, rat
ime. This is
tion for coo
and detector
-minute pol
on, and utiliz
nds of green
oller, this co
troller the c
e, the phase
ase, it could s
d-Time Cont
rdinated-Act
8 available gre
tual green tim
split gr
rview of Kadenc
-detector la
y monitoring
ther than vol
s illustrated i
ordinated-ac
r data and a
ll responses
zation.
n is served,
orresponds to
capacity of t
started timin
serve up to 1
trol
7 sec
tuated Contr
8 sec
en time (12 s
me (10 sec)
reen time (10
70%
ce Adaptive Co
Ma
ayout
g the occupa
lume. Utiliz
in below.
ctuated con
aggregates th
s) to constr
seven secon
o 70% utiliz
the phase is
ng green 2 s
12 seconds o
10 sec
rol
2 sec
ec)
sec)
%
58%
ntrol System
arch 2012
ancy of the p
zation is give
ntrollers
he data over
ruct estimate
nds of whic
zation. How
measured a
seconds early
of green unti
%
phase
en by
r time
es of
ch the
wever,
as the
y due
il it is
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
20 March 2012
forced-off, but it gaps out after 10 seconds of green. The notion of available green in includes the remaining time to the force-off or maximum green, whichever comes first. It is also important to consider when phases have been skipped, due to lack of demand.
Similarly to the other adjustment algorithms, the splits will not be tuned without at least collection of at least three observations of each phase to be tuned, while the controller is in coordination (i.e. when the controller is in transition or preemption, the algorithm will not use this data in tuning splits).
[2012 note: data during transition is being evaluated to be used for split adjustments to improve the responsiveness of Kadence]
Having satisfied this condition, the algorithm then calculates the utilization of alternate split durations for each phase using the following variables and equations, where:
N p = Number of observations of phase p
oip = Occupancy of phase p green time during observation i (0-100%) gip = Green time served by phase p during observation i (seconds) aip = Available green time for phase p during observation i (seconds) d p = Average demand (seconds occupied green) per cycle for phase p a p = Average available green time (seconds) per cycle for phase p p c = Clearance time (seconds of yellow and all-red) associated with phase p upt = Utilization estimate for phase p with split of duration t seconds Estimation of Split Utilization
1. If Np 3 , then STOP. There is not enough data for split adjustment.
2. Compute average demand,
p
N
i
ip ip
p
N
o g
d
p
1
.
3. Compute average available green time,
p
N
i
ip
p
N
a
a
p
1
.
4. For each feasible split duration t, between min
p s and maxp s , estimate the utilization of that
split assuming current demand remains the same and the phase starts on average at the same point in the cycle.
a. If 0 cur a p t s p (i.e. the available green time of such a split duration is nonzero), then set cur p p
p
pt
a t s
d
u
.
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
21 March 2012
b. Otherwise if 0 cur a p t s p (i.e. there is no available green time), then either set upt 0 if d p 0 (i.e. there is no demand), or set u pt if d p 0 .
After calculating these estimated utilization levels for all alternate split durations, an iterative algorithm is executed to select the combination of split values that satisfies the constraints on each phase and phase group (i.e. ring and barrier groups) and minimizes the maximum utilization of any phase on the controller. This procedure is discussed in the next section.
Balancing Utilization Levels
Each phase is assigned a utilization measure that approximates the degree of saturation of that phase, which ranges from 0 to 100% (or higher if oversaturated). Utilization is estimated for each phase, for the full range of possible split durations, as discussed in preceding sections. The figure below is an example of utilization estimates for a dual-ring, eight-phase controller, where the utilization of phase 3 is very high. A chart of the estimated utilization of phases after the algorithm has adjusted the splits to minimize the maximum utilization of any phase on the controller. The changes in split times are listed in the Table. The red circle highlights the change of the most utilized phase from 100% to 72%. Also note that the new maximum phase utilization is now on phase 6, which has increased from 72% utilization to an estimated 76% utilization. Note that the result of the adjustment is not the exact same utilization level on each phase.
Figure. Utilization of phases before and after split adjustment
(a) Pre-Adjustment Settings
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%
12345678
Phase
Utilization
(b) Post-Adjustment Settings
0%
10%
20%
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
90%
100%
12345678
Phase
Utilization
100% 72%
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
22 March 2012
Table 1. Example utilization of phases before and after split adjustment As indicated previously, the primary objective of the split adjustment algorithm is to minimize the maximum degree of utilization across all phases. These objectives achieve the general effect of balancing the degree of utilization across phases and will have the effect of minimizing delay.
Incorporating Safety Assessment in the Optimization of Splits Similar to the approach used for cycle time and offset tuning, the algorithm incorporates evaluation of safety into the optimization by utilizing a safety performance function. This process is illustrated in the flow chart below. The process is similar to the processes developed for offsets and cycle time.
Split Times (sec) Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7 Phase 8 Pre-Adjustment 14 21 13 22 10 25 15 20
Post-Adjustment 11 21 16 22 10 22 17 21
Utilization (%) Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 Phase 6 Phase 7 Phase 8 Maximum Utilization Pre-Adjustment 36% 61% 100% 72% 35% 72% 40% 34% 100%
Post-Adjustment 53% 61% 72% 72% 35% 76% 33% 32% 76%
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
23 March 2012
Figure. Flow chart of the split optimization process including safety analysis Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
24 March 2012
Phase Sequence Changes
Phase sequence affects both progression and delay at an intersection with respect to measures of efficiency. In Phase I of the research that led to Kadence, we also found that the sequence can also affect safety of the intersection, particularly when an intersection operates in coordination in a signal system. In our parameter tuning approach, improvements to both safety and efficiency can be made by analyzing the phase utilization measures for each signal phase and the total capture efficiency of the coordinated phases. To illustrate the concept of the algorithm, we only consider one barrier group (e.g. phases 1,2,5,6 in a standard dual-ring quad intersection). The equivalent rules apply to phases (3,4,7,8) in the other barrier group. In lieu of a flow chart we present the concept as a table of decision rules. In the left column, the current operating phase sequence is listed, lead-lead, lead-lag, lag-lead, and lag-lag. The top row lists the potential phase sequence that we will evaluate changing to. The cells of the table indicate the rules that would justify a change from one sequence to another. For example, a change from lead-lead to lag-lead would be predicated if:
Phase 5 has a heavier utilization than phase 1
Phases 2 and 5 have heavier total utilization than phases 1 and 6 In this example case, phase 1 would change to a lagging phase, which moves the offset to coincide with the end of phase 2 (most controllers reference the offset to the yellow time of the first coordinated phase) instead of the end of both phases 2 and 6. At this intersection, the offset value does not have to change. However the change to the time that phase 2 will occur during the cycle will change the time that the traffic arrives at the intersection downstream from phase 2 and also the capture efficiency of the traffic that arrives to phase 6 from the intersection upstream of that phase. For example, if phase 2 services northbound traffic and phase 6 services southbound traffic, the intersection to the North will experience traffic arriving earlier in its cycle and the intersection to the South will have the traffic arrive later in its cycle. Offsets are adjusted after the sequence change is evaluated.
Table. Rules to evaluate to consider changing phase sequence Current sequence \
potential next
sequence
Lead-lead (12|56) Lead-lag (12|65) Lag-lead (21|56) Lag-lag (21|65) Lead-lead (12|56) N/A PU5 < light
Diagonal(16) dominates
back diagonal(25)
PU1 < light
Back diagonal(25)
dominates diagonal(16)
PU1 < light
PU5 < light
Lag(26) dominates
lead(15)
Lead-lag (12|65) PU5 > heavy
Diagonal(15) dominates
back diagonal(26)
N/A PU1 < light
PU5 > heavy
Lag(25) dominates
lead(16)
PU1 < light
Back diagonal(26)
dominates diagonal(15)
Lag-lead (21|56) PU1 > heavy
Back diagonal(15)
dominates diagonal(26)
PU1 > heavy
PU5 < light
Lag(16) dominates
lead(25)
N/A PU5 < light
Diagonal(26) dominates
back diagonal(15)
Lag-lag (21|65) PU1 > heavy
PU5 > heavy
Lag(15) dominates
Lead(26)
PU1 > heavy
Back diagonal(16)
dominates diagonal (25)
PU5 > heavy
Diagonal (25) dominates
back diagonal (16)
N/A
Similar to the evaluation algorithms for cycle, splits, and offsets, after evaluating the efficiency impact of a potential change to the phase sequence, we next check the effect on the safety by Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
25 March 2012
evaluating the regression equation. If the safety is improved, the change is made, otherwise if the safety is degraded, we do not consider the phase sequence change. The evaluation of safety can be enabled or disabled.
Protected / Permitted Left-Turn Mode Changes (future)
The research in Phase I showed that the mode of left-turn operations has a significant effect on the safety of an intersection with permitted left turns creating the most conflicts and, not surprisingly, protected left-turns creating the least number of conflicts. Crossing crashes are among the most severe crashes that occur. Efficiency is affected in a slightly different order with permitted being the least efficient, protected being next, and protected-permitted having the highest level of service for the same service volume (assuming the service volume being high enough to require protected-permitted operation). Similarly to the algorithm for selecting phase sequence, we present the algorithm for modifying left-turn accommodation by use of a table.
The left-most column lists the current left-turn treatment for a given left-turn. The top row lists the left turn treatment being considered. The cells of the table list the conditions that would justify change from one left turn treatment to the other.
Table. Rules to evaluate when considering changing left-turn treatment Current LT
treatment / next leftturn treatment
Permitted only Protected Protected-Permitted
Permitted only N/A Utilization of left turn
lane is heavy
N/A
Protected Utilization of left turn
phase is very low
N/A Utilization of left-turn
phase is very high
Opposing utilization
is low to moderate
Protected-Permitted N/A Utilization of left turn
protected portion is
moderate to low
N/A
Similarly to the other algorithms, we evaluate the efficiency measure first and then compare any potential detrimental effects on safety by evaluating the trade-off value. If the trade-off value of changes detrimental to safety is acceptable, the change to left-turn operational mode is made.
Otherwise the current operating mode is retained. This algorithm has been postponed for implementation at a later time due to the complexities of recommending changes to this type of operation, and the need for a standard way (or a suite of customized methods) to communicate these changes to controllers, particularly with the emerging standard of flashing yellow arrow versus “doghouse” 5-section heads or other alternative displays used by many agencies (flashing red arrow, etc.).
Kadence Adaptive Control System Summary
The Kadence adaptive control system was developed as a SBIR in a joint venture with KimleyHorn & Associates (headquarters in Raleigh, NC with 56 offices nationwide and Sabra-Wang & Associates (headquarters in Baltimore, MD with several offices in the Baltimore-Washington Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
26 March 2012
region). The principal development and software integration staff reside in the Phoenix, AZ office of KHA as part of the KITS arterial and freeway management systems team. The system focuses on the development of real-time signal timing methodologies and algorithms that balance or optimize both safety and efficiency. The system is not intended to replace or obviate the need for sound traffic engineering but rather supplement the traffic engineer’s toolbox with another tool that can handle fluctuations in demand and short and long-term changes in land use and traffic patterns.
Five principle algorithms were developed for tuning splits, offsets, cycle time, and phase sequence. Switching between protected, protected-permitted, and permitted-only left turns will be added in 2013. A safety performance function was developed that allows the real-time system to predict the changes in traffic conflict rates when adjusting these signal timing parameters. First, the system considers efficiency as the primary objective in each optimization algorithm and then checks if the safety performance is also improved. When both safety and efficiency are improved, these new signal timing settings are sent to the field controllers. Due to the experimental nature of the safety prediction function, this feature can be disabled to provide the system greater flexibility to make efficiency improvements.
There are four principle measures of performance used in Kadence:
Phase utilization. Phase utilization is a surrogate measure of efficiency that represents the degree of saturation of a traffic phase. This measure can be derived directly from the occupancy data measured at stop bar detectors. This measure is used for cycle tuning, cycle selection, split tuning, and phase sequence.
% arrivals on green. % arrivals on green is a measure of efficiency that represents the progression performance of coordinated phases. % arrivals on green can be derived directly from the data measured at upstream detectors on the coordinated phases. This measure is used for offset tuning [future: phase sequence selection]. Estimated traffic conflict rate. Total estimated conflicts per hour is a surrogate measure that represents the estimated effect of changing a traffic control parameter on the intersection safety. This measure is a regression model using a feed-forward neuralnetwork that is trained to learn the relationships between signal timing settings and the crossing, lane-changing, and rear-end conflict rates. [future: weighted conflict rates by type to reflect the anticipated higher severity of crossing and lane-change conflicts that result in crashes]
Each of these measures is used in the adaptive control algorithms as detailed in the previous sections. The five optimization stages are executed independently, but in sequence and with the feedback steps as shown below. First, (Step 1) the split re-allocation algorithm is executed for each intersection in the system. This identifies if any slack green time can be shifted from one or more phases to another, within the current cycle time, to minimize the maximum phase utilization at the intersection. Safety is evaluated by checking that the reallocation either provides a safety benefit by reducing total conflicts or that the reallocation does not exceed a prescribed threshold.
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
27 March 2012
After this re-allocation, the offset adjustment algorithm is executed (Step 2) to identify any modifications to the offsets to improve progression. The total capture efficiency of the offset to “capture” occupancy on the coordinated phases at the subject intersection and its neighbors is calculated to represent the efficiency of the proposed change. Similarly to the split calculation, the safety is evaluated by checking that the new offset either provides a safety benefit by reducing total conflicts or that the proposed change does not exceed a prescribed threshold for the safety/efficiency trade off value.
After the splits and offsets are calculated, modifications to the phase sequence (Step 3) are evaluated with the new split values calculated in Step 1. If any phase sequence modifications are identified that adjust the offset (the departure platoons to adjacent intersections), the offset calculation is re-executed to determine if this change is of further benefit and can be retained, or if the change is detrimental to performance (efficiency or safety).
Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
28 March 2012
Figure. Adjustment algorithms flow chart.
[Future] Next, Kadence evaluates the potential changes to the protected/permitted settings for left-turns (Step 4), using the newly selected phase sequence, if changed in the previous step. If any left-turn settings are deemed to be beneficial for both efficiency and safety, or beneficial for efficiency and within the safety/efficiency trade off value, the split re-allocation algorithm may Overview of Kadence Adaptive Control System
29 March 2012
have to be re-calculated, particularly if the left-turn mode is changed from protected to permitted-only. This change in effect omits the left turn phase setting its split to 0 which frees up additional time in the cycle for other phases. It may not be the best policy to simply provide all of that split for its corresponding companion through phase (e.g. phase 6 if the left turn is phase 1). In turn, if the splits are re-allocated at this step, the offsets, phase sequence, and protected/permitted settings are re-evaluated as well.
Finally, the cycle time adjustment algorithm is evaluated (Step 5). Since cycle time affects all of the intersections in the system, it is important that this adjustment is calculated last, after all of the adjustments/improvements to the individual locations are calculated. As with the phase sequence and protected-permitted settings, if it is deemed beneficial to modify the cycle time, we must re-evaluate the other algorithms within the new value for the cycle (either higher or lower).
Future Directions
In addition to the features described above, the following features will be pursued in future projects to enhance the operations further.
1. “Groundhog Day” elimination. The current system tunes offsets and splits starting from a pre-configured timing plan. If these settings are inappropriate and the traffic flows are repeatable by day and time, Kadence will re-learn to adjust the settings each time it runs the same pattern. This effect is similar to the Bill Murray film “Groundhog Day” where he is forced to re-live the same day and events over and over. In 2013, the system will be upgraded to calculate a new “starting point” for each TOD signal plan, as well as the most appropriate schedule start point for each timing plan.
2. Handling of oversaturated conditions. The current algorithms principles are all based on assumptions of under-saturated operation. While the system can be effective in reducing the duration of oversaturation, or delaying the start of oversaturated operation, in certain complex situations, the decisions made by Kadence may be counterproductive.
This is true of every adaptive control system that is available today. Principles from NCHRP 03-90 research developed by Dr. Gettman will be incorporated into Kadence to handle the special situations where downstream congestion creates upstream oversaturation or when phases are starved based on conflicting queues. These features require measurement of the queue length using the upstream detectors and estimation of the oversaturation levels. Gating links and other features related to the research in 03-90 will be implemented.
3. Suggesting TOD signal timing plans and schedules. The same algorithms that can be applied in real-time can also be applied to longer periods of time (entire pattern durations) to determine suggested changes to baseline timing settings. This feature can provide more conservative agencies with benefits if they do not wish to adjust timings in real-time but rather want the system to suggest changes but not implement them until they can be reviewed by the engineering staff.
Video | Bosch Video Management System 6.0
Bosch Video Management System 6.0
www.boschsecurity.com
24/7
u Maximum resilience to ensure continuous operation.
u Up to 2000 cameras with a single recording server
mean high savings.
u A scalable system growing with your needs.
u Best integration with Bosch Video hardware.
u Version 6.0 offers integration with selected 3rd
party cameras and storage systems, as well as other
hardware and software.
The Bosch Video Management System is a unique
enterprise IP video security solution that provides
seamless management of digital video, audio, and data
across any IP network. It provides the best VMS to go
with Bosch CCTV devices, leveraging the unique
capabilities of Bosch cameras and recording solutions.
It nevertheless offers interfaces and standards to
integrate other systems and manufacturers.
The system is equipped with a unique embedded
resilience.
It keeps operations up and running even when both,
Management and Recording Servers fail.
On edge intelligent Video Analyses and the unmatched
recording technology managing up to 2000 cameras
(including up to 500 ONVIF cameras) with a single
server dramatically reduces the total cost of
ownership.
The Bosch Video Management System allows a very
flexible system design:
• Professional: Single Management Server System
1 to 2000 cameras out of the box.
Only this system supports Bosch VMS-BIS
Connectivity.
• Enterprise System: Supporting multi Management
Server requirements for Metro, Airport and other
large industrial facilities across different time zones.
Supports controlled monitoring across different legal
entities. Monitoring of up to 10,000 cameras across
10 subsystems per user group resulting in 200,000
cameras in total.
Up to 30 subsystems per user group for <100
cameras per subsystem, allowing each operator to
access events, alarms, live and playback from up to
30 Management Server computers simultaneously.
• Maximum 500 ONVIF cameras per Management
Server
• Access to live including PTZ control and recorded
video of up to 9999 sites with Bosch DVR recorders.
The Bosch Video Management System is installed on a
Microsoft Windows Operating System.
We recommend using Bosch Workstations and
Servers. They are fully tested and optimized for Bosch
Video Management System.
In addition to the Bosch ST standard terms and
conditions of sale, the Bosch Software Maintenance
Agreement is a great option to keep the VMS always
up-to date.
It can be found in the online CCTV product catalog.
System overview
Software components
• Management Server software provides management,
monitoring, and control of the entire system. One
single Management Server manages up to 2000
Cameras/encoders.
• Enterprise Management Server provides access to
multiple Management Servers
• Video Recording Manager (VRM) provides recording
and playback management of video, audio, and data.
One single VRM manages up to 2000 cameras/
encoders (including up to 500 ONVIF cameras).
• Configuration Client software provides the straight
forward user interface for system configuration and
management
• Config Wizard software provides easy and fast setup
of a small recording system when using the
Bosch VMS Appliance.
• Bosch VMS Appliance: DIVAR IP 3000/7000 is a
simple and reliable all-in-one recording, viewing, and
management solution for network surveillance
systems with 32 channels pre-licensed.
• Operator Client software provides the ergonomic and
intuitive user interface for system monitoring and
operation.
• Mobile Video Service provides a transcoding service.
It transcodes the live and recorded video stream from
a configured camera according to the available
network bandwidth. This service enables video clients
to view high-quality images via low bandwidth.
• Mobile App (iPhone or iPad): Access live and
playback video from remote in single or quad-view.
Alert and share live video from mobile camera with
other security staff with a single click. App available in AppStore.
• Web Client: Access live and playback video from
remote in single or quad-view. Search for text data
and trigger export of videos on Management Server.
• Bosch Video Streaming Gateway: Bosch cameras,
ONVIF cameras, JPEG cameras, RTSP encoders.
Bosch Video Recording Manager (VRM) provides a
Distributed Network Video Recorder solution,
eliminating the need for dedicated NVRs.
The usage of multiple client Workstations offers great
scalability.
Functions
Embedded Resilience
• An Offline Client ensures continuous operation for
live, playback and export while Management Server is
disconnected.
Video Recording Manager (VRM)
VRM provides load balancing and failover for the iSCSI
Storage System and makes it easy to add additional
iSCSI Storage Systems later on. VRM introduces the
concept of a storage virtualization layer. This
abstraction layer enables VRM to manage all of the
individual disk arrays in the entire system as various
“virtual” pools of storage, which are intelligently
allocated as needed.
A storage pool is a container for one or more iSCSI
storage systems that share the same load balancing
properties.
Dual / failover recording:
• A Primary VRM manages the normal recording of the
cameras of your system. You use a Secondary VRM to
achieve dual recording of your cameras.
Dual recording allows you to record video data from
the same camera to different locations.
A Secondary VRM can manage the secondary
recording for multiple Primary VRMs.
A Failover VRM is used for continuing the recording of
a failed Primary VRM or a failed Secondary VRM
computer.
Bosch VMS furthermore supports Live and Playback of
the following recording engines:
• DIVAR IP series, Local Storage, Direct iSCSI
recording; Bosch Recording Station (BRS), Video
Streaming Gateway (VSG).
For legacy purposes the following recording engines
are supported: DVR, DiBos, VIDOS (Live only).
Cameras
• Supports Bosch UHD and panoramic cameras,
MPEG-4 & H.264 encoders, MPEG-4 & H.264 IP
cameras, and IP AutoDome cameras in SD & HD
format
• Supported HD resolutions: 720p and 1080p, 5, 8 and
12 Megapixel
• Intelligent Video Analysis (IVA) and Forensic Search
• Automated Network Replenishment (ANR)
• Regions of Interest
• Intelligent tracking
• Quality settings attuned to each camera type.
Refer to data sheets of the cameras for further
details.
• Support of 3rd party cameras via RTSP, MJPEG or
ONVIF Profile S. The list of supported 3rd party
cameras is published on the Bosch Integration
Partner Program website.
Deployment
• Updates of Operator Client and Configuration Client
automatically deployed from Management Server
• One-click hotfix deployment
• New Setup: Internet Information Service is configured automatically for use with Mobile Video Service, enter
the desired number of VSG instances, perform an
update installation with a very few clicks.
Configuration
• Generic camera connection
Bosch VMS retrieves the values of currently known
functions on connection to unknown Bosch IP
cameras/encoders. It is thus not required to upgrade
to new Bosch VMS version to connect new camera
models in the future.
Valid for firmware 5.70 or later
• Automatic scan of IP devices
• Automatic IP address assignment of IP devices
• Configurable Logical Tree
• Device states indicated by icons, including network
connection loss, video loss, and camera deadjustment
2 | Bosch Video Management System 6.0
• Batch firmware updates of IP devices
Scheduling
• Up to 10 Recording Schedules with Holidays and
Exception Days
• Task Schedules with Holidays, Exception Days, and
recurring schedule support
• Per camera settings for minimum and maximum
recording times
• Per camera, per recording schedule frame rate and
quality settings for live, normal recording, motion
recording, and alarm recording
Event handling
• Compound events (combining events with Boolean
logic)
• Event duplication allowing separate handling
• Event assignment to user groups
• Schedule dependent event logging
• Schedule dependent event-triggered Command Script
invocation
• 4 configurable user-events (can be triggered via menu command)
• Mapping of ONVIF events to Bosch VMS events.
ONVIF events can then trigger Bosch VMS alarms and
recording.
Alarm configuration
• Schedule dependent alarm generation
• Alarms can trigger alarm-mode recording for any
cameras.
• 100 alarm priorities can be defined.
• Occurrence of text data can trigger alarm recording.
Sequences
• Pre-configured camera sequences with 25 cameras
with each up to 100 steps with individual dwell times.
• “Automatic Sequences” created by multiple selection
and drag and drop to Image panes.
User Management
• LDAP compatible for integration with user
management systems such as Microsoft Active
Directory
• Access to system resources individually controlled
per user group
• Logical Tree customized per user group – users only
see devices for which they have access
• User group rights for protecting, deleting, exporting, and printing video
• User group rights for Logbook access
• User group priority assignment for PTZ control and
Allegiant camera access
• Individual per-camera privileges assignable per user
group for live access, playback, audio, text data
display, PTZ control
• Dual-authorization logon – special privileges and
priorities granted when two users log on together
Efficient operation
Bosch VMS puts a strong emphasis to efficient
operation, which consists of several disciplines: